Home

HMI Setting

Contents

1. Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server HMI model MT6056T MTS056T 320 x 2344 e HMI sao o Port no 8000 used at MODBUS server s port no After finishing the setting MODBUS Server will be list on Device tab You can send MODBUS command to read or write the data from MODBUS Server after downloading the file of XOB to HMI System Parameter Settings fF Prot MI N A H emetilP Local Poxt s000 UST 19 1 2 How to Read From Write to MODBUS Server MT8000 the client can read from write to another MT8000 the server via MODBUS protocol Adding a new device in the client If client s PLC I F is set as Ethernet please select MODBUS RTU TCP IP as PLC type and fill in the correct IP and Port no 415 Device Properties UE A 140 MODBUS_TCPIP 50 1192 168 1 111 Fort 8000 Send ACE delay ma L Parameter 2 If the client use RS232 485 interface the PLC type must be set as MODBUS RTU please make sure the communication parameter setting is correct Device Properties Name MODBUS RTU HMI GO PLC Location Local v Settings PLC type MODBUS RTU PLC I F RS 485 2W v PLC default station no 1 1 COM COMI 9600 E 8 1 i ir COM Port Settings T
2. RS485 MT8000 RS 485 SAIA PCD1 9P D SUB Female Port 1 MT8000 RS 485 SAIA PCDI 9P D SUB Female Port 0 COMI COM3 Oow e E 587 SEW Eurodrive MOVITRAC SEW Eurodrive series model MOVITRAC 07 inverter http sg sew eurodrive com HMI Setting DICTE O EI H a O AA O ag e Psp IE E AS H Device address S 000 255 S Sub index W INDEX SSSAAAAA A 08000 25000 A Index The MOVITRAC 07 doesn t support Sub index other series maybe support please fixed to input 000 When input S and A the correct format example as follow Sub index 15 Index 8359 Format is 01508359 Wiring diagram Easy View MT8000 MOVITRAC 07 RS 485 2W COM 1 RS 485 me Pin D E gt gt Green Pin2 D E OOOO gt Red 588 SIEMENS 87 200 Siemens S7 200 series PLC CPU212 214 215 216 221 222 224 226 226XM http www ad siemens com HMI Setting Baud rate 9600 9600 19200 Must same as the PLC setting Parity bit Even Even Odd None Must same as the PLC setting Data Bits 7 8 Must same as the PLC setting Stop Bits l 1 2 Must same as the PLC setting PLC Station No 2 0 255 Must same as the PLC setting Turn around delay 5 ms THT e Online Simulator aT Perea rondan no H H PLC Setting Device address dddd o 0 40957 Input 1 B Q dddo 0 40957 Output O 589 B M auo 0 40957 B vwait diiio 0 102397 V Memory bit address ddddd 0
3. Select operatable classes for each user User 1 MEE Peswork 11 Ma Ma Oc Op Oz Or Y Enable Password 2222 a OB Mc Mp OE OF User 3 F Enable Password 15355 Da OB Oc OD ME MF User 4 _ Enable User 5 Enable User _ Enable User Enable User 2 Enable User 9 Enable User 10 _ Enable User 11 _ Enable User 12 _ Enable According to the security setting EB8000 will control the classes accessibility for each user In EB8000 None and class A to class F 7 class choices in total are provided User restriction ade soun For example when the security of User 1 is set as below only can he she access to None A C and E class 64 User 1 4 Enable Password 1111 Ma OF Mic OD ME CIF Please refer to the Object s Security Guard chapter for more details 5 5 Font Parameters in Font tab determine the font of no ASCII which is used on EB8000 System Parameter Settings Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Fonts for no ascu strings 3 of 9 Barcode Add y Albertus Extra Bold i Fonts for no ascii strings Fonts for no asci strings are listed above When users use a no ascii font which isn t listed on Fonts for no ascu strings table EB8000 will select a font in the list to substitute the front automatically User also can test which no ASCU strings of Windows can be use
4. e em a l ESs 405 Settings Multicast ddress 35 Device Address 1 5 7 AAN AAA DO 4 Downloading settings to Compax3 Servo 582 5 Setting EB8000 system parameter and connecting with PLC for communication of HMI and Servo 583 SAIA PCD PGU mode SAIA PCD series PGU mode http www saia burgess com HMI Setting PLC type SAIA PCD PGU mode SATA PCD S BUS modo Com port RS232 RS232 RS485 ae 3600 an 19200 if HMI Station No PLC Setting Device address Bit Word Device Type Range Memo ddd 0 8191 ddd 0 511 ddd 0 1599 ddd 0 450 Reg Float ddd 0 4095 support single float point MEN ddd 0 4095 584 Wiring diagram RS232 MT8000 RS232 SAIA PCD PGU port 9P D SUB Male 9P D SUB Female 6 DSR Of PGU Port PGU connected 585 SAIA PCD S Bus mode SAIA PCD series S Bus mode http www saia burgess com HMI Setting PLC type SAIA PCD S BUS SAIA PCD PGU mode PDS driver mode RS232 RS232 RSASS 9600 9600 19200 38400 pwns fe semis ft ET ncm PLC Setting RS232 Port 0 Type RS232 RS485 2W S BUS Mode Data S2 Port 1 Type RS485 Device address ddd 0 8191 ddd 0 511 ddd 0 511 ddd 0 1599 ddd 0 450 ddd 0 4095 support single float point Reg Float 586 Wiring diagram RS232 MT8000 RS232 SAIA PCD PGU port 9P D SUB Male 9P D SUB Female rama x 7 x aa are 6 Rx RX l SN e gt 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND
5. Clear Ex ASCI UNICODE At last select a suitable Picture for each Function Key object GP_0 is a picture object where is place at the lowest layer as the background Step 3 Go to General tab in System Parameter Settings and click Add in Keyboard Add a keyboard dialog appears Select WINDOW 200 and press OK Add a keyboard window Window no 200 Keyboard As illustration shown as below a new item 200 Keyboard will be added to Keyboard in General tab in System Parameter Settings System Parameter Settings Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Fast selection button Position PCLERNL Saver Back light saver None w midante LS MCLEAN SAVEL None w midante LS Lipton Startup window no Extra no of events D Common window Eeyboand caret color gt Object layout FW A enabled Keyboard 50 Keypad Integer Add 51 Keypad Floating 52 Keypad Number 53 ASCII Large 54 ASCII Middle 55 ASCII Small 56 Keypad Number 200 keyboard After a Keypad object is created when open the object of Numeric Input or ASCII Input 200 Keyboard can be found in Keyboard setting tab as shown below Popup Position is used to decide the display position of the Keypad in a screen where EB8000 divides the screen into 9 areas 130 Eevboard
6. Ports COM amp LET j T 9 Communications Port COM1 T Flow control None L A Communications Port COMZ A D inter Ey o Z Weintek Virtual Serial Port COM gt C Advanced Restore Detaults 95 Processors E arer aed P NTN aae kre Wee General Port Settings Driver Details Data bits 9 Parity For example users change virtual serial port from COM 3 to COM 9 662 Ports COM amp LPT l on Communications Port Com ol Communications Port COM Printer Port LE 79 Weintek virtual Serial Port COMS d Processors de SCSI and RAID controllers 2 sound video and game controllers 3 System devices lInivercal Serial Brie conkeollerc Use FIFO buffers requires 16550 compatible UART Select lower settings to correct connection problems Select higher settings for faster performance Recelwe Buffer Low 1 Transmit Buffer Low 1 COM Port Humber Select COM 9 and click OK the virtual serial port will be changed to COM 9 663 Ey Device Manager File Action wiew Help He Z Batteries E Computer Se Disk drives E Display adapters Y Floppy disk controllers q Floppy disk drives L IDE ATA ATAPI controllers Keyboards Mice and other pointing devices Ports COM amp LPT F Communications Pork 0111 F Communications Pork COZ A Printer Port LP Weintek Virtual Serial
7. Destination value 5 Tolerance 1 210 Alarm Indicator Target Alarm Dynamic Address When register s value is larger than High limit the color of filled area will change to High color when register s value is smaller than Low limit the color of filled area will change to Low color When select Enable the Low limit and High limit of Limitation alarm and the Desti Value of Destination all come from designated register See the picture below Hew Bar Graph Object E General Outline Shape Attribute Type Noma oy Direction Up OO Bar colortz tyle Fame A Background L ix Par a Bar style ee Target indicator Enable Color Target value 2 L204 2 Tolerance a Alarm indicators Low limit L W20 High limit L W20 Low color Leas High color PA Tarsetalan zero pan dynamit address Enable PLC name Local HMI Y Device type LW v Address ZU Exyetem tag Index register The following table shows the read address of low limit high limit and destination The Address means the device address for example if the device address is LW20 and data format is 16 bit The Alarm Low limit is LW 20 The Alarm High limit is LW21 211 The Target indicator is LW22 The Zero is LW23 The Span is LW24 Data Format Alarm Alarm Target Zero Span ee etn mima tee 16 bit BCD Address
8. Profile color Transparent Curve Channel 0 E Pen property Color INN Width e E Maker Point width 5 xl Line Point O E axis projection Y axis projection Reference line Limit from PLC Limit Low limit 0 High limit 100 Reference line 1 20 Reference line 2 40 Reference line 3 60 y Reference line 4 B0 Enable Transparent It will not display the background color Disable Transparent It will display the background color Set the attribute of XY curve color and width for each channel Channel Channel 0 D Pen property Color lr mia 1 v J 259 Maker There are four different type of XY plot 1 e Line Point X axis projection and Y axis projection check one of them For Line and Point selection set appropriate point width unit in pixels Maker Point width 5 ha 2 Line Point O E axie projection Y axis projection Line amp Point X axis projection is shown as the following Remarks Please refer to the figure below there is a curve containing 7 points from PO to P6 The system carries out X axis projection with following steps a Automatically calculate two projected points in X axis Xo 0 and Xe 0 Link all these points in the order of Xo 0 PO P1 P6 X6 0 and returns to Xo 0 at last c Fill out all enclosed areas formed 260 X axis projection
9. float source result COS 90 result result is 0 source 60 GetData source Local HMI LW 0 1 COS source result result is 0 5 end macro command TAN source result Description Calculate the tangent of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable 367 Example macro command maint float source result TAN 45 result result is 1 source 60 TAN source result result is 1 732 end macro command COT source result Description Calculate the cotangent of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command main float source result COT 45 result result is 1 source 60 COT source result result is 0 5774 end macro command SEC source result Description Calculate the secant of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command main float source result SEC 45 result result is 1 414 source 60 SEC source result 1f source is 60 result is 2 368 end macro command Name Syntax CSC source result Description Calculate the cosecant of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command maint float source result CSC 45 result result is 1 414 source 30 CSC source result result is 2 end macro command Name ASI
10. ther station Detailed setting 30 _ gt STEP 8 Cancel lo time It is not possible to cancel while communication Yetu After finishing settings as above click Connection test for testing the communication and sending the PLC s program 549 MODBUS ASCII MODBUS ASCII CONTROLLER http www modbus org HMI Setting RS485 RS232 RS485 Baud rate 9600 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 ee H ee esw ts PLC Setting Modbus ASCII protocol Device address ddddd 1 65535 Input Register read only ddddd 1 65535 Output Register B ax pit didada 100 6553515 Output Register bit 550 Modbus RTU function code Ox lx 3x 4x 0x01 Read coil 0x05 write single coil 0x02 Read discrete input N A for write operation 0x04 Read input register N A for write operation 0x03 Read holding register 0x10 write multiple register 3xbit is equivalent to 3x Axbit is equivalent to 4x Wiring diagram MODBUS RS232 PORT MT8000 RS 232 Modbus ASCII 9P D SUB Controller RS232 Port san 3 any sam MODBUS RS422 485 PORT MT8000 Modbus ASCII Controller COM1 RS 485 4w RS422 Port MT8000 RS 485 2Wire Modbus ASCII 9P D SUB Controller RS485 COMI COM3 MESES WE HEEE RA 5 GND 5 GND 551 MODBUS RTU MODBUS RTU CONTROLLER http www modbus org HMI Setting Recommend Modbus RTU RS485 9600 Even l l Online Simulator YES Extend address m
11. w osmo ComterstawsBis B s B sr B x Wiring diagram 1 CPU unit DL05 DL06 DL105 DL230 DL240 DL250 DL350 DL450 RS232 port MT8000 RS232 KOYO DirectLogic PLC RS232 port 9P D SUB 6P RJ12 phone jack 3 TX 4 TX 7 TX 2 RX 6 RX 8 RX 2 CPU unit DL06 DL250 CPU Dorz RS232 MT8000 RS232 KOYO DirectLogic PLC 9P D SUB CPU R5S232 Port2 T ENSURE 5 GND RJ 12 6Pin 3 CPU unit DLO6 DL250 CPU Port2 RS422 KOYO DirectLogic PLC CPU RS422 Port2 15P D SUB Female MT8000 COMI RS 485 4w 9P D SUB E 12 RTS 15 CTS Note DL06 DL250 CPU Port2 include RS232 and RS422 4 CPU unit DL430 DL440 DL450 CPU unit Port0 RS232 MT8000 RS232 KOYO DirectLogic PLC 9P D SUB DL405 CPU RS232 Port0 15P D SUB Female 5_GND oi o uae EESE EE CB in Female nnector 15 D Cz 5 CPU unit DL430 DL440 DL450 CPU unit Port amp DL350 CPU unit Porz RS232 MT8000 RS232 KOYO DirectLogic PLC 9P D SUB DL305 405 CPU RS232 Port 25P D SUB Female S RX AX 7 GND q 4 RTC 5 QES 5 GND 25 pin Female D Connector 6 CPU unit DL430 DL440 DL450 CPU unit Portl amp DL350 CPU unit Porz RS422 KOYO DirectLogic PLC DL305 405 CPU RS422 Port 25P D SUB Female MT8000 COMI RS 485 4w 9P D SUB a 18 RTS 23 CTS 7 CPU unit DL450 CPU unit Port3 RS422 KOYO DirectLogic PLC DL405 CPU RS422 Port3 25
12. b If the input object data format is 16 bit unsigned then LW100 low limit position 16 bit unsigned LW100 1 high limit position 16 bit unsigned c If the input object data format is 32 bitfloat then LW100 low limit position 32 bit float LW100 2 high limit position 32 bit float Low limit When the value of the PLC s register 1s smaller than Low limit the value is displayed with pre defined color High limit When the value of the PLC s register is larger than High limit the value is 179 displayed with pre defined color Blink When the value of the PLC s register is smaller than Low limit or larger than High limit the object will display data with Blinking The picture below shows the Font tab available in both of the numeric input object and the numeric display object to set font font size color and aligning mode Numeric Input Objects Properties General Numeric Format Security Shane Font Profile Attribute Font Comic Sans MS Color BZ Size 12 v ve Attribute Color When the data is within high and low limit it will be displayed with this color Align There are three aligning modes Left Leading zero and Right The picture below shows the style of each modes Left 12 Leading zero 0012 Right 12 Size Set font size 180 13 10 ASCII Input and ASCII Display Obje
13. Index 5 Now 1f users change Index 5 value to 1 and then the contents of Toggle Switch are the same as those of LB16 and LB22 1 e LBO 16 LB16 and LB6 16 LB22 Object A LB 0 Index 5 LB 6 Index 5 127 Chapter 12 Keypad Design and Usage Both Numeric Input and ASCII Input objects have to use keypad as input tool Except calling up the keyboard to the screen users can design a fixed personalized keypad in the same window as input objects 12 1 Steps to Design a Pop up Keypad Step 1 Create and open a window for a keypad to be added For example set WINDOW 200 as the window for a keypad Step 2 Adjust the height and width of WINDOW 200 and create a variety of kinds of objects as Function Keys Input signals will be triggered by pressing Function Keys The Function Key objects on WINDOW 200 are arranged as above which must to be set as ASCH UNICODE mode 128 Where FK 11 is used as the Escape Esc key and its setting is ASCITUNICODE mode O Enter Backspace Clear ASCI 7 UNICODE FK 14 is used as the ENTER key and its setting is ASCITUNICODE mode O Baka OC O Ex ESCI 7 UNICODE Most of the other Function Keys are used as number or text inputs For example FK O is used to trigger signal of input number 1 and its setting 1s ASCITUNICODE mode O Enter Backspace
14. Local HMI N Device type LB e Address 0 DUR tag Address format ddddd range 0 11999 Index register Fox example supposed Use interlock function is checked and the Enable bit address is set to LB0 The object can be operated only when the state of LBO is ON The Interlock feature also provides the following settings Use interlock function Enable disable the interlock function Hide when disabled When the state of interlock function is OFF hide the object This function is used to set the object s security define the users permitted to operate the object When Operator class is selected as None the object operation is open to the users with all security levels The following settings are also provided in the function Disable protection permanently after initial activation Once the operator s operation class has ever conformed to the security of the object the system permanently stop checking the security of the object Even if the security level of the users 1s changed will not affect the operation of the object Display warning message if access denied When the user s current security level does not conform to the security level of the object a warning dialog appears 117 mnn Window 7 is set as an alert message for authority security Users can design the content of the message Make invisible while protected When a user s security lev
15. Set OFF When the operation is activated the bit device will Toggle When the operation is activated the bit device will be set to opposite Momentary When touch down the area the bit device will be set to ON when touch up the bit device will be set to OFF Periodical toggle The state of the bit device will be switched between ON and OFF periodically Operation s time interval can be selected in the combo box showed in the picture below Time interval 1 0 second gt Set ON when window When the window containing the Set Bit object is open opened the bit device will be automatically set to ON Set OFF when window When the window containing the Set Bit object is open opened the bit device will be automatically set to OFF Set ON when window When the window containing the Set Bit object is close closed the bit device will be automatically set to ON Set OFF when window When the window containing the Set Bit object is close closed the bit device will be automatically set to OFF Set ON when backlight When the backlight is turned on the bit device is on automatically set ON Set OFF when backlight When the backlight is turned on the bit device is on automatically set OFF Set ON when backlight When the backlight is turned off the bit device is Set OFF when backlight When the backlight is turned off the bit device 1s Macro Users can use set bit object to activate macro commands Mac
16. Transparent Enable Coordinate E Fin point Radius nner O l LS Circle O Rectangle OK In the above dialogue box users can set the meter display object s outline Refer to the picture below for the names of each part of the meter 215 Pange mark Tick mark ES oe Pin point Corrdinate Set the object s start degree and end degree the angle range is 0 360 degrees The following pictures show several results of different settings Start degree 290 End degree 70 Start degree 45 End degree 240 Start degree 120 End degree 135 216 Start degree 225 End degree 315 Background Set the object s background color and profile color Full circle When the Full circle is selected the object will display the whole circle otherwise the object will display the defined degree range See the picture Full eirele below ES non full circle Transparent When the Transparent is selected the object will not display the background and profile color See the picture below a Transparent 217 To set the tick mark s number and color To set Pointer s style length width and color To set pin point s style radius and color The following pictures show the Limit tab and the sign of low and high limit set in the Limit tab Hew Meter Display Object General Outline Limits
17. W W ddd 1 71024 discontinuous W Z ddd 1 512 Wiring diagram Ethernet MT8000 Ethernet Wire color Ethernet Hub or Switch RJ45 RJ45 atx orange 1 EA e IET Ry 45 ee eoo S i AAA Cr so E a 8 Ethernet Direct connect crossover cable MT8000 Ethernet Wire color FA M3 Ethernet module RJ45 RJ45 White Orange White Green 5 BD4 White Blue E BD3 White Brown 616 Chapter 24 MT8000 Supports Printers MT8000 print function supports EPSON ESC P2 HP PCL and SP Printer 1 EPSON ESC P2 Impact Printers LQ 300 LQ 300 LQ 300K RS232 LQ 300 II RS232 USB Inkjet Printer Stylus Photo 750 USB Laser Printer USB EPL 5800 2 HP PCL Series USB port conform to HP PCL level 3 protocol Laser Printer HP LaserJet P1505n HP PCL 5e e PCL 5 was released on the HP LaserJet HI in March 1990 adding Intellifont font scaling developed by Compugraphic now part of Agfa outline fonts and HP GL 2 vector graphics e PCL 5e PCL 5 enhanced was released on the HP LaserJet 4 in October 1992 and added bi directional communication between the printer and the PC and Windows fonts Caution For HP printer we do not support 1 HP LaserJet P1005 which is not PCL 5 HP LaserJet P1006 HP LaserJet 1000 which is support HostBase Printing language HP LaserJet 1010 which is support HostBase Printing language ON a eer A S 617 HP Color LaserJet 1500 which is support HostBase Printin
18. s o o O aane s ox e o pa e yf m o epa ef s w ow eoe w m a owm E OCT 540 ddd Decimal hhh Hexadecimal ooo Octal Wiring diagram RS 485 4W MT8000 COM1 QJ71C24 CH 2 RS 485 4w RS 422 9P D SUB Male RS 232 M T8000 RS232 QJ71C24 CH 1 RS232 port 9P D SUB 9P D SUB Male Pax ome e ex 541 Q00 Q01 CPU port RS 232 MT8000 RS232 Q00 Q01 CPU port 9P D SUB Mini DIN 6pin Po ex 6 ex 8 ex l 5 ono 5 aw s cnn 5 542 Y 1 Oa 6 2 He E OJD 3 yO Oe 4 MINI DIN 6Pin Female MITSUBISHI QJ71E71 Mitsubishi Q type QJ71E71 100 Ethernet module http www mitsubishi automation com HMI Setting Parameters Recommend PLC type MITSUBISHI QJ71E71 V1 00 PLC Station No TCP IP port x s Dx Dy v k y z u o aana za Ddd Decimal hhh Hexadecimal 543 Wiring diagram Ethernet MT8000 Ethernet Wire color Ethernet Hub or RJ45 Switch RJ45 1 TX White Orange 1 RX TX 5 Mitin BD4 Blue 5 poe White 6 RX Gren 7 BD3 White Brown lL BD3 a BD3 onn CA 8 BD3 Ethernet Direct connect crossover cable MT8000 Ethernet Wire color Modbus TCP Device RJ45 RJ45 e a E E a E E es e aa 3 BD4 White Blue p e TI O ay 2 tx 7 BD3 White Brown ee B Brown QJ71E71 100 Ethernet module settings 1 Use Q CPU s USB or RS232 setting PLC parameters 544 e MELSOFT series GX Developer C MELSE
19. 10255 Index register Data Sampling To select data sampling object as the source of data Refer to the data Object index sampling section for related information Trend mode To select the mode of data source There are Real time and History for selection a Real time In this mode it can display the sampling data from the beginning of the MT8000 operation to the present time If previous data are required you must select the History mode to read the data from historical record 222 you can use the Hold control object to pause the update of trend display but it is only pause the update of the trend display and it will not stop the operation of data sampling object The picture below shows the Hold control setting page Set the state of the designated register to ON it will pause the updating of the trend display Hold control Enable uae J Drass Index register b History In this mode the data come from the historical record of the designated data sampling object in Data sampling index Data sampling object will use the sampling data which was sorted in according to dates The system use History control to select the historical records that are created by the same data sampling object The picture below shows the History control setting page History control Address system tg Index register The system sorts the historical records of sampling
20. 383 if return value gt 0 then read_data 0 response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 data in 4x 1 read_data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 data in 4x 2 SetData read_data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end if end macro command Description GetData read_data start device name device type address offset data count or GetData read data device name device type address offset 1 Receives data from the PLC Data is stored into read _data start read _datal start data count 1 data count is the amount of received data In general read data is an array but if data count is 1 read data can be an array or an ordinary variable Below are two methods to read one word data macro command main short read data 1 2 read data 2 GetData read data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 GetData read data 2 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 end macro command device name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters as follows see FATEK KB Series 384 Device Model General Security Font Device let Location Device Type Port Local M TO Wid Wid Remote 1P 192 168 0 205 Fort M TRV M N A N Remote HMI B FEemote F 210 68 117 224 Po M TRV M N N Remote HMI C Remote IP 210 68 117 224 Po M TRV NIR N A N MITSUBISHI FEOn Local Local MITSUBISHI FX 0 Rs COM FATEE Local Local FAT
21. CPM1 CIFO1 adapter for CPM1 CPM1A CPM72A series CQM1 CQM1H series CPM1H SCB41 communication module for CQM1H CPUS5 1 61 MT8000 RS232 OMRON CPU RS 232 9P 9P D SUB Female D SUB Female aca ar x ara ex 2 C200h LK201 3G2A6 LK201 communication module C200HW COM02 03 04 05 06 communication module MT8000 RS232 OMRON CPU RS 232 9P 9P D SUB Female D SUB Female COMI COM2 COM3 E o T O TS E 568 OMRON CJ1 CS1 OMRON CJ1M CJ1H CJ1G CS1H and CS1G Host Link Protocol FINS command This driver supports Extend Addressing mode http oe1web omron com oei Products PLC htm HMI Setting IN JON a IES SUN ee S o IE Online Simulator YES Extend address mode w o o PLC Setting Device address Bit Bi yaa aon Counter CNT ddd ddd 0 32767 Data Memory DM 569 wa a w won maan ma w a o ama woa cio a os T anaa ma NT UTN wo r aos OO eo O va e w w TE Wiring diagram RS 232 MT8000 RS232 OMRON CPU RS 232 9P 9P D SUB Female D SUB Female ox e ex sex 570 OMRON CJ1 CS1 Ethernet OMRON CJ1M CJ1H CJ1G CS1H and CS1G Ethernet FINS http oe1web omron com oei Products PLC htm HMI Setting Parameters Recommend PLC type OMRON CJ1 CS1 Ethernet PLC Setting FINS Ethernet protocol Device address ddd 0 4095 Counter CNT 571 dddd ddd 0 4095 Counter CNT Wiring diagram Eth
22. Enclosed region Xs 0 Xo 0 Xs 0 Xo 0 Similarly for Y axis projection Enclosed region 5 0 Yo Enclosed region 261 Reference In order to make the XY plot more readable you can configure up to 4 horizontal line reference lines on the graph Fill in high low limit and Y axis coordinate for each reference line Reference line Limit from PLE Limit Low imit U High limit 100 Reference line 20 a y Reference line 2 40 m Reference line 3 60 A Reference lined 80 You may also use PLC address to define high and low limit Reference line Limit PLC name Local HMI e Device type LW Ra Address 20 Index register 16 bit Signed se Reference line 1 20 Reference line 2 40 E y Reference line 3 60 Reference lined 80 262 13 21 Alarm Bar and Alarm Display Objects 13 21 1 Overview Alarm bar and alarm display object are used to display alarm messages Alarm messages are those events registered in the event log and meet trigger conditions Alarm bar and alarm display objects display these alarms in order of priority and triggering time Alarm bar object scroll all alarm messages in one line alarm display object displays alarm messages in multi line and each line represents one alarm message The following pictures show that the alarm message are displayed in alarm display and alarm bar objects Refer
23. First create a new device in the device table The device type of the new device is set to Free Protocol and named with MODBUS RTU device as follows Device list No Name Location Device type Interface MI Local HN Local MT8121T 800 x 600 Disable ie A C Local PLC L MODBUS RTU Device Local Free Protocol COM1 19200 E 8 1 Name AAA a Location Settings Chic ope type Free Protocol Y IO The interface of the device PLC I F uses RS 232 now If connecting a MODBUS TCP IP device the interface must select Ethernet In addition 1t 1s necessary to set correct IP and port number as follows 396 PLC type Free Protocol M W 1 00 FREE_PROTOCOL so 4 LC UE Ethernet Settings IF 1192 168 1 103 Port 302 Suppose that HMI will read the data of 4x 1 and 4x 2 on the device First utilize OUTPORT to send out a read request to the device The prototype of OUTPORT is OUTPORT command start device name cmd count Because MODBUS RTU device is a MODBUS RTU device the read request must follow MODBUS RTU protocol The request uses Reading Holding Registers 0x03 command to read data The following picture displays the content of the command The items of the station number byte 0 and the last two bytes CRC are ignored Request Starting Address Ox0000 to OxFFFF 2 Bytes 1 to 125 0x7D Response N x2Bytes x N Qu
24. Shape Value Ze Span 10 gt Range lirit lt Enable Low aa Mia E ia iF vun Dunarmip limits Low ba 30S mada 30 To set object s display range Meter display object will use the value of Zero and Span and the value of register to calculate the pointer s indication position For example supposed that Zero 0 Span 100 when the value of register 1s 30 and Start degree 0 End degree 360 then the degree indicated by pointer 1s 30 Zero Span Zero End degree Start degree 30 0 100 0 360 0 108 Pointer will indicate the position of 108 degrees See the picture below 218 Range limit To set the value of low and high limit the display color width of the sign of low high limit Below illustration use above setting to display the range mark 60 Dynamic When Dynamic Limits is not selected the low limit and high limit are Limits fixed value which directly comes from the settings See the example below uncheck the low limit 1s 30 and high limit 1s 60 _ Dynamit limits Low init 0 Fig Dynamic When Dynamic Limits is selected the low limit and high limit are decided by Limits check the register Please refer to the following dialog Dynamit limits PLC name Address System tag Index register 16 bit Unsigned There following table shows the read address of low limit and high limit The Add
25. Step 4 Add a Set Bit object set the LB 0 as ON and overlay it on the Numeric Input object If the user does not want to use the keypad set LBO as OFF to disable the feature Hew Set Bit Object General Security Shape Label Design A PLE name Local HMI k Write address Device type LE K Mes Uen na Address format ddddd range 0 11999 Index register Write after button is released Setsple SHON A A tiribute 133 12 3 Steps to Use Fixed Keypad Users can also place a fixed keypad in the same window as input objects In this way keypad can t be moved or disable Step 1 Create a Numeric Input object and select Use an external keyboard 134 Hew Homeric Input Object EA General Normer Format Secority Shape Foni Des riptian Read addres PLC mame Local HHI Device bpe LE Address 0 Sytem ag Address format ddddd range 0 10255 C iniex mgr 0 GER SHG n C Enable Input onder _ Enable keyboard Hint 1 the keyboard ian USB keyboard on mime reci webads oron the ame window please check Use an extemal keyboard Step 2 Design a keyboard by function keys and place it on the screen ASCITUNICODE mode Enter Backspace Clear Ex 3 ASCI UNICODE Step 3 Design the keypad by function key objects and place the keypad on the window 135 136 Chapter 13 Object This chapter is to illustr
26. T Password Restriction S 10 WINDOW 010 TRD 7 1 1 Be gt E E 2 LIB BLE T 4 LEL ic WPomBe he EHUR OBS il a Left alignment TRIO 640 x 480 pr 3 2 Save and Compile the Project In the menu select File Save to save the project After the mtp file is saved select Tools Compile or click Compile icon to compile the project and check if the screen configuration is correct A xob file will be obtained after compiling 2 ET E L Compile an A successfully compiled file will get the dialog as below 28 Project name E EBS000 projectiMTP1 mtp OB file name CA EBSO0O project MTP1 x0b OB password Font fleis CAEBSOO0 fonti MTP1 0 ttf Arial CA EBSODO font MTP1 1 ttf Times Hew Roman O error s O warningts Object size 41340 bytes Font size 312428 bytes Picture size 287108 bytes i 770 bytes 36474 bytes 14 bytes 679128 bytes 0 66M comple 3 3 Simulate the Project Either On line or Off line There are two types of simulation Off line simulation amp On line simulation By virtual device PC simulates the operations of PLC without connecting to PLC On the contrary On line simulation 1s executed by connecting PC with PLC and accurately setting the communication parameters When simulating on PC if the control target is a local PLC i e the PLC directly connected to PC there s a 10 minutes limit 3 3 1 Off l
27. ad seit aa sb aa Te e MIE els ME ES W Ethernet E Address increases 8 words ex I1 19 117 125 the rule is same as above ex Q1 Q9 Q17 reia Read Only the rule is same as above MN Read Only the rule is same as above coo on Read Only the rule is same as above Read Only the rule is same as a Wiring diagram Ethernet MTS8000 Ethernet Wire color Ethernet Hub or RJ45 Switch RJ45 RX 1 TX White Orange oe e White Brown 7 BD3 BD3 Brown 8 BD3 481 Ethernet Direct connect crossover cable MT8000 Ethernet Wire color Modbus TCP Device RJ45 RJ45 ee e oe ee ee e oe pee IN BD3 Brown 8 BD3 482 HAN YOUNG Temperature Controller http hynux com kor HMI Setting Notes PLC type Heng Young Seres Compot RS4854W fo Must match the PLC s port setting Baudrate 9600 fo Must match the PLC s port setting Must match the PLC s port setting Daa Bis 8 Tors Must match the PLC s port setting Must match the PLC s port setting 0 255 Must match the PLC s port setting Device address B I O wv DP Wiring diagram MT8000 PLC 485 Han Young RS485 4w 9Pin D Sub RS485 483 Heng Yuan Sensor EU sereis EUS series EU10 series http www hysensor com cn HMI Setting PLC type Heng Yuan Sensor OS ma T an an T aR e mann TRT SHH H H HMI Station No PLC Station No 1 31 imei Ex
28. category equal to 2 3 or 4 Please refer to Category statement in Event Log chapter 271 Alarm Event Log Event Display Objects Properties General Event Display hape Font Category i AAA ESERIA MA k Include categories 0 E i Color Acknowledge n select box pS AAA T G T C Format Acknowledge Acknowledge style 13 12 19 A Event f When LW f gt 10 B 431218 Of Event 2 when LB10 ON L ERS SAE ANAE EA e a 3 42 45 Event 2 when LB10 ON ESE S Event 1 When LW 1 gt 10 19512714 E E Event 0 when LWO 7001 Sequence no Return to normal Select box You may select Click or Double click to acknowledge a new event When a new event comes up the operator can Click or Double click to acknowledge the new event the system will change the text color of that event and export the write value registered with the event to the designated register Take use of this feature the user can register a popup window and put the warning message in the window then configure an indirect window object when the event is acknowledged the write value is written into the read address of the indirect window and call up the popup window Max event no The maximum number of events to be displayed in the event display object When the number of events is larger than the maximum the oldest event will be removed from the event di
29. crossover cable 00008 LW Different HMIs can monitor and control each other s data through the Ethernet network By using the system reserved register LB and LW one HMI can master performance of other HMI s One HMI can handle requests from a maximum of 32 other HMIs simultaneously Here is an example of communicating two HMIs HMI A and HMI B When HMI A wants to use the set bit object to control the LB123 node of HMI B the procedure for setting the Project files MTP on HMI A is as follows Step 1 Set the IP address of the two HMIs Refer to the related chapter for the details Suppose that the IP address of HMI A and HMI B are set for 192 168 1 1 and 192 168 1 2 respectively Step 2 Running the EB8000 and select the Device Table tab on the System Parameter Setting menu then add the IP address and Port number of HMI B The picture below shows the content of HMI A s MTP projects System Parameter Settings Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Device list Hare Location Device type Interface IF Protoc Local HMI Local MT8121T 800 x 600 Disable N A Remote P 192 168 1 MTE Ethemet TPP Local HMI 423 Device Attributes HMI PLC IF Address Setting Port no 1000 Step 3 Select HMI B for PLC name on the Set Bit Object s Attributes menu and now HMI A can operate the content o
30. device name is the name of a device defined in the device table and the device must be a Free Protocol type device data count is the amount of sent data and can be a constant or a variable Example To use an OUTPORT function a Free Protocol device must be created first as follows System Parameter Settings con Extended Memory Device list 0 am Location Device type Interface U Mr l E ocal MT8121T 800 x 600 Disable Il Local PLC L MODBUS RTU Device Leal Free Protocol COM1 19200 E 8 1 wa mn l n Device Properties Name EA HMI 9 PLC Location Settings V 1 00 FREE_PROTOCOL so PLC I F RS 232 s PLC default station no 0 COM COM1 19200 E 8 1 381 The device is named MODBUS RTU Device The port attribute depends on the setting of this device the current setting is 19200 E 8 1 Below is an example of executing an action of writing single coil SET ON to a MODBUS device macro command main char command 32 short address checksum FILL command 0 0 32 command initialization command 0 0x1 station no command 1 0x5 function code Write Single Coil address 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 command 4 0xff force bit on command 5 0 CRC command 0 checksum 6 LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 send out a Write Single Coil command OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS R
31. icon on the toolbar and the New Toggle Switch Object dialogue box appear fill in each item and press OK button a new toggle switch object will be created See the pictures below 162 New Toggle Switch Object General Security Shape Label Read address PLC name Devie be hides 0 en pe Address format ddddd range O 11999 Index register Invert sonal Write addres PLC name Local HMI va Device type LE hades 0 anns Address format ddddd range 0 11999 Index register Write when button is released Athibute ewitch style Toggle Macro Execute macro Read address Select the PLC name device type address of the bit device that control the display of toggle switch state Write address Select the PLC name device type address of the bit device that system set value to The write address can be the same as or different from the read address Write when button is released Refer to the Set Bit Object section of this chapter for related information Attribute This is used to select the operation mode The available operation modes for 163 selection include Set ON Set OFF Toggle and Momentary Refer to the illustrations in the Set Bit Object section of this chapter for related information Macro Users can execute macro command by trigging toggle switch This function is Commands the sa
32. 0 then 409 SetData k 1 Device 1 4x 0 1 else SetData k 2 Device 1 4x 0 1 end if if k 0 0 then SetData k 1 Device 1 4x 1 1 else if k 2 1 then SetData k 3 Device 1 4x 2 1 end If if k 0 0 then SetData k 1 Device 1 4x 3 1 else if k 2 2 then SetData k 3 Device 1 4x 4 1 else SetData k 4 Device 1 4x 5 1 end If end macro command 5 while and wend statements macro command maint char 1 0 int a 13 b 14 c 4848 b 0 13 while b 0 ali 20 i 10 if alil 120 then c 200 break end if i i 1 wend 410 SetData c Device 1 4x 2 1 end macro command 6 break and continue statements macro command maint char 1 0 int a 13 b 14 c 4848 b 0 13 while b 0 ali 20 i 10 if alil 120 then c 200 1 1 1 continue end 1f i it 1 if c 200 then SetData c Device 1 4x 2 1 break end if wend end macro command 7 Array macro command maint int a 25 b 25 1 b 0 13 for 1 0 to b 0 step 1 411 ali 20 i 10 next 1 SetData a 0 Device 1 4x 0 13 end macro command 412 Chapter 19 How to Set HMI as a MODBUS Server 19 1 How to Set HMI as MODBUS Device After setting as MODBUS Server the data of MT8000 can be read or written via MODBUS protocol MODES Server MODBUS Server ma Ethernet DOO
33. 10 38 00 gt y Easy View 4 2 2 1 Large Keyboard 7 7 Use large keyboard to input the text information 35 EIS S F5 ESI F7 Fe F9 p FN F12 E Tbfa wje r t yJujijolo 4 pit 4 2 2 2 Small Keyboard Use small keyboard to input the numerical information 4 2 2 3 System Information d Network Display Network information including HMI IP address and other network information 36 Network Version Ip Address 192 168 1 201 Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Route Address 192 168 1 254 4 2 2 4 System Setting hal Set or modify system parameters Password has to be confirmed in view of security 37 a Network A project can be downloaded to HMI via Ethernet The IP address of target HMI must be correctly set If Auto Get IP Address is selected IP address will be automatically assigned from local DHCP network While if IP address get from below is selected IP address and other network information have to be inputted Tadaress A ale SUMED Kies m m d a l A Jaleo VV edy b Time Date System time date will be displayed at the corner of the bottom right after being set up 38 c Security The default of the password is 111111 EB8000 provides strict security protection for the HMI 39 Local Password Password for entering the system Upload Password Password for uploading the project Download Password Password for downloa
34. Address Address Address Address penne ew eet oe ee os 32 bit BCD Address Address Address Address Address pee ee ee ee ee 16 bit Address Address Address Address Address A OO El Se ee 16 bit Address Address Address Address Address sama Oe Al aa 32 bit Address Address Address Address Address EA S Pl ee 32 bit Address Address Address Address Address sea A E 212 13 16 Meter Display Object 13 16 1 Overview The meter display object can displays the value of word device with meter 13 16 2 Configuration Click the Meter Display icon on the toolbar and the Meter Display Object s Properties dialogue box will appear fill in each items press OK button and a new Meter Display Object will be created See the picture below The picture below shows the General tab in the Meter Display Object s Properties dialogue box 213 Hew Meter Display Object Limits Shape Read address PLC name Local HMI ho Device type LW K aaee 0 anns Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Index register 16 bit Unsigned Read address Select the PLC name device type address of the word devices that control the display of meter 214 Meter Display Objects Properties General Outline Limite Shape Profile RE Em dege 36 Sa Profile i x Full circle
35. Control address when user selects an item Label Users can assign label for each item The option list object displays the labels of all items in the list for users to review and select e Error state a As the illustration shown above state 10 is the error state when specifying 10 in No of state Similarly if you set No of state to 11 then state 11 would be the error state and so on On error state the listbox style option list removes the highlight to represent no item is selected and the drop down list displays the label of error state The label of error state is only applied to the option list objects with drop down list style The listbox style list has nothing to do with this label Set default Set default values for all states 1 e set O for state O 1 for state 1 and SO On Notification e Enable The system will set ON OFF to the specified bit register when error is detected The signal of the bit register could be used to trigger a procedure for correcting the error 324 Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library The EB8000 provides Shape Library and Picture Library features to add the visual effects of objects Each Shape and Picture includes up to 256 states This chapter expatiates how to create Shape Library and Picture Library Refer to Chapter 9 Object s General Attribute for information about how to use Shape Library and Picture Library 14 1 Creating Shape Library A sha
36. For Constant Designates the value to be written at end time For Address Designates the address used to store the end time value You can use this option if the Enable termination action in Time Set tab is selected Time Set Time Set when Constant is selected Scheduler General Time set Prohibit Address Setting on individual day stat SUIE Mon Tue Wen Thu Fr End Enable termination action 312 Constant Address Select the method to set the start time and end time Constant Specifies a fixed time and day Address The start end time is retrieved from the device address at on line operation Setting on Enable individual day Start time and end time can be set in different day of week There is only one start time and one end time during the week You have to set both start time and end time with this mode Start action Termination action 09 00 17 00 l l Monday Tuesday NOTE 1 You must enter settings for the Start Time and End Time 2 You cannot set the Start Time and End Time to the exact same day and time Disable A schedule that is 1 day Start and End times are within 24 hours can be entered Multiple Start and End days can be selected You can perform actions at the same time on multiple days To specify an End Time you must select Enable termination action 313 Start action Term
37. HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address commandi 31 read no 2 the total words of reading is 2 words HIBYTE read_no command 4 LOBYTE read_no command 5 CRC command 0 checksum 6 calculate 16 bit CRC LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 send request INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9 return _value read response if return_ value gt 0 and response 1 0x3 then read_data 0 response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 4x 1 read data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 4x 2 SetData read data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end 1f end macro command The following example explains how to design a request to set the status of 0x_1 The request uses Write Single Coil 0x5 command Request Functioncode 1Byte 0x08_ Response Functioncode 1Byte 0x05 Output Address 0x0000 to OxFFFF 0x0000 or OxFFOO Error 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 400 The complete macro is as follows Write Single Coil ON macro command maint char commandi 32 response 32 short address checksum short 1 return_value FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 FILL response 0 0 32 command 0 0x1 station number command 1 0x5 function code write single coil address 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 command 4 0xff force Ux 1
38. Local ML Local HMI Local 1 Remote PLC 1 4 TEE FB Series COM 1 master slave mode FA TEE FB Series COR 1 11520 After completing all settings described above users can find a new device named Remote PLC 1 on the device table This device has the symbol to mean that HMI uses a COM port not ethernet to control a remote PLC via other HMI Users can check HMI s local registers to view the communication status 658 LB 9150 When ON auto connection for PLC1 COM 1 LB 9151 When ON auto connection for PLC2 COM 2 LB 9152 When ON auto connection for PLC3 COM 3 This local registers indicate the connection states between COM 1 and PLC LB9200 indicates the state between COM 1 and PLC SNO station no 0 LB 9200 and LB9201 indicates the state between COM 1 and PLC SN LB 9455 When ON it means that connection is normal When OFF 1t means that disconnect with PLC and set on to retry connecting activity once This local registers indicate the connection states between COM 1 and PLC LB9500 indicates the state between COM 1 and PLC SNO station no 0 LB 9500 and LB9501 indicates the state between COM 1 and PLC SN LB 9755 When ON it means that connection is normal When OFF it means that disconnect with PLC and set on to retry connecting activity once This local registers indicate the connection states between COM 1 and PLC LB9800 indicates the state between COM 1 and PLC SNO station no 0 LB 9800
39. Project Manager divides the downloaded files into two directories 46 MT8000 Project storage History When users download the historical data the directory will be created In other words if the directory of the target file as below select the folder to save CF USB disk data aies Carme The data structure 1s like below diagram ec download mtBODO history Users have to select the upper layer of the directory of the target file when downloading In other words take the structure above as an example download must be selected Choosing mt8000 or history 1s invalid Take the illustration below as another example USB disk only store mt8000 directory but don t includes history In this case user must choose device 0 to correctly download the file 4 The startup screen appears after a successful project downloading E Functions E Security z E System Setting gu Easy View 48 Chapter 5 System Parameters In the EB8000 select menu Edit System Parameters and the System Parameter Settings dialog appears System Parameter Settings Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Device list Name Location IF Protocol Statio Local HMI Local HMI Local MT6056 LM Tap T 240 234 Disable NIA NIA Project description System Parameter Settings are divided into seven parts Device Model Gener
40. RS 232 AISJ71UC24 R2 MT8000 RS232 RS232 port 9P D SUB Female 9P D SUB Ss a DCD 4 DTR 4 6 DSR 7 RTS 8 CTS 518 MITSUBISHI FX0n FX2 Mitsubishi FXOs FXOn FX1s FX1n FX2 PLC http www mitsubishi automation com HMI Setting PLC type Mitsubishi FXOn FX2 Mitsubishi FXOn FX2 sa RS232 RS485 Baud rate 9600 9600 19200 38400 57600 must same as the PLC setting 115200 PLC Setting Device address Device Bit Word Range Memo Type C a a a E a T S 519 Wiring diagram MT8000 COMI RS 485 4w 9P D SUB Mitsubishi PLC CPU RS422 Port SP MiniDin Female 520 h 1 chy Z o 0 0 y qee p ke n i 2 1 C L F 8Pin miniDin Female MITS UBISHI FX2n Mitsubishi FX2n series PLC http www mitsubishi automation com HMI Setting PLC type Mitsubishi FX2n Mitsubishi FX2n sa RS232 RS485 Baud rate 9600 9600 19200 38400 5760 0 115200 HMI Station No PLC Station No Online Simulator Broadcast command PLC Setting ii Device address Bit Word Device XX co Y oo OT w O w Range 0 377 0 377 0 7999 0 255 0 255 8000 9999 0 7999 0 15 0 4095 521 Extend address mode Memo l Device Bit Word Format Range Memo Type CV2 ddd 200 255 Counter Memory D Word ow of D dd 8000 9999 Special Data Register Wiring diagram MT8000 Mitsubishi FX series PLC COMI
41. Use an extemal keyboard Window no 200 Keyboard h O Popup position relative to HMI screen O O GO C Hint If the keyboard is an USB keyboard on indivectidirect window or on the same window please check Use an extemal keyboard Selecting 200 Keyboard when users press Numeric Input or ASCII Input object WINDOW 200 will pop up on the HMI screen 12 2 Steps to Use Keypad without Title Bar Step 1 Create a Direct window Set a read address to activate a direct window ex LBO In General Attribute select No title bar and Window no 131 Direct Window Object Properties General Profile Description Read address PLC name Lora HEI Address 0 Sagan tag Address format ddddd range 0 11999 T Indes register La style Bio tile bar Widow Ho 200 Keyboard Step 2 Set WINDOW 200 the same size as keypad Direct Window Objects Properties General Profile Position C Pinned x 30 M 57 B mize Width Height 205 Step 3 Create a Numeric Input object select Use an external keyboard 132 ew Nomeri Input Object General Numeric Format Security Shape Font Description Read address PLC name gt Local HHI Device type LW we Address 0 _ yate tag Address format ddddd range 0 10255 O tme register Motion C Enable Inpat onde Enable Kevboord Use an extemal keyboard
42. WINDOW 35 Toggle Switch Toggle Switch Read address LB10 Write address LB10 Read address LB10 Write address LB1C Mode Toggle Mode Toggle WINDOW 35 Toggle Switch Read address L810 Write address LB10 Read address LB10 Write address 1 B10 Mode Toggle fe Mode lt Te agile rf NOTE Do not use this function to open the window when the same window has been opened by function key or indirect window Toggle Switeh 195 13 13 Moving Shape Object 13 13 1 Overview Moving Shape object is used to define the object s state and moving distance The Moving shape object is used to place an object in a window at a location specified by the PLC The state and the absolute location of the shape in the window depend on the current values of three continuous PLC registers Typically the first register controls the state of the object the second register controls the horizontal position X and the third register controls the vertical position Y 13 13 2 Configuration Click the Moving Shape icon on the toolbar and New Moving Shape Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items press OK button and a new Moving Shape Object will be created See the pictures below LU HHO 196 New Moving Shape Object General Shape Label Description PLC name Local HMI Read addres Device type LW Address Pran tg Address format ddddd range 0 10255 In
43. When local variables and global variables have the same name declaration name only the local variables are valid Below is a simple Macro which includes a variable declaration and a function call macro command maint short pressure 10 local variable declaration SetData pressure Allen Bradley DF1 N7 0 1 function calling end macro command 18 2 Syntax 18 2 1 Constants and Variables 18 2 1 1Constants Constants are fixed values and can be entered directly into statements as Must begin with 0x 0x3b Oxffff 0x237 ASCH String must be enclosed in single quotes Bolen ie Example statement using a constant macro command maint short A B A and B are variables A 1234 B 0x12 1234 and 0x12 are constants end macro command 356 18 2 1 2 Variables Variables are names that represent information The information can change as the variable is modified by statements Naming Rules for Variables 1 A variable must start with an alphabet 2 Variable names longer than 32 characters are not allowed 3 Reserved words cannot be used as Variable names There are 5 different Variable types 5 bits byte 16 bits word 132767 Int 32 bits double word 2147418112 Declaring Variables Variables must be declared before being used All variable declarations must be made before any other statements in the macro To declare a variable specify the type then the variable name Example int a shor
44. a Close when change window option with this function see the picture below when the function is selected the pop up window will be closed when executing change base window Otherwise users have to set a Close button on the pop up window to close the window Display popup window Close this popup window when change full screen window Window no This is used to select the window no when performing change base window change common window and pop up the window Return to This is used to return to the previous base window Fox example when changing Previous window 10 to window 20 users can use this function to return to window 10 This Window function is only available for base window change Close window Close the pop up windows on the top of the base window Items in ASCII ASCII mode is used as element to configure a keypad the keypad is used where numbers or texts are needed to input to the numeric input object or ASCII input object Refer to the Designing and Using Keypad chapter for detailed information ASCIVUNICODE mode O Enter O Backspace O Clea Es Asc UNICODE Enter Same as the keyboard s enter function Backspace Same as the keyboard s backspace function Clear To clear the temperate input alphanumeric strings stored in the buffer Esc Same as the Close window function 1t 1s used to close the keyboard window A
45. and LB9801 indicates the state between COM 1 and PLC SN LB 10055 When ON it means that connection is normal When OFF it means that disconnect with PLC and set on to retry connecting activity once 659 Appendix F Pass Through Function The pass through function allows the PC application to connect PLC via HMI and the HMI acts as a converter at this moment The pass through function provides two modes Ethernet and COM port To click Pass through on Project Manager will display the application etmulaton Airline Simulation ff line simulation Pass through Ethernet com port Virtual COM Port PG lt gt PLE Please install weintek virtual serial port driver F 1 Ethernet Mode How to install virtual serial port driver Before using ethernet mode please check whether virtual serial port driver 1s installed as described below If Virtual COM port PC lt gt PLC displays Please install weintek virtual serial port driver please click Install 660 Pass through Ethernet L com port Virtual CO Port PG lt gt PLE Please install weintek virtual serial port driver PLE Connection Port HM lt gt PLC HALF Le Q nsa p If install processing pops up a dialog as follows please click Continue Anyway Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware Weintek Virtual Serial Fort haz not passed Windows Log
46. and then subtract the value set in Inc value from the value of the word device at the same intervals until the result value reaches the value in the Bottom limit In the example shown below the value in the word device will change periodically in order of 0 1 2 9 10 9 8 7 1 0 1 2 A thibute net Style Periodic bounce up gt down gt up gt v Bottom limat 0 Inc value 1 Upper limit 1 Time interval 1Osecondis v i Periodical step up Stepping up function A Set word object will add the value set in Inc value to the value of the word device at the regular intervals set in Break time until the result value reaches the value in the Upper limit and the value of the word device will return to the value of the Bottom value and then repeat the action to keep the value 152 in an active state In the example shown below the value of the word device will change periodically in order of 0 1 2 9 10 0 1 2 AT bule Set Style Periodic step up low to high A Low limit i Inc value E Time interval j Periodical step down Stepping down function A Set word object will subtract the value set in Dec value from the value of the word device at the regular intervals set in Break time until the result value reaches the value of the Bottom limit and the value of the word device will return to the va
47. end sign For example if the content is set as High Temperature 20d when an event is triggered the value of LW20 will be displayed 1 e if the value of LW20 is 13 when an event is trigger the display content of the event display will be High Temperature 13 Except for LW it can also show the content of Device type in Read address Format d initial sign PLC s address d end sign 88 For example if Device type in Read address is MW when message is set as High Temperature 15d and the value in MW15 is 42 the display content of the event display will be High Temperature 42 Font Color Users can set Font and color for each event The font and color of an alarm display or event display object comes from this setting As below illustration these two events use different colors and font styles 1 1409 07 15 02 Event 1 when LB 1 U L4 00 07 15 02 Event 3 when LWI 20 Write value for event display When an event item in an event display object is touched the value is written to the assigned address Please refer to event display in Object chapter for more details Sound The warning alarm can be selected when an event is triggered Click Sound Library to choose warning sound and click Play to check the sound After the completion of each setting a new event definition can be added as below 89 Alarm Event Log Category AD 3 Cate
48. function code BYTE 1 command 2 byte count BYTE 2 command 3 high byte of 4x 1 BYTE 3 command 4 low byte of 4x 1 BYTE 4 command 5 high byte of 4x 2 BYTE 5 398 command 6 high byte of 4x 2 BYTE 6 command 7 low byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 7 command 8 high byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 8 The usage of INPORT is described below INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9 return _value read response Where the real read count is restored to the variable return value unit is byte If return value is 0 it means reading fails in executing INPORT Depending on the protocol response 1 must be equal to 0x3 if the response is correct After getting correct response calculate the data of 4x 1 and 4x 2 and put in the data into LW100 and EwW101 if return_value gt 0 and response 1 0x3 then read _data 0 response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 4x 1 read_data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 4x 2 SetData read_data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end if The complete macro is as follows Read Holding Registers macro command main char commandi 321 response 32 short address checksum short read no return value read data 2 1 FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 FILL response 0 0 32 command 0 0x1 station number command 1 0x3 read holding registers function code is 0x3 address 0 address 0 starting address 4x_1 is 0 399
49. just now and it will be resumed if the application closes as follows Weintek Virtual Serial Port 666 F 2 COM Port Mode Source COM Port Destination COM Port COM PLC Source COM Port The port is used between HMI and PC Destination COM Port The port is used between HMI and PLC When using COM port mode of pass through users should select the source and destination com port first F 2 1 Settings of COM Port Mode There are two ways to enable COM port mode of pass through function 1 Use Project Manager 2 Use LW 9901 and LW9902 LW 9901 source COM port 1 3 COM1 COMS3 LW 9902 destination COM port 1 3 COM1 COMS3 Start pass through on project manager Click Pass through button on the Project Manager to set the communication parameters 667 Pass through O Ethernet com port Hbl IP 192 168 1 37 Get HM Communication Parameters HMI work mode Unknown Source COP Port PC HM COM 1 3600 Data bits Baud rate Parity Even Stop bits Destination COM Por Heil PLG COM 2 Baud rate 19600 Data bits Pari Ever Stop bits Start Pass through Stop Pass through HMI IP Assign HMI s IP address Get HMI Communication Parameters To get the settings of source and destination COM port that parameters come from reserved addresses the details of addresses as follow Source COM port and Destination COM port LW9901 Source COM por
50. no password is entered LW9222 shown 0000000000000000 means current user only can use object with none class Moreover SB _0 SB_ 2 are the objects with the security levels of class A class C and at the same time Make invisible while protected is selected therefore SB_0 SB_2 objects are hidden by the system Username 1 LW9219 Password 0 LW9220 bit 15 bit Current status 0000000000000000 LW9222 Logout L Step 4 When the user enters the password 111 the screen will become User name 1 ez Password 111 r bit 15 bto Current status 0000000000000001 iwz Logout LBS050 Class A Button 121 The user 1 is permitted to use object with class A Consequently SB 0 appears and allows user to operate Now bit 0 in LW9222 becomes 1 Step 5 Next when the user enters the user 3 s password 333 t the screen will become Current status 0000000000000111 13222 Logout L89050 Class A Button Class B Button Class C Button The user 3 1s permitted to use object with class A B C Now bit 0 bit 3 in LW9222 become 1 to confirm the current user is allowed to use objects with class A B C Step 6 At this time if LB9050 is pressed and force current user to logout the system will return to initial state In other words current user only can use object with none class 122 User name 3 LW9219 Pa
51. position 0 position 1 position 2 If Backward is selected when the object moves to the last position position 3 1t will move backwards to the initial position 0 and repeat the moving mode over again The moving path 19 shown as follows position 0 position 1 position 2 position 3 position 2 position 1 position 0 Image state change State change mode There are Position dependant and Time based options When Position dependant is selected it means that following the change of position the state will change too When Time based is selected it means that the position will change based on Position speed and shape state will change based on Image update time Time interval attributes Position speed 4 0 1 second s Image state change Position dependant E Backward cycle Posthon dependant The following dialog shows size setup of animation object Call up the animation object dialogue box by double clicking 204 Animation Objects Properties General Shape Label Profile Position ined s 126 van Height shape rectangle size with Height BS Trajectory Cancel Shape rectangle To set the size of the shape size Trajectory To set the position of each point on the moving path 205 13 15 Bar Graph Object 13 15 1 Overview Bar graph object displays PLC register data as a bar graph
52. video 2 gt gt video n gt video 1 Background Select the background color of the object Normally the format of the above registers is 16 unsigned integer If a 32 bit word device is chosen as the control address only 0 15 bits are effective Users should zero the 16 31 bits 1 Control command a Play index file Command 1 Parameter file index Parameter2 ignore set 0 1 The files are sorted with file name in ascending order the file index 0 is for to the first file and son on 2 If it is unable to scan file 1t will set status bit 8 to ON 3 If check Auto repeat it will automatically play the next file after finish b Play previous file Command 2 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter2 ignore set 0 1 If the file index is previously 0 it will re play the same video from the start 2 If it is unable to search the right file it will set status bit 8 to ON 3 If check Auto repeat it will automatically play the next file after finish c Play next file Command 3 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 parameter2 ignore set 0 1 If there is no next video file it will play the first index 0 file 2 If it is unable to search the right file it will set status bit 8 to ON 3 If check Auto repeat 1t will automatically play the next file after finish 288 d Pause Play Switch Command 4 Parameter ignore set 0 Parameter 2 i
53. 04 03 O02 01i 00 Bit Bit 00 Sunday 0 none 1 select Bit 01 Monday 0 none 1 select Bit 02 Tuesday 0 none 1 select Bit 03 Wednesday 0 none 1 select Bit 04 Thursday 0 none 1 select Bit 05 Friday 0 none 1 select Bit 06 Saturday 0 none 1 select e Start End Time Start Time Time setting address 4 to 6 End Time Time setting address 8 to 10 Set the time values used for the start termination actions in the following ranges Hour 0 23 Minute 0 59 Second 0 59 If you specify a value outside the range an error will occur NOTE The time data format shall be 16 bit unsigned system doesn t accept BCD format 318 Prohibit Scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Prohibit PLC name Local HMI Device type uies system pe Index register rid Libr ary Fla ae k l f Ll 1 Prohibit Enable MT8000 reads the bit status before performing start action If the bit is ON the schedule action 1s not performed Enable When performing start and termination action the system will simultaneously play the specified sound 319 13 28 3 Restrictions User can register the maximum of 32 entries in Scheduler list The time scheduler features are one time actions When the start time or end time 1s reached the system writes the value to device just one time not repeated Operator turns OFF Start time End time Action Bit Set ON Start time 0
54. 10000 LW 10015 variable Usage VarO address 446 Chapter 23 PLC Connection Guide AIBUS UDIAN Automation AI 501 AI 518 AI 519 AI 701 AI 702M AI 704M AI 706M AI 719 http www yudian us HMI Setting Option IO A ON IN IO IN IO T ata Bs OOo HIM Station No PLC Setting 447 Device address AI 3518 woa s lon a EC a woa 6 oon a o Cm woa 7 om a oss MS woa s fos a is o woa 9 om a f o0 ft woa io om a os o woa n o a 037 Snead onl woa 12 ocn dd f os Tapa woa 3 oon a 19999999 a Two 14 orn aa 1959 9999 a woa is form a 0 999 ALP pvt ee 0 1 C wa a7 paw a ows woa is in a ion ork ora 20 ian as ona Cr Goad only Baud rate bAud 808Pstatus word Word 21 15H 0 19 2K run 0 suspend 4 stop 12 read only woa 22 i a CC ao woa a im a a woa 24 isa a or Rn woa 2s iou a oo Lo 448 AI 701 wa a aa 7 tn ead only con a H a 03H a 4 oan dd 5 OSH dd GH a o oon at METE OFH E 7 un a oas a 3999 30000 SCL a gt AR 1999 4000 Ga a 0 48 O Baud rate bAud 808P status word 0 19 2K run 0 suspend 4 stop 12 read only ao ao a fame a ow a Cw 2s fie aa o oss o Bit Word Wiring diagram RS 485 MT8000 PLC 485 AI 518 518P 9P D SUB RS485 port 449 Allen Bradley CompactLogix FlexLogix Allen Bradley CompactLo
55. 254 appears as below It allows you to set different address for X and Y axis respectively Read address PLC name Local HMI R ds daia LW100 Y axie data LW 200 Channel 0 Channel O PLC name Local HMI gt PLC name Local HMI Read address Read address Device type BAR ea NR ce o oss sare ter A RE 1 Device type e arenas PNAN ARO oa AO x lt T T Index register C Index register X low and high limit 16 bit Signed Y low and high limit 16 bit signed Address 100 K low limit s 200 Wv low limit 100 1 X high limit Y high limit 100 2 XdataQ O0 200 2 j Wdata0 100 3 X data 1 Y data1 100 4 X data 2 2 Y data 2 100 5 X data 3 200 5 Y data 3 255 Limits The above settings are based on dynamic limits you can also have dynamic limits disable and set the fix high and low limits Limits Low 0 Y ada Low 0 High High he high and low limits 1s used as scale to calculate the percentage of X and Y axis 1 e X or Y gt L X or Y reading value low limit high limit low limit Based on your settings the memory allocation for limit and XY data will be listed on the pop up window The following setting 1s for 16 bit signed data format and dynamic limits 16 bit Signed Address 100 100 1 100 Z 100 3 100 100 5 las gt low lirit high limit Y low lirit Y high limit gt da
56. 9022 delete the oldest event log file set ON LB 9023 delete all event log files set ON LB 9024 refresh event log statistic information set ON LW 9060 total number of the event log files LW 9061 total size of the event log files 7 1 Event Log Management Used with alarm bar alarm display and event display etc users are able to clearly understand the life cycle of the whole event from happening waiting for processing alarm cleared Before using these objects the content of an event has to be identified first Click the Alarm Event Log icon and Event Log dialog appears as below 78 Alarm Event Log Category Category Text Mode Scan time Condition Read address Notification address History files Saveto HMI memory Save to CF cand Save to TSB 1 Save to USB 2 Category EB8000 provides classification feature All events can divided into 0 255 classifications Alarm Bar Alarm Display and Event Display can be assigned toe be displayed in certain the classifications Category determines the event log catalog of current event Category The 2 of 0 2 in the above illustration demonstrates two existing identified events in the category 0 79 History files Determine the storage device of an event log However when users simulate the project on PC files will be saved on the same event log subdirectory as EasyBuilder8000 exe Save to HMI memo
57. 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 COM 2 data bits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits COM 2 parity 0 none l even 2 odd COM 2 stop bits l 1 bit 2 2 bits Set LB9032 from OFF to ON force the system to use LW9560 LW9564 as new communication parameter of COM3 COM 3 mode 0 RS232 2 RS232 4W COM 3 baud rate 4800 9600 19200 57600 115200 COM 3 data bits LW 9562 7 7 bits O 1 Zi 3 38400 4 5 442 R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W S E E R W R W R W Z S S R W R W R W R W R W LW 9563 COM 3 parity 0 none l even 2 odd COM 3 stop bits LW 9564 Il 1 bit 2 2 bits 22 15 File Manager Remote Address Description amp Write LB 9039 Status of file backup activity LWw 9074 LW 9076 Lw 9078 22 16 PLC amp Remote HMI IP Address Setting Remote Address Description HMI Control LW 9600 PLC 4 s IP address setting IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9629 LW 9800 Remote HMI s IP address setting IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9839 22 17 Printer Server Setting Remote Address Description HMI Control 443 LW 9770 Remote printer server setting EA 9773 IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW LW 9774 Remote printer server user name eea a al e LW 9780 Remote printer server password O RW RW RW 22 18 Address Index Function Read Remote Macr Address Description amp HMI 0 Write Control LW 9
58. Axbit is equivalent to 4x 6x 0x03 Read holding register 0x06 write single register Note use 6x device 1s limited to device of one word only Wiring diagram MODBUS RS232 PORT MT8000 RS 232 Modbus RTU 9P D SUB Controller RS232 COMI COM2 COM3 Port 556 MODBUS RS422 485 PORT MT8000 Modbus RTU Controller COM1 RS 485 4w RS422 Port MT8000 RS 485 2Wire Modbus RTU 9P D SUB Controller RS485 Note MODBUS RTU adjustable usage Users can decide the address range via setting value on Parameter 1 For example when users set 5 to Parameter 1 the address range become 5 65535 557 System Parameter Settings Device list Mame Location Device type Local HMI Local M T6104 TM TS080T MT8104T 61 Local PLC 1 MODBUS ETU Adjustable Local MODBUS ETU Adjustable Device Properties MODBUS R LU Adjustable CHMI PLE Location Local Ww MET FLC type MODBUS R TU Adjustable w F 10 MODBUS ETU ADJUST PLC LF R2 239 w PLC default station no COM COMI S000 E a 1 COM Port Settings COM Timeout sec Band rate Tum around delay me pa Data bite 8 Bi Send ACK delay ima 0 8 Parity atop bits 558 MODBUS SERVER Modbus RTU Slave HMI Setting rice mosse OOOO O vws e t o mso o o es S PLC Station No HMI Modbus station No Lt Online Simulator Extend address mode NO eent o TO PLC Setting Device address dddd 0 9998 Mapping t
59. Bo cH Ur 274 E A nn OE O eee 217 S OVV THT 217 13242 COnN Urarea E ved uae ah nad 2I UI Fog ee a Playor ODE ln 281 IS E TTT 281 B23 CONE UAM 281 15233 Starts Stop playing VICO ai AA 284 15 23 4 Media player setas mide i sicsa risus A E ee 286 3230 RESTIN rs AAA re sane 291 13 26 Data Transfer Time based ObDJeCt oooooncccccccccnoconcncnonononnnnnonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 292 13 201 ONIS da dudado 292 ERA Te weet ereee enon a Meiart orege men enn ree 292 EAT OA II er Terre enone 295 ISE E CE VIC T 295 13 2712 RT TT cE Te T 295 1323 Schedule ObE cta 302 A AS ee 302 13 252 A A A ba tuene sound 302 13283 IRESUICUIONS llo lados 320 EPA aeetenet cer Clee rene rene ne PRE gts ere tere es Pe een Se eRe er eee er eae 321 ey Si Messages cyt asa aS A T A EE E ne ee 321 352952 CONSUMO datosde 321 Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Libra cio 325 IATC reatne Shape Libra 32 42 C reann Picture Labarca daa 332 Chapter 15 Label Library and Using Multi Language sss sese 340 as A A 340 152 pettiitessor Label Library Dot i n 341 Vos SLOW reae a baber EIDE ary siii id 343 e R ET e HE T 345 Bo USO Vila id A As 345 Chapter 16 Address Tas LADA aaa 347 16 FCreating Address Ta ad da di do 347 16 2 Usm Address La LD os 350 Chapter T7 Transenna Recipe Dala isis sia 351 17 1 Updating Recipe Data by Using Ethernet or USB cable sss sese 351 17 2 Updating Recipe Data by Using CF Card or USB Stick esse eee eee 352 eo Tr
60. Device type LB d Index register Attribute Address type Select the bit or word device No of words or No of bits When select Word type the unit of data transfer is word set the number of data to transfer See the picture below Attribute Address type Interval 3 0 second s ka When select Bit type the unit of data transfer is bit set the number of bits to transfer 293 Attribute Address type E v Interval 3 0 second s No of bits 15 Interval Select the wait interval for each data transfer for example select 3 seconds the system will conduct data transfer operation every 3 seconds 1 Specifying a small interval or a big number of data to transfer may cause an overall performance decrease due to the time consuming in transferring data Therefore users should always try to choose a longer interval and a smaller amount of data to transfer 2 When a short interval is inevitable be aware of the interval must be longer than the data transfer operation For example if the data transfer operation take 2 seconds you must set the interval longer than 2 seconds Source Set source address cme o Destination Set destination address tone e After completing all settings and pressing the OK button a new Data Transfer Time based Object is created The summary displays all the registered data transfer objects with brief information as shown below Data Transfer Time bas
61. Ethernet Hub or Switch RJ45 RJ45 ES ee ee 1 8 TX Orange 7 2 RJ 45 563 White Green 4 BDI BD4 White Blue Ethernet Direct connect crossover cable MT8000 Ethernet Wire color Modbus TCP Device RJ45 RJ45 White Orange RX White Green B ss 564 Modicon Twido http www modicon com HMI Setting PLCtype ModbusRKTU_ SC Support Extended Address mode O 8s ee ee HMI Station No 0 Does not apply to this protocol 0 247 Must match the PLC s port setting PLC Setting 19200 None 8 1 Device address Type B Oxorix 0000 0 9999 dddd 0 9999 Wiring diagram MT8000 RS 485 Port 1 RS485 port 9P D SUB 8P mini din Female i 565 MT8000 RS 485 9P D SUB COMI COM3 1 RX 6 Data MT8000 RS232 9P D SUB Female COM2 COMI 3 TX 4 TX 7 TX 566 AAA Port2 RS485 port 3Pin Terminal B GND Port2 RS232 9P D SUB Female RX 5 GND OMRON C CQMI series OMRON C CPM CQM Series Host Link Protocol http oe1web omron com oei Products PLC htm HMI Setting PLC type OMRON C CQM1 Series 25232 RS232 RS422 RS485 ET acne 0 Online Simulator YES YES PLC Setting tonsa OO Device address Device ype Pte aaa 0 519 T aeae Register B B B OB B 567 Wiring diagram CPU Port CPM2A CQM1 1H C200H HS ALPHA series Communication Module
62. HM 55 Ke A ae ar Stes ten oN O eT eR ee aCe Re eran KN S Gee En 60 S ee O E I ee er E IE 63 A O CNT erere etme n re 65 OB ende MISMO eee nee nn ene es E er enn er ene ee ere eee eee enone 66 A dnl china ead on leach aes dda ceunasi alone d 67 Chapter O Window R e Le ieee IG ae T 69 Gul WOW K Saa a AAS A A T ET 69 OL Base WV TIN O Wi ic ice 69 012 Common a e lo 70 SA A tetaalaa toeaecarie 70 6 1 4 System Message WImdOW std liada dd 6 2 Create Delete and Set a Window ee 73 6 2A Crea a WW ise 73 022 WANdOW RET EE 6 2 3 Open Close and Delete a WINDOW etnia ii 71 Chapter T hfs alice By 0 AAA AA 78 LA Event Log Manac A N 78 PARES FE TIUN dia 81 Tg NS A A A A PO 84 Chapita Dala MPAA noir 91 SL Data SAO Mi a e da 91 8 2 Create a New Data Sampling ata 92 Chapter 9 Object General Properties da 97 9 1 Selecting the Connection PLC Device occccccccccncncnonononononononcccnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnananacnnnnnnnnos 97 9 1 1 Setting the Reading and Writing AddTesSS occccccnccccnnnccnonononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnos 97 92 Usine Snape Library and Picture Lib a a 99 Dee Seines of Shape A A 100 922 DENES OL Picture LITA Ge ee i en E ee a 101 A orl tice cate te cela dele aatutlicartuaedt mc tuadinls 105 SLAM USun o Prol SILA 109 9 4 Station Numbers Y aria ole ua a ad 110 DAA Broadcast Staon NO iia oa 111 Chapter TT GU dl o li te dl ol dali lu ds 112 101 Settinmos ot Password and Classes tds 112 AO A A 114 lO Te
63. J USB cable i series onki 21 Project RW_A 2 4 Simulation To assign the desired path for file storage before uploading 2 4 1 On line Simulation Off line Simulation There are two types of simulations Off line simulation amp On line simulation By virtual device PC simulates the operations of PLC without connecting to PLC On the contrary On line simulation is executed by connecting PC with PLC and accurately setting the communication parameters When simulating on PC if the control target is a local PLC 1 e the PLC directly connected to PC there is 10 mins simulation limit When using On line Off line Simulation feature select the source of xob file before executing the function Look ri gt mord S enti 2 1 _demo veb S MTP veb Ti RemoteHML xob mi templstegi121 xob El Test xob Sil Test_AB_OF1 x0b Ti Test_label xob dl TestAddressindex ob Ti Testi arg xob 2 gmt ezl xob 20061016 00b 2 Buttoni xab Z Direct vindos xob Gal Indirect Window xob 2 MTS xob mA MTB12_demoZ0061005 0b 29 MT612_demo xob 2 MT612_Fx2n nob MTS0DODemo best veb S MTE00ODemo xob 2 Tip ezt xob se mtB120 x0b 2 mt8120_derro_203 xob Fie reagent l Fes of hype MT2000 download Rs sob 22 2 5 Pass Through The pass through function is allowed the PC application to connect PLC via HMI In the pass through function the HMI is acting as a converter Pass through provides two
64. Local MITSUBISHI FU FRA MITSUBISHI FEOwFEK2 COM1 2600 E 7 1 SIEMENS 57200 Eemote P 192 165 1 SIEMENS 57200 COMI 5600 E 5 1 5 1 3 How to Control a Remote HMI A Ethernet K 4 E TS 10 DOS 10 So called a remote HMI means through network the HMI is controlled by a local HMI or a PC running on line simulation To control a remote HMI users should add this type of device Click New and the following Device Properties dialog appears Correctly fill in all of the properties are required 55 Device Properties Name HMI OFLC Location temes Y IB 192 108 1 11 Port 8000 Interval of block pack words Each of settings is introduced as follows HMI or PLC Type of device Select HMI in this case Location Select Remote in this case and click Settings to set IP address of remote HMI and Port no The port no of remote HMI and local HMI must be same IF Address Settings IF address Port no After all settings are completed a new name Remote HMI device 1s listed on the table 56 Location Device type Interface WF St P Local NTR NWA NA NA l MITSUBISHI F Local MITSUBISHI F COM1 06 RS4 0 a SIEMENS 7 200 Remote P 192 168 1 10 P SIEMENS 72 COM1 6 RS4 2 i Remote 1P 192 168 1 11 P MT8x0 Ethemet TC N A 5 2 Model Parameters on Model tab determine the HMI model timer source and printer
65. OFF Before writing After writing PLC name Local HMI Device type Address System tag Address format ddddd range 0 11999 Index register Attribute set style Write constant value Set value 12 Write address Select the PLC name device type address of the word device that system set value to Write after If this function is selected the operation is activated at touch up If the function 1s button is not selected the operation 1s activated at touch down released Notification When this function is selected in the manual operation mode the state of the designated bit device will be set to ON or OFF at the same time that the operation is completed Enable Click to select notification function 149 Before To set the state of the designated bit device before write to word device writing After To set the state of the designated bit device after write to word device writing Attribute Set style To set the operation mode The available modes for selection are listed as follows Write constant value oe NA Increment value UGL Decrement value UOG 1 Press and hold imerement JOG Press and hold decrement 0 1 Periodic JOG up 0 up gt Automatic JOG down to low mit a Write constant value Set constant function When the operation is activated the Set value will be written into the word device The constant s format 16 bit BCD 32 bit BC
66. Properties select Minimize to system tray Click Hardcopy tab at the left side in the dialogue box as follows MlTsxx Remote Printer Server Settings General Output Print out to hp LaserJet 3380 PCL 5 Save to files in DAMM TS000 ey Backup 4 In Output select Print out to and choose a printer as the output device for screen hardcopies Note You can only choose from the printers available in your system so it is normal if you do not see hp LaserJet 3380 PCL 5 on your list as the example 5 Click OK to apply the settings 6 In Menu File select Enable Output to allow EasyPrinter to output any incoming print request 1 e screen hardcopy C 1 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder8000 In Menu Edit gt System Parameters click Printer Server tab and select Use MT Remote Printer Server the following dialogue box will appear 637 2 system Parameter Settings a drm Extended Memory Printer Server Note Use EagyPinter to ete FC for printinge screen hardcopy and torne backup data Output setings Linentehion 8 Horizontal O Vertical Printer size 8 Original size O Fit to printer margins Margin 15 H mm 15 evl mua 15 p mn 15 mm Communication setines IP address 192 168 1 25 Fort 8005 User name admin pasword 111111 7 In Output settings assign appropriate values for left top right bottom margins Note The margins are all as
67. Q00 Q01 CPU port http www mitsubishi automation com HMI Setting PLC type MITSUBISHI D e CC pwns fe sane ft CET ncs T Online Simulator YES Extend address mode NO PLC Setting Q00 Q01 CPU port setting 1 In the GX Developer PLC data list click the PLC oon parameter fhe Program 2 Inthe PLC parameter select Serial page HA Device comment 3 Select Use serial communication Parameter o e 4 Set the Transmission speed 9600 115200 FLC parameter 2 Network param 5 Select Sum check a Remote pass 6 Select Transmission wait time to 10ms Devi S ee 7 Select RUN write setting El Device init 8 Click End close the dialog 9 Write the PLC Parameter to PLC 539 10 RESET the PLC the parameter will active Qn H Parameter PLC name PLE system FLO file PLC RAs Device Program Boot file SFC ro ats eument serial lw Tse serial communication Transmision speed 19 2E bps We Sum check EUN write setting W Permit Data format value 13 fixed as below start bit 1 Farity bitOdd Data bit Stop bit Acknowledge EY assignment Multiple CFU settings Default End Cancel Device address e x m o TT s v rare ops w e o may a o O a ow rancios a ow e e e m om mw s e w ow meo s s a ow omeo ef se a ow eeo o wa om mem ef eo w o cercos e s m om TT
68. Samplinz mode O Tirme based Tirrerhased Mode CFF 0N PLO name Local Hh 4 Device type LE E aies Carn ie dl Index gister Mode Conditions to trigger the data sampling OFF gt ON If the status of assigned address is from OFF to ON data sampling is triggered ON OFF If the status of assigned address is from ON to OFF data sampling is triggered ON gt OFF If the status of assigned address is changed data sampling is triggered Please refer to Parts General Settings for more details Auto stop When the number of data sampling 1s equal to Max data records 1f the Auto stop option 1s selected HMI will stop doing data sampling automatically 1 If the data source in the trend display is real time mode the oldest record will be deleted and new record will be added and displayed in the trend display object 2 Ifthe data source in the trend display is historical mode the data keeps being sampled History files Assign the storage location But when users do the simulation on PC data is saved to the same subdirectory as Easy Builder 8000 exe Save to HMI memory Save the sampling to MT8000 display Caution The data can be saved when the size of data is more than 4kb otherwise users need to use LB 9034 to force the data to be stored Save to CF card Save the sampling to CF card Save to USB 1 Save the sampling to USB stick 1 The USB stick numbering rul
69. a Barcode Device 20 1 How to Connect a Barcode Device The following explains how to create a project for connecting and controlling a barcode device First please add a new Barcode device into the device list as follows System Parameter Settings Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Device list No lame Location Device type interface iF Protocol Statio N ma eT Id eT DA 1 20 BARCODE so RS 232 v PLC default station no 0 COMI eonna Cta Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words 5 ov hax read conunand sze Conde 72 Max wite commmand sze words 2 Click the Settings barcode device settings display as below 418 Barcode Device Settings Baud rate Data bits Paro Tee a start code di tart code Tenninator CRLF OSIZETE OOther 0 O None a Barcode device can be connect to any of COM 1 COM 3 Baud rate Data bits Set communication parameters accordingly Read byte limit This function will restrict the number of byte to read The range is 10 512 For example If Read byte limit is set as 10 the barcode device generate data 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 0x30 0x38 0x33 0x38 Only the first 10 bytes is read 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 0x30 0x38 Use a start code With this function the MT8000 will identify t
70. all use AR MingtiM GB Function Key Objects Properties General Security Shape Label Profile ATAT sae 0 TS2 G Attribute Font AR MinetiM OB Color a Size 16 se Italic Underline Diuplicate these attributes to every state After complete the keypad configuration add window11 into System Parameters General keyboard as illustration below 160 System Parameter Settings l Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Fast selection button Attribute CIEBI Sayer Back leht saver Hone M minutes AAA ACIER SAVET None ll minute S Option ARD window 10 10 WINDOW 010 v Extra no of events Conmon window Above base window Eeyboard caret color Rm Object layout Nature v RW A enabled Eevboard 50 Kevpad 1 Integer Add Keypad 2 Integer Keypad 2 Integer Keypad 4 Integer Keypad 5 Integer Keypad 6 Integer Eeypad 7 HEE Keypad 6 Floating ASCII Middle _ ASCII Small pimple hine Eevyboar 161 13 6 Toggle Switch Object 13 6 1 Overview Toggle Switch object is a combination of bit lamp object and set bit object The object can be used not only to display the state of a bit device but also to define a touch area when activated the state of the bit device will be set to ON or OFF 13 6 2 Configuration Click the Toggle Switch
71. appointed place As shown below users can get the original picture 335 Save As Savein L EBS000 K O T CS i A Mer Mu Recent Documents Le Desktop My Documents Mu Computer File name Mu Network Save as type Bitmap file bmp w H Cancel Below is an example of how to create a new Picture Library and add a Picture with two states to it Step 1 Click New Lib and input the name of the new Picture Library Hew Library Library name TEST OK A new Picture Library TEST will be added to the Picture Library Manager dialogue box At this moment there is no Picture in the library 336 Library TEST ste oft 2 LA 5 ll Graph name Total states U U hu gt Image size 0 0 0 Step 2 Prepare the pictures to be added suppose the two graphs in the following picture are used to represent the state 0 and the state 1 respectively Click the Import Picture button and a dialogue appears as below Set Total states to 2 meaning the picture includes 2 states and then click Next Import Picture Picture Picture no Picture name F YELLOW Total states Step 3 When the dialogue shown in the following picture appears select the source of a picture state O and select the correct transparent color In the example below the blue color RGB 0 0 255 is a transparent color After the setting of the state 0 is completed click
72. be activated successfully Display confirmation request After pressing the object a confirm dialog will appear Users need to click Yes to make sure the operation execution If response to confirm dialog longer than the value of Max waiting time sec the dialog will disappear automatically and cancel the operation 115 AN Please confina the operation Message text Please confirm the operation in the window is defined in System Message Text can be changed from System Message dialog Click System Message icon from tool bar and then System Message dialog appears where the first part 1s set for the content of operation confirmation 3 Fast e TA ovr 5 FLE K 5 HET E E FF Passaic S g 10 WIN Sytem Mecca re Confirmation required Message O Please confirm the operation Font Arial System message box 1 Message 1 Please input the password Font Arial System message bax 2 Message 2 A system enor Font Arial Interlock When the feature is applied to an object whether or not an object is allowed to be operated is decided by the state of appointed bit address or called Enable address Enable address must be in the form of Bit address The content of the address is set in the following dialog 116 User restriction Interlock Use interlock function Hide when disabled Enable when Bit is ON Enable when Bit is OFF PLL name
73. cata 0 OE SE CU aid 118 Chapter Ad TAGex RESIS ar lili d 124 MA ere tr EEE O er aN E Anan Te EE A E Ee eA N 124 Ih Example ot Index IRE eea a n 124 Chapter i2 keypad Destinada il 128 12 1 Steps to Design a Pop up Keypad ccccccccccccccccssnsnnnnssssseeeeeseeeeeeccecccceessenensaaaseseeeees 128 122 Steps to Use Keypad without Title Datura iii 131 S Steps 10 Use FIXA Keyp Ideia a e O 134 Chapter do ODE 137 MM E Lip OD sn 137 Ie S A A O 137 13 12 COMME WPAN OM dd ais 137 AO DI tddi 140 EAN RTT 140 322 S UA TT 140 EE Ls A eo 143 IS eo fare 6a 0 ciel aaa 144 AA ght orcs beth ia cole dived oes A GE 144 133 2 Conn SUA OM A A dd 144 BA Set Word OD ube duet ulead iil dl ds 148 IRR RET 148 BAZCO ish soe Soh sek oasis ast iels A 148 SA vie reve Won t O lol eee UNO e Hamer meee ep etree sean E riers eaten ere 155 DD Ree 155 I O22 C On UAT OMA 155 3395 NOAS M character pt A ema 158 13 6 Togel SwitCh OD diia is 162 AA A oh O saa du lal ot Sie a Ms alas dalle adel 162 5026 OnE ON pememeeenes mp Penne MRM nee renee d ii 162 A wte OD EC aia tia aatevasoot atta Auie teansws EA 165 PFERD i ch eee A ey eet A T N en TE A T E ee 165 2 CONG UPA O eer a E E 165 SS TS oat OD eii E E nen oar er 168 ARI CW 604 oi ersten H a tea dia aca Hota evant tue aos E 168 3 02 COMU SUA OM id do 168 13 9 Numeric Input and Numeric Display Objects o oooooooooooaooccccccnnccononononnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnos 173 A A O ua sette
74. create and set these windows MU n d OI 3 Fast election 4 Common Window 5 PLE Response 6 HMI Connection TlPasrod Restichon g g 410 WINDOW 010 11 12 13 14 15 1 am gt w 6 2 1 Create a Window There are two ways to create a window One is selecting a window number on the window tree and right click Select New on the message dialog and click OK after the completion of all settings Please refer to the example as below 73 K 10 Mam Menu 11 show Toolbar 13 0 14 F E Clase 16 C 20 Text Object Window Settings Name Window 012 Window yo mice Width Height Frame Width 4 Color Dar K Soun Color Pattem Filled Pattern color Underlay window Boton Top Nons A Popup window etat pos X T Monopoly The name of the window The number of the window from 3 to 1999 The Width and Height of the window Frame Width The width of the frame Color The color of the frame 74 Background Underlay window Popup window Default Color The color of the background Pattern The pattern of the background Pattern color The color of the pattern Filled The option to determine if a window is filled with the color and pattern of the background Bottom Middle Top Up to three windows can be specified as underlay windows for each base window from Bottom to Top The objects on the underlay wi
75. data to PLE current base window General PLE control Back light control write back Trigger address Back light control Sound control Device type Screen hardcop 296 a Change window This is used to change base window When the value of trigger address 1s written in a valid window number the system will close the current window and open the window designated by the trigger address The new window number will be written to the trigger address 1 PLE Control Description PLE name Local HMI Attribute Type of control Change window BS Clear data after window changed Turn on back light Trigger address Device Eype LW O Address ln system tag Index register 16 bit Unsigned v As an example of the above configuration When writing a valid window number 11 into LWO the system will close the current window and open window 11 then write 11 into LW1 LWO0 1 If you use 32 bit device as trigger address and the device type of the trigger address is in word basis then the system will write the window number into trigger address 2 Below 1s the list of write address for each different type of data format 16 bit Signed Address 1 32 bit Unsigned S 32 bit Signed Address 2 Note If LB9017 ON the write back operation will not be executed 297 If clear data after wi
76. dd Element no ddd 0 254 Bit no dd 0 15 File no fff 7 10 254 Integer data file bit level N7 NfnBit fffddd dd Element no ddd 0 254 10 254 Bit no dd 0 15 Cov u O man ETT ray aaa 80 25 Tapas Cow aa EC T aeea ese aa aaio ase Comer comio Vai CO Ow au os TT 463 32bit Float F8 ddd ddd 0 254 Floating point data file F8 File no fff 0 254 Floating point data file F8 10 254 Element no ddd 0 254 32bit Float Ffn fffddd Wiring diagram Ethernet Direct connect crossover cable in RS232 DF1 Ethemet El z Crossovercable tl y A MTB000 to Micro Logix L000 1761 NEI ENI 1200 1500 SLC 5 03 MT8000 Ethernet Wire color PLC RJ45 RJ45 T 8 Brown Ethernet MT8000 SLC 500 SLC 500 SLC 500 MT8000 Ethernet Wire color Ethernet Hub or Switch RJ45 RJ45 L TX White Orange nna RX g S TX Orange 7 2 2 RJ 45 464 connector White Green 4 BDI BD4 White Blue 465 Allen Bradley PLCS http www ab com HMI Setting PLC Setting Device address aa aioe H aia 80 258 rim Accra aaa tose aeae aaa aeos Come cum Vai CO O u ECO an aaa aos meerde w a u o TT u Nfn fffddd File no fff 7 9 254 Integer data file V2 5 0 or newer Element no ddd 0 254 fffddd File no ff
77. ees ene entre RE E o an ee eee er 466 SRTR a Sy TTT 468 Copley Controls ii tado 470 DELTA DVP o dd 472 IN RE TDS daa 474 CET imme uate sien eaten E eli 477 GE Fanuc Series 90 30 BRET unid iia 480 HANA UN o ds 483 Hene Yuan Sensor 484 TAC FL Series CPU DO 0 oirn A E 485 TITS SA iia 490 KE WENGE KY Ss dual oh ia hacia ti ane dal ot Oia ik aa ately 492 KEYENCE KENAU Ree ale Rss tase eset is 494 ISE OO S D TTT 496 KOVO DI Lots ener ty enter E eye ten nen nts ener eee et nee 498 ES MASTER 0 as vets cedar antes o eae 502 IR MINS TERK 3005 CPU iS 504 USABA Gd haem ren re ener a etme HON Torre Mere Tne mem eerie trea eee 506 LS GGT GBP SES iii iaa 508 LIYAN TE XG Ser S nactaewa tech ccuin dd id 510 Master Master Slave Protocol esmen ue la 512 Memobus YASKAWA MP Series controllers ooocoonnonononccononononononocccnnnnnnonnnnnnoncnnnnnnnos 515 NEEB ARAI triada 317 INES WBS HP XO EA o Sd 519 INGE SUS US FE X Narrin esate nt eee etal uae eee ee eee ee aes 521 MIT SUBISHE ER X23 2 48 515 Dictada 523 MIESUBLSHTEXSO data 526 MITSUBISHILEXSUETHERNE ea de da 528 ITT SSO Da tae a dl teat 535 MEES UBD EHTOO G stas iento Sere MERE OE EREL Ae ETON eke EE ern Nene SRE EERE AER 537 MERU od hoy ERO T 539 MIES CES EA Oe e E 543 MODBUS AS li 550 MODBUS TU 2 di A ed 552 MODBUS RTU zero based addressing sese 555 MODBUS SERVER Modbus RTU Savall added 559 MODBUS TER lis 561 MODBUS TC PEP 260r0 DISC d eme lidia 563 Mod Lon lO een mer R
78. for 50 3 for 75 and so on k Status control address 3 15 09 08 02 01 00 g Reserved alo o o Jolo Bit 00 open file bit 0 file closed 1 file opened It Bit 01 play file bit 0 not playing video 1 playing video Bit 08 command error bit 0 command accepted 1 incorrect command or parameters Bit 09 file error bit 0 file format accepted 1 unknown file format or reading file error When playing a video the system will turn ON open file bit and play file bit If the file is unable to be scanned or the command is incorrect the command error bit will be set ON 0 gt 1 290 1 If file format is unsupported or disk I O error happens during playing e g user unplugs the USB disk the file error bit will be set ON 031 2 Refer to the following figure the value of status at each state would be Stop status 0 Pause status 1 open file bit Playing status 3 open file bit play file bit Playing play command 1 2 3 ba command YS pause command Finish on Stop a Pause stop command 5 Users should only set values to Command Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 and regard the other registers as read only 13 25 5 Restrictions B The system can only play one video file each time m If Auto repeat is unselected the system will stop playing video and close the file after complete a video play operation B If control address is
79. in proportion to its value 13 15 2 Configuration Click the Bar Graph icon on the toolbar the Bar Graph dialogue box will be shown up fill in each items of settings click OK button a new Bar Graph Object will be created See the picture below G2 Z eT al FP la La ee L The following picture shows the General tab of the bar graph object 206 Hew Har Graph Object Read address PLC name Local HMI N Device type LW K aaee 0 anns Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Index register 16 bit Unsigned Cancel Read address Select the PLC name device type address of the word devices that control the bar graph display The following picture shows the Outline tab of the bar graph object 207 Hew Har Graph Object General Outline A ticibute Type Normal Direction Zero opan Bar width ratio 4 Bar color byle Frame Background Bar Bar style Target indicator Target value Alarm indicators Low limit Low color Targetalannzerolspan dynamit address Enable Attribute Type There are Normal and Offset for selection When select Offset there must be a original value for reference Please refer the illustration below A tribute Type D Direction Up D Zero U span 10 Origm 5 Bar width ratio 3 100 Direction To select the bar graph direction and
80. list Interface Device type HMToD5 6 TM Disable Mame Location Local HMI FATEE FE O 1 master slave m Local HMI FA TEK FE COMI 11 5200 E 5 1 Above picture shows HMI 2 s content of Device list HMI 2 wants to control PLC via HMI 1 thus HMI 2 recognizes this PLC as a remote PLC So it is necessary that add a Remote PLC 1 into the device list This example shows the remote PLC is FATEK FB Series How to create Remote PLC 1 is described below Step 1 Create a new device and select FATEK FB Series for PLC type PLC default station no must be set correctly PLC type FATEK FB Series 1 10 FATEK_FB so PLCMF RS 232 v PLC default station Step 2 Correctly set the parameters HMI 2 s COM 1 connects HMI 1 s COM 2 so they both must have the same communication parameters and interfaces ignoring the PLC parameters As below HMI 1 s COM 2 and HMI 2 s COM 1 use RS232 and the parameters are 115200 E 8 1 657 PLC tpe FA TEE FB Series 1 10 FATEER FB so com COMI Use broadcast co Band rate Data bits Interval of block pack word Parity Max read command size word Stop bits Step 3 Change Location to Remote and select COM port to connect remote HMI 1 O BMI PLC PLC DF COM COMI Use Device list Device type Interface MT6056 LM Ta Sp T Disable Mame Location
81. needed 13 Compile and download your project to the MT8000 HMI Press the Backup object set in step 12 to make a backup of the Event Log history data The Backup object can be triggered via a bit signal Users can arrange a Scheduler object which turns a bit ON at the end of week to trigger a Backup object to automatically back up all history data 642 C 3 EasyPrinter Operation Guide C 3 1 Appearance tinte 1 85 Remote Ponte pe ayam fas Laa mre pa pp ER ae TM 2 114 35 021 Porter tercer in active and cnady for cequests This window lists all incoming tasks 1 e screen Job List hardcopy and backup requests This window shows the information about the task 2 Property Window selected from Job List l l This window shows the preview image of the screen 3 Preview Window hardcopy task selected from Job List Download Progress This window shows the download progress of Window incoming requests This window shows the time and message of events Message Window such as incoming request incorrect password etc 643 C 3 2 Operation Guide The following tables describe the meaning and explain how to use all EasyPrinter menu items Menu gt Fil Enable Output e Select EasyPrinter processes the tasks one by one e Unselect EasyPrinter arranges the incoming tasks in memory EasyPrinter can only reserve up to 128 MB of task data in memory If the memory is full any reque
82. objects on the common window window 4 will be shown on each base window This selection determines the layers these objects are placed above or below the objects of the base window Keyboard caret color Set the color of input caret Object layout ontrol Nature If Control mode is selected when HMI 1s operated Animation and Moving Shape will display above other kinds of objects which is with no relation to the sequence of the object created If Nature mode is selected the display sequence of objects will follow the creation sequence of the objects RW_A enabled Enable or disable the recipe data RW_A After activating RW_A an object can control the content of RW A The size of RW_ A is 64K 62 Keyboard E 0 Sri 25 1 Keypads Flosimng 32 Keypad Number 53 ASCII Large 54 ASCII Middle 55 ASCII Small 6 Keypad Number If users would like to create a new keyboard keyboard should be configured on the existing window Select Add to add these windows to the list Please refer to the designing and using keypad chapter for details 5 4 Security Parameters in Security tab determine the classes accessible for each user and users passwords Up to twelve passwords can be set Only numerals are acceptable for the password and the range is from 0 999999999 63 System Parameter Settings E Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server
83. of registers actually sends to depends on both the type of the scnd data variable and the value of the number of data_count type of read_data actual number of 16 bit register send char 8 bit l bool 8 bit l bool 8 bit short 16 bit tgan float 32 bit float 32 bit When a SetData is executed using a 32 bit data type int or float the function A IN A IN I will automatically send int format or float format data to the device For example UJ 88 Example macro command main float f 2 6 SetData MODBUS 6x 2 1 will send a floating point value to the device end macro command macro command maint int 1 bool a true bool b 30 short c false short d 50 inte 5 int TI 10 for 1 0 to 29 b 1 true next 1 for 1 0 to 49 d 1 1 2 next 1 for 1 0 to 9 f 1 1 3 next 1 set the state of LB2 SetData a Local HMI LB 2 1 set the states of LBO LB29 SetData b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 set the value of LW2 SetData c Local HMI LW 2 1 set the values of LWO LW49 SetData d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 389 set the values of LW6 LW7 note that the type of e is int SetData e Local HMI LW 6 1 set the values of LWO LW19 10 integers are equal to 20 words since each integer value occupies 2 words SetData f 0 Local HMI LW 0 10 end macro command 18 6 How to Create a
84. on the top left corner of the object It is used to set the time display format and color 13 17 3 Example For zoom in out the trend graph user has to check the Limit Dynamic limits as picture below Limits PLC name Local HMI k m ns For example the LWO and LW1 are to control low limit and high limit you may change the value of LW1 to zoom in out This following picture is in original size The range of trend is between 0 30 The arrow on the right side are set word LW1 increment JOG and LW1 decrement JOG for control the Zoom in and zoom out function 230 Decrease LW1 s value to exhibit zoom in function as shown below The value of LW1 decreased to 11 Increase LW1 s value to exhibit zoom out function as shown below The value of LW1 increased to 41 231 13 18 History Data Display 13 18 1 Overview History Data Display object display data stored by data sampling object It displays history data in numeric format Please note that the history data display will not refresh automatically it only retrieve the data from the designated record and display at the time window popup If the content of the designated record is updated the history data display will not change accordingly Ch 0 Ch 2 4 3576 2152160007 0 0 0 13575 21 52 16 09 0 0 0 3574 21 52 16 09 07 O O 3573 21 52 16 09 07 O 0 13 18 2 Configuration Click the History Data Display icon
85. operation of media player object example LWO 282 Control address v Enable PLC name Local HMI pa Device type LW v Address E System tag j Index register Commend etahi U Parameter 1 File index Parameter 2 Start time l End time b In Control address unselect the Update video iS _ Update video playing time c In Ext device select USB1 and input example as Folder name Ext device USR O USB2 Folder name example d In Attribute unselect Auto repeat and choose black as the background color Attribute Auto repeat Dar k soun Preview Users can examine whether the MT8000 supports the video format via preview function 283 Load a Click Load and select the file to be examined Users should put the file in the example directory of an USB disk If the media player starts playing the video it means the MT8000 supports this video format Use lt lt and gt gt to navigate video by minute each time To play another video click Stop to close the video file and repeat from step a Prepare the video file Remove all external devices SD USB disk connected to the MT8000 Plug the USB disk which has the video file in it into the MT8000 The first step is there for ensuring the USB disk in step b will be recognized as USBI 13 25 3 Start Stop playing video 1 Start playing video a Set
86. s port no If with no particular purpose select default Timer Clock source External device Set the source of timer The timer is used by such as Data Log Event Log etc objects which need the time records HMI RTC means the time signal comes from internal clock of the HMI External device means the time signal comes from external device The correct address of time source 1s necessary Take the illustration below as 58 an example TV indicates the time from Local PLC The context of 6 consecutives addresses starting from 0 shows as follows TV 0 Sec TV 1 Min TV 2 Hr TV 3 Da TV 4 Month TV 5 Year FLC name MITSUBISHI FXOWFX2 ki Device type TY 16 bit Unsigned Address Address format ddd range 0 255 Printer Type Display printer supported For HP PCL Series it has to use USB interface while other printers have to use COM interface For more details please refer to the MT8000 support printer chapter Type HP PCL Series USB we None Paper size SP M D E F EPSON ESCiP2 peres HP PCL Series 05 B Using COM port to connect printer has to set accurate parameters When the type of printer is SP M D E F the pixels of width has to set accurately 1 e the setting can not exceed printer s default setting Otherwise the printing result will be incorrect Type B COM Baud rate Data bite Pasty sop bib Pixels of width pels screen ha
87. the designated register to control popup or close the window 13 12 2 Configuration Click the Direct window icon on the toolbar and the New Direct Window Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items press OK button and a new Direct Window Object will be created See the pictures below win 8 HHO 192 New Direct Window Object Description Read address PLC name Local HMI Device tpe LB aaee 0 anns Address format ddddd range U 11999 Index register A tiibute Style Window No 35 Window 035 Read Select the PLC name device type address of the bit device that control the address window popup Attribute Style Refer to the Indirect Window Object for related information Window no Set the popup window number 193 Toggle Switch Read address LBIO Write address LB10 Mode Toggle 13 12 3 Example Here 1s an example to explain how to use the direct window object The picture below shows the settings of the direct window object In the example use LB10 to call up the window 35 Device type LB Address 10 1 8ystem as Attribute Style Not drawing frame Y Window no 35 WINDOW 035 Toggle Switch Read address LBiO Write address LBi0 Mode Toggle When the state of LB10 is to ON the window 35 will be popup when the state of LB10 1s OFF the window 35 will be closed See the picture below 194
88. there are Up Down Right and Left for selection 208 Zero The filled bar percentage can be calculated with the following formula Span The filled bar percentage Register value Zero Span Zero 100 When select Offset if Register value Zero gt 0 the bar will fill up from origin setting if Register value Zero lt 0 the bar will fill up but down side from origin setting For example Origin 5 Span 10 Zero 0 and use different value in read address it will display as illustration below When read address value is 4 high limit 10 8 origin D s5 4 low Jm Z B A When read address value is 8 high limit 10 8 origin 3 NJ 5 4 low fimit 5 s Bar width To display the ratio between bar and object width Below illustration displays ratio two ratio 50 and 100 209 picture below P Background Bar style Target When the register value meets the following condition the color of filled area Indicator will change to the Destination color Desti Value Tolerance lt Register value lt Desti Value Tolerance See the picture below in here Desti Value 5 Tolerance 1 if the register value is equal to or larger than 5 1 4 and equal to or less than 5 1 6 the filled area s color of the bar will change to the Destination color
89. time after rebooting so that it s able to check if an event 1s satisfied with the triggered condition and avoids the unnecessary event log record Read address By reading the read address system obtains the value and check 1f an event 1s satisfied with the triggered condition Please refer to Parts General Settings for further details Notification When an event is triggered the specific message is sent out from Notification address Select Set ON to send ON message out from the address While select Set OFF Off message 19 sent out Please refer to Parts General Settings for further information Condition The trigger condition of an event When the condition of Address type of an event is a Bit ON or OFF in Trigger can be selected The illustration below shows if Trigger On is selected 1 e the status of Read address changes from OFF to ON an event will be triggered and generate an event log record or an alarm Condition Trigger LON ON OFF When the condition of Address type of an event is a Word several selections are available as follows 86 Under the condition system will read values from Read address and then compare them with the trigger conditions to decide if an event needs to be trigged Especially if the trigger condition 1s set as or lt gt In tolerance and Out tolerance need be set where In tolerance is used f
90. to the Event Log chapter for related information Alarm bar object Alarm display object 13 21 2 Configuration Click the Alarm bar icon on the toolbar the Alarm bar dialogue box appear similiarly click the Alarm display icon on the toolbar the Alarm display dialogue box appear fill in the setting in the General tab and press the OK button a new object will be created See the pictures below 263 Hew Alarm Bar Object Format part O Time ascending Time descending Date Event tigger date Cancel Include categories Select category of events that belongs to the alarm display or alarm bar object category of an event is set in event log For example if the category of an alarm bar 1s set to 2 4 it will display all the alarm messages with category equal to 2 3 or 4 264 Please refer to Category statement in Event Log chapter Scroll Speed Set the scroll speed of alarm bar Color Set frame and background color of alarm bar Format a Sort Set the order to display alarm message Time ascending Put Latest trigger alarm message in the bottom Time descending Put Latest trigger alarm message in the top b Time Event trigger time Display the time tag with alarm message There are three formats of time tag 1 H
91. types of modes Ethernet and COM port Click Pass through button on Project Manager to start the settings 2 5 1 Ethernet Mode Pass through Ethernet com port Virtual COM Port PC lt gt PLO Cob PLE Connection Port HMI lt gt PLC HMI 192 168 1 111 Stop Pass through COM 1 v R5485 4 N Uninstall 23 2 5 2 COM Port Mode Pass through R5485 2W Y Start Pass through Stop Pass through 24 Chapter 3 Create a EasyBuilder 8000 Project In this Chapter we will take Mitsubishi PLC as an example to illustrate how to create and compile a new EB8000 project do the simulation on PC and download the project to the HMI 3 1 Create a New Project First of all click New icon on the toolbar to create a new project EasyBuilder 8000 Te EB Fie Edit View Option EasyBuilder Copyright e 2006 Weintek Lab Inc X Welcome to EssyEvilder 8000 Please select your model Use template Under Device Tab click New button to correctly set up the device property for communicating to the PLC 25 System Parameter Settings Device Device list Local HMI Local HMI Local MTS104X 640x480 Disable N A HIL Device Properties MITSUBISHI FXD FX Location PLO type ibe sE i a 1 00 MITSUBISHI FUN so PLC LF RS 4854W w PLC default stationno 0 COM COM1 2600 E 7 1 tings Use broadcast command Interv
92. unselected the system will find the first file in the designated directory and start playing it 291 13 26 Data Transfer Time based Object 13 26 1 Overview Data transfer time based object is the same as data transfer trigger based object it also transfers the data from source to destination register The difference is the way to activate data transfer operation The Data transfer time based object conducts data transfer operation based on time schedule it can also transfer data in the unit of bits 13 26 2 Configuration Click Data Transfer Time based Object icon on the toolbar the summary of data transfer objects is shown as follows EE ACE E Data Transfer Time based Data Transfer Time based Object Local HMI LB200 Local HMI LB210 Mode Bit Time interval 2 0 seconds transfer length 10 bitis 1 Local HMILLW 250 Local HMLYW260 Mode Word Time interval 2 0 second s transfer length 1 word s Settings Press the New button in the above dialogue box the Data Transfer Time based Object dialogue box appear as shown in the picture below set item and press OK button the object will be created 292 Data Transfer Time based Object Description Attribute Address type Bi Interval 3 0 second s Mo of bits source address PLE name Local HM Device type Address F System tag 4 Index register Destination address PLE name Local HMI
93. var12 LW10012 var13 LW10013 110 varl4 LW10014 varl5 LwW10015 For example var reads value from LW10000 when LW10000 is 32 var0 234 327234 the station number is 32 similarly var13 reads value from LW10013 when LW10013 is 5 var 13 234 5 234 o 9 4 1 Broadcast Station No MT6000 8000 provides two ways for users to use broadcast command First one 1s to directly set the broadcast in EB8000 Edit System parameters Device as below PLC type MITSUBISHI FxXOn FK2 W 1 00 MITSUBISHI FAON so PLC I F PLC default station no 0 COM COM1 9600 E 7 1 W Use broadcast command Second one is to use system tag to enable or disable broadcast station no and change broadcast station no Corresponding system tag is listed as below LB9065 disable enable COM 1 broadcast station no LB9066 disable enable COM 2 broadcast station no LB9067 disable enable COM 3 broadcast station no LW9565 COM 1 broadcast station no LW9566 COM 2 broadcast station no LW9567 COM 3 broadcast station no 111 Chapter 10 Security EB8000 security includes two parts 1 User security and whose operable classes 2 Object s Security 10 1 Settings of Password and Classes Go to Edit System Parameter Settings Security to set user security There are seven levels of user security including none and A F Password are Digital only 0 9 and up to 12 sets of user password available 112 Syste
94. will increase decrease one increment value for every touch activation If not the word value will be set the value in accord with the touch activated point 171 Moving piece There are four moving piece for selection You also can adjust the width of moving piece Frame Background Slot This is use to select slide object frame background and slot s color 172 13 9 Numeric Input and Numeric Display Objects 13 9 1 Overview Both of the Numeric Input object and the numeric display object can be used to display the value of the word devices The difference is the numeric input object can be used to input data from the keypad the input value is written to the designated word devices 13 9 2 Configuration Click the numeric input or numeric display icon on the toolbar and the New Numeric Input Object or New Numeric Display Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items click OK button and a new Numeric Input Object or Numeric Display Object will be created See the pictures below The difference between the New Numeric Input Object and New Numeric Display Object dialogue boxes is that the latter has the settings for Notification and keypad input while the former doesn t have The picture below shows the General tab in New Numeric Display Object 173 New Homeric Input Object General Numeric Format Security Shape Font Description I O Rea
95. word must be multiple of 4 Double word and Floating point value must use DBDn device type 593 Wiring diagram MT8000 RS232 SIEMENS 87 300 PC 9P D SUB Male adapter RS232 Port EA 2 ao Pax ex T MT8000 RS232 Systeme Helmholz 9P D SUB Male SSW7 TS D2 Rx 6 RX 8 RX EN 594 SIEMENS 57 300 Ethernet Siemens S7 300 Ethernet Series PLC http www ad stemens com HMI Setting PLC type Siemens S7 300 Must match the PLC s port setting Ethernet Com port e Must match the PLC s port setting Port no MO Must match the PLC s port setting PLC station no Must match the PLC s port setting Device address a omo mo Fr ay os Opio ef e ons BM a ELTON CC A mna pow A o AI Tw esas ona an isto DBDn ffdddd ff 0 99 dddd 0 8192 Data register double word must be DW multiple of 4 Double word and Floating point value must use DBDn device type Wiring diagram MT8000 Ethernet Wire color Ethernet Hub or Switch RJ45 RJ45 1 TX White Orang 1 RX 2 RR b Rx WhitetGrem oe 4_BD4 595 l 8 RJ45 connector Ethernet Direct connect crossover cable MT8000 Ethernet Wire color Ethernet Device RJ45 RJ45 E RR o E L e e 5 BD4 ___ White Blue s p e 5 PX fren nn 7 BD3 ___ White Brown 7 B Brown 596 SIMATIC TIS05 SIMATIC TI505 Series PLCs T1520 T1525 T1530 T1535 T1545 T1555 T1560 T1565 T1575 Us
96. yv u pow wa pow fem w Ooy Tt e O W Timer_cu d d O W Timer reset ddd owy c a W Counter Cur add Range 0 19999 0 19999 0 19999 0 19999 0 19999 0 1999 0 65535 0 65535 492 0 999 0 999 Counter Current Precaution If you use the Relay bit register Please place zero behind address For example If you want to read Relay bit 100 you just set the address as 1000 Wiring diagram RS232 CPU port MT8000 RS 232 9P D SUB KEYENCE PLC COMI COM2 COM3 OP 26486 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND 493 KEYENCE KV 1000 http www keyence com HMI Setting Parameters Recommend PLC wpe KEYENCE KV 1000 nn Parity bit Even Must match the PLC s port setting Data Bits Stop Bits PLC Station No Must match the PLC s port setting PLC Setting Communication mode None Device address Bit Word Format ddd h 0 ddd h ddd h ddd h ddd h Device Type Range 0 19999 0 19999 0 19999 0 19999 0 19999 0 1999 Eb DM Bit O Q 0 65535 0 65535 0 999 0 999 es Timer Curr Timer Preset Bit Word Device Type Format BO RY dumo B Mm aw O B R diw OB R diw B DMBt diw pow fm w Oo yv u pow w pow Mm w pw ft et W TimerCum d d W Timer reset dad pew c de 494 Precaution If you use the Relay bit register Please place zero behind address For example If you want to rea
97. 0 15 File no fff 7 10 254 Integer data file bit level N7 NfnBit fffddd dd Element no ddd 0 254 10 254 Bit no dd 0 15 T4SV ddd 0 254 Timer Preset Value T4 TfnSV fffddd File no fff 4 10 254 Timer Preset Value Element no ddd 0 254 T4PV ddd ddd 0 254 Timer Accumulator Value T4 TfnPV fffddd File no fff 4 10 254 Timer Accumulator Value Element no ddd 0 254 CS5SV ddd ddd 0 254 Counter Preset Value C5 CfnSv fffddd File no fff 5 10 254 Counter Preset Value 455 ee ee ee AA ee C5PV ddd ddd 0254 Counter Accumulator Value C5 fffddd CfnPV File no fff 5 10 254 Counter Accumulator Value Element no ddd 0 254 N7 WN a ars Integer data file N7 W N10 15 ddd ddd 0 254 Integer data file N10 15 ow F amp dd ddd 0 254 Floating point data file F8 File no fff 0 254 Integer data file N7 10 254 Wiring diagram RS 232 MicroLogix 1000 1100 1200 1500 MT8000 RS232 MicroLogix 9P D SUB mini DIN spin SER eee COM2 Sia da 2 Ll 3 TX 7 TX Vee 2 rx erx srx s GND s GND s o RS 232 SLC5 03 04 05 CHO AB CPU CHO RS 232 9P D SUB Male MT8000 RS232 9P D SUB Female COMI COM3 2 Rx 6 RX s s GND 5 GND s GND 456 Allen Bradley DH485 Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1000 1100 1200 1500 SLC 5 03 5 04 5 05 http www ab com HMI Setting Data Bits PLC Setting Communication mode DHA485 protocol
98. 00035 w mw w dddo 9999 3 3 3535353 514 Memobus YASKAWA MP Series controllers YASKAWA MP2200 MP2300 MP9xx communication module http www yaskawa com HMI Setting PLC type Memobus Com por RSa8s RS232 RS485 2 4 DTO IC E FEET mane ICI IE EE soos INTI E E mab A A CTA TT PLC Setting sa S ooo yO Device address M dddd 0 9999 MB 0 9999 h 0 f h 0 f B 1 B 515 Wiring diagram 1 RS 232 2171F 01 218IF 01 MT8000 RS232 217IF 01 RS232 9P D SUB Female COMI COM2 COM3 A 1 4 Y nnn E JR IEE T E 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND 7 GND 2 RS 485 2w 2171F 01 MT8000 RS 485 2w 2171F 01 RS422 485 COMI COM3 14P connector 1 6 Data RX 2 4 D 3 RS485 4w 2171F 01 MT8000 RS 485 2w 217IF 01 RS422 485 14P connector 516 MITSUBISHI AJ71 Mitsubishi A series PLC with AJ71C24 communication module using the Computer Link protocol http www mitsubishi automation com HMI Setting PLC type MITSUBISHI AJ71 MITSUBISHI AJ71 AnA AnU CPU MITSUBISHI AJ71 format4 pds driver RS4854W RS485 AW RS232 19200 9600 19200 S e eoan H Cows o e HT Css II a T mso o O o o ncs oo O PLC Setting Device address hhh 0 270F Input Bits hex decimal hhh 0 270F Output Bits hex decimal e p o o wm O en o o a ICI oo Va w p w w papan 517 Wiring diagram RS 485 4W MT800 Com AJ71C24 RS 422 RS 485 9P D SUB
99. 02 16 09 07 0 0 3980 22 02 16 09 07 0 O 3979 22 02 16 09 07 0 0 3978 22 02 16 09 07 0 0 3977 22 02 16 0907 O 0 3976 22 02 16 09 07 0 O 3974 22 02 16 0907 O O nm nm 21974 199109 TRIO Time and Enable or disable the time and date of data sampling and format Date Time ascending Time ascending means to put the earlier data in the top and the latest data in the bottom 234 Time descending Time descending means to put the latest data in the top and the earlier data in the bottom No Time E 87 22 24 15 786 22 24 00 16 09 071 3 785 22 23 59 16 09 07 34 122 23 58 16 09 07 2 23 57 16 09 07 2 23 56 16 09 07 781 22 23 55 16 09 07 80 22 23 54 16 09 07 1 3 4779 22 23 53 16 09 07 PITA A RIOT rare sors a P P E c lac T la GO CO co IGO Es Ln Sis 16 09 07 3 2 in F pa History The history files are named with date code The history control 1s used to select the Control designated history data files for display In case the value of history control is 0 the latest file is selected If it is 1 the second latest file is selected and so on 235 Hew History Data Display Object Channel O 16 bit Unsigned Left of decimal Pt Right of decimal Pt Display hee Channel 1 16 bit Unsigned Display Channel 2 16 bit Unsigned Display Channel gt 16 bit Unsigned Lef
100. 10 51 23 0 10 51 24 0 10 51 25 1 10 51 26 1 10 51 27 2 10 51 28 3 631 B 3 1 For Combination and Enable Setting File Step1 Click Multi File NAAA File Edit Wiew Ophons Help im Gi Open CHO be se cats El HAT Cali Export to excel OAR I 9 1 ARS dil 2 E Watelog 20081206 dil 3 EAR dA 4200811 dtl Dant Step2 Select Add File Multi File Convert file list Enable Setting file AN TIR Combine to a file Cancel Step3 Select the files that you would like to combine and check both of Enable Setting file and Combine to a file boxes With Combine to a file edit please indicate a file name for the new outcome 632 Multi File Convert file list C Documents and Settingsueer 0081147 tl C Documents and Settings user 20081148 tl Enable setting file CE 29UUU datalog pressure gs Combine to a file E SEBSOOU datalog pressure 2 xls Step4 After pressing OK the data will display on the dialog E EasyConverter File Edit View Options Help 1 a Tai RL NE k La gt 39 d El A EE a rre E E Doraments and T E 0081127 di Success C 1Documents and Settings user 20081128 dtl Success Combine to C Documents and Settings user pressure xls Step5 Open the new combined file to examine the data in Microsoft Excel 633 B 4 Command Line For EasyConverter users can run in a com
101. 10236 V memondoubleaord Double word and Floating point value must use VD device type Wiring diagram MT8000 RS 485 SIEMENS S7 200 9P D SUB Female CPU Port COMI COM3 9P D SUB Female 1 6 Data 8 D RX 5 GND 5 GND 590 SIEMENS 87 200 Ethernet Siemens S7 200 Ethernet Series PLC CPU212 214 215 216 221 222 224 226 226XM http www ad siemens com HMI Setting PLC type Siemens S7 200 Must match the PLC s port setting Ethernet Com port e Must match the PLC s port setting Port no A Must match the PLC s port setting PLC station no Must match the PLC s port setting Device address a i wo ow mo ef o wo oo owo a w wwo o emos Oe ANO Ta anas O Double word and Floating point value must use VD device type Wiring diagram MT8000 Ethernet Wire color Ethernet Hub or Switch RJ45 RJ45 4 BD4 591 Pa l 8 RJ45 connector Ethernet Direct connect crossover cable MT8000 Ethernet Wire color Ethernet Device RJ45 RJ45 1 Tx White Oramge 8 RKkt O e ee E a e W pe 5 BD4 White Blue 2o F e 6 RX Green 7 BD3 White Brown A BD3 592 SIEMENS 57 300 Siemens S7 300 series PLC http www ad siemens com HMI Setting micos sieMeNssro0 OOOO common ron S Twine ow O E omnis fs O E soos A Se SS pF se se HMI Station No PLC Setting Device address are o ww are s IW Cw ffdddd ff 0 99 dddd 0 8192 Data register double
102. 134 language mode 4 346 Chapter 16 Address Tag Library 16 1 Creating Address Tag Library At the beginning of designing a project generally speaking users are recommended to define commonly used addresses in the Address Tag Library It is not only to avoid repeating the address input for an address but also to more clearly convey the function of an address Click the Tag button on the toolbar to call up the Address Tag Library dialogue box See the pictures below Address Tag Library Manager Address Tag Library Customized System r Save Tag File Load Tag File Export CSW Import CSW Customized Display the Address Tags defined by users System Display the Address Tags reserved by the system New Add a new Address Tag 347 Delete Delete a selected Address Tag Settings Modify the selected Tag Export CSV Export the current Address Tag Library to the appointed space in the form of CSV Import CSV Import the Address Tag Library to the current project in the form of CSV The picture above shows the contents of two existing customized Address Tags in the library And the following explains the meanings of terms MITSUBISHI FEOn PLC Name l Temperature WORD No Tag name The picture below indicates another kind of Address Tag which is the system reserved register Address Tag Library Customized System Add
103. 19 popup Command Users set this address to control the operation of media player gt Command control address 0 Parameter 1 Parameter for control operation O ey Parameter 2 Parameter 2 for control operation gt Parameter 2 control address 2 Status The system will turn bits ON when state changes or malfunctions gt Status control address 3 File index The system will write file index when starting to play a video gt File index control address 4 Start time The system will write video start time when starting to play a video unit sec Always 0 gt Start time control address 5 End time The system will write video end time when starting to play a video unit sec gt End time control address 6 Update O Enable video The system will write video elapsed time into playing playing time register in every update period seconds Video time playing E E period Playing Update the video elapsed time periodically unit sec USBI Play video files in USBI USB2 Play video files in USB2 Folder name The name of the folder storing video files Users must put Video video files in a folder e g example instead of root file store directory location 1 Folder name couldn t be empty 2 Folder name couldn t include A lt gt When finish playing a video file the system will 28 7 automatically play next video e g video 1 gt
104. 19200 default Set the Max Node Address as exactly how many PLCs you have eee te ES j I rE he ll ale Gere Cn l im Che 10 reia Cheers 18 Lice prn DRE l S Aeneas a ere m fora Bes 19200 D irai rece 3 Peres pres irs D Ergi ati i Para i N Era Meer A co crm Pralstal Conti f ede Mii Frios 11 457 Device address Device Bit Word Format Range Memo Type ddd dd ddd 0 254 dd 0 15 00 ddd dd ddd 0 254 dd 0 15 sab ddd dd Bit data file B10 13 Bfn fffddd dd File no fff 3 10 254 Bit data file B3 10 254 m Element no ddd 0 254 NfnBit fffddd dd Element no ddd 0 254 10 254 Bit no dd 0 15 ado 80 254 4950 13 Bit no dd 0 15 File no fff 7 10 254 Integer data file bit level N7 TfaSV fffddd File no fff 0 254 Timer Preset Value Element no ddd 0 254 TfnPV fffddd CfnSV fffddd CfnPV fffddd File no fff 0 254 Timer Accumulator Value Element no ddd 0 254 File no fff 0 254 Counter Preset Value Element no ddd 0 254 File no fff 0 254 Counter Accumulator Value Element no ddd 0 254 W N7 ddd 0 254 Integer data file N7 W N10 15 ddd 0 254 Integer data file N10 15 W ddd 0 254 Floating point data file F8 File no fff 0 254 Integer data file N7 10 254 W Nfn fffddd Element no ddd 0 254 458 Wiring diagram RS 485 SLCS00 Fixed type SLC5 01 02 03 CH1 MT8000 can t conne
105. 2 O mew ecos campos O O a O ae 0 T oasis e Cso e ECETIA CA aan RS485 Tricine wec o campo ssw OO ne Coe rare wo O o a e PLC spon ee ais OO O O s o ac e PLC spon etne Range from 1 to 99 for RS485 PLC Station No l 1 99 according to the PLC s setting Device address Register Float DDD dd 0 9999 99 Floating point register Note D Decimal 580 About device address range details please refer to the PLC manual Example read write address 1901 2 please input 190101 read write address 400 1 please input 40001 When select the Register Float be sure set data format to 32 bit float or it will ignore the read write of point Wiring diagram RS232 Easy View MT8000 RS232 9P D SUB Parker Compax3 PLC COM RS232 COM2 RS232 COM3 RS232 X10 9P D SUB RS485 Easy View MT8000 RS 485 2w D SUB Parkar Compax3 PLC X10 9P D SUB How to setting Compax 3 servo to RS485 mode 1 Open C3 ServoManager select Communication gt RS 485 Settings 581 C Documents and Settings ywp Y File Edit Vier Uptions Tools 7 D Sl amp Y K BAe S O Device Selection O Device Selection Wieard Online Device Identification C35 111 T40 Configuration Signal Source Lam functions E EEE 2 Click to Configure RS 485 POP Settings Click to Configure AS 485 POF Settings 7a ker Hees BS 485 Settings 3 Setting parameters as below
106. 200 Address index R W R W R W LW 9260 22 19 The Address Ranges of Local HMI Memory 22 19 1 Bits Local Local Memory Bits Bits 0 11999 AAAAA AAAAABB AAAAA address BB bit offset 00 15 Local Word Bits LW BIT 0 9999 Example 56712 address 567 bit offset 12 AAAAAB AAAAA address B bit offset O f Retentive Memory Bit RBI 0 65535 Example Index 567a RW Bit address 567 LW9000 bit offset a 444 AAAAAB AAAAA address B bit offset O f Retentive Memory Word 0 65535 Example Bits 567a address 567 bit offset a AAAAAB AAAAA address B bit offset 0 f Retentive Memory A Word RW A Bit 0 65535 Example Bits 567a address 567 bit offset a 22 19 2 Words Local Memory Words AAAAA LW 0 9999 AAAAA address Retentive Memory AAAAA RW 0 65535 Words AAAAA address Retentive Memory AAAAAB Word AAAAA address Index RWI 0 65535 Example 567 RW address LW9000 Retentive Memory A AAAAA RW_A 065535 Word AAAAA address Extended Memory AAAAAAAAAA EM0 EM9 o Words Limited by device Maximum 2 GB 445 22 20 Touch Screen X and Y Position Read Remote Address Description amp Macro HMI Write Touch status word bit 0 ON LW 9041 R user 1s touching the screen Control Lw 9042 Lw 9043 Lw9044 Lw 9045 22 21 Variable Station no eee Ea ee gajaj J AAEE e Remote HMI Control Address Description Var0 Var15 station no LW
107. 2301 end macro command SWAPW source result Description Exchanges the high word and low word data of a 32 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command main int source result SWAPB 0x12345678 result result is 0x 78561234 source 0x12345 SWAPB source result result is 0x23450001 end macro command LOBYTE source result Description Retrieves the low byte of a 16 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command maint short source result LOBYTE 0x1234 result result is 0x34 source 0x123 LOBYTE source result result is 0x23 end macro command HIBYTE source result Retrieves the high byte of a 16 bit source into result 375 MN source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command maint short source result HIBYTE 0x 1234 result result is 0x12 source 0x123 HIBYTE source result result is 0x01 end macro command LOWORD LOWORD source result Description Retrieves the low word of a 32 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command maint int source result LOWORD 0x12345678 result result is 0x5678 source 0x12345 LOWORD source result result is 0x2345 end macro command HIWORD HIWORD source result Descriptio
108. 640 Dn O 471 Wiring diagram Memo 90 VersaMax series PLC of GE FANUC includes such series as 90 30 90 70 VersaMax Micro VersaMax Nano and VersaMax etc CPU of 90 30series can pass RS485 serial com port on module utilize SNP serial communication protocol of GE to connect with Easy View MT8000HMI In addition CPU331 340 341 350 351 352 360 363 364 can also connect through CMM311 Communication Module CPU351 352 363 364 also can connect through serial com port on CPU Unit 90 70 series CPU can also connect through CMM711 Communication Module or connect through serial com port on CPU Unit Relevant software and hardware are set up concretely please consult the technical manual that GE GE Fanuc offered CPU port 90 30 VersaMax MT8000 COM1 485 90 30 VersaMax 9P D SUB RS485 port 15P SUB D Female RTSA 15 CTSA az 14 CTSB 10 RDA 11 RDB CPU port 90 30 series CPU35 1 352 363 364 MT8000 PLC 232 90 30 90 70 series 7 9P D SUB Female RS232 port 6P RJ 11 Female Dane 6P RJ 11 Female 478 MT8000 RS232 VersaMax series RS232 port ae 9P SUB D Female CPU port VersaMax series CPU001 002 005 E05 MT8000 RS232 VersaMax series RS232 port eis 9P SUB D Female 479 GE Fanuc Series 90 30 Ethernet GE 90 30 series CPU model 374plus HMI Setting Parameters PLC type Recommend GE fanuc series 90 30 Ethernet Com BON Port No 18245 Device address Bit Word a n sawi a sew
109. 8 00 00 ss pe End time 08 20 00 OFF ii 07 50 00 08 00 00 18 10 00 18 20 00 e Once the system execute start action 1t will read Write start address and Write end address altogether after then even you change the value of Write end address the system would not use the new value e When the operator changes RTC data for those schedule object with both start time and end time setting the system will check if the time update changes the status from out of schedule range to within schedule range if 1t 1s the start action will be performed e If there are several schedule objects registered the same start time or end time when time up the system will perform the operation from the first to the last in ascending order e When Time Set are specified as Address mode the system will read control word periodically e When Time Set are specified as Address and start time and end time is over valid range the system may not execute operation properly e When Time Set are specified as Address the action will not start up until time data update 1S SUCCESS 320 13 29 Option List 13 29 1 Overview An Option List displays a list of items that the user can view and select Once the user selects an item the value corresponding to the item will be written to a word register There are two forms for this object Listbox and Drop down list The listbox lists all items and highlights the selected one Howev
110. 9506 LW 9510 A new password for user 6 R W R W LW 9511 LW 9512 A new password for user 7 R W LW 9513 LW 9514 A new password for user 8 R W LW 9515 LW 9518 A new password for user 10 R W LW 9519 LW 9520 A new password for user 11 R W LW 9521 LW 9522 A new password for user 12 R W R W W LW 9523 E E LW 9516 A new password for user 9 R W R W LW 9517 E E R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R 436 22 8 Time of HMI Remote Address Description HMI Control LW 9010 Local time second BCD LW 9016 Local time week BCD R R R LW 9030 System time in units of 0 1 second timing n S A LW 9031 from the machine starts up 22 9 Hardware of HMI Read Remote Address Description amp Macro HMI Write Control Set ON to disable Sound and Buzzer LB 9019 R W R W R W Set OFF to enable Sound and Buzzer Set OFF to ON increase the brightness of LB 9040 l W W W CCFL backlight one step Set OFF to ON decrease the brightness of LB 9041 W W W CCFL backlight one step LW 9070 free space for event logs K bytes LW 9071 System reserved free space size K bytes LW 9072 MT8000 available free space K bytes 437 22 10 The States of Communicating with Remote HMI s Remote Address Description HMI i Control n 0 31 The registers can be used to indicate the states of communication with remote HMIn oi Gu ana a communication S norma while OFF indicates the communication 1s disconne
111. AA APA NATI PP YT Y IV ay y F ta a gt ee Kl Otherwise select Time for X axis time range and go to Trend Grid for enable Time scale function Please refer Time scale on the following Watch line Watch line Enable Address system tg Index register Using the Watch line function when user touches the trend display object it will display a watch line and export the sampling data at the position of watch line to the designated word device You may register a numeric display object to display the result Please refer to the following pictures 225 Match line lA y AI a E R a laa K E R 4 L W300 Watch line function also can export sampling data of multiple channels The address registered in watch line is the start address and those sampling data will be exported to the word devices starting from start address The data format of each channel may be different the corresponding address of each channel is arranged from the first to the last in sequence Please refer to the following pictures LW300 Ch 0 16 bit Unsigned 1 words LW301 Ch 1 32 bit Unsigned 2 words LW303 Ch 2 32 bit Unsigned 2 words L W305 Ch 3 16 bit Signed 1 words The picture below shows the attribute of trend display 226 Hew Trend Display Object General Trend Shape Frame Smm Background show scroll controls Enable Color I
112. Builder S000 2 0 0 Build 2009 02 02 has been successtully installed Click Cloze to exit 14 7 From menu Start Programs EasyBuilder8000 to start a EB8000 project fm Es yBuilder8000 ge EssyBuilderg000 E Eas Converter EagyPrinter A Project Manager Le ReleaseNote pdt TP EasvDiasnoser ig EasySimulator Es FasyAddress Viewer The definition of each menu under EB8000 catalog te Releasellote pdt Note of EB8000 version and latest information Communication monitoring tool via online simulation Tool for executing simulation without installing EB8000 Review the register range of device types for each PLC Essy ddresViever supported 15 Chapter 2 Project Manager Operations The Project Manager is a software shell for launching several utilities Some functions are duplicated in the EasyBuilder 8000 screen editing program Project Manager program can be run as a stand alone program In this chapter each function will be introduced respectively amp Project Manager HMI IF Password Type MT6000 8000 i Series Pett me Reboot HMI Connector Ethemet USE cable series only HMI IF 19 165 1 45 w Editor FasyBuilder 8000 Faswlonyerter EszvPrinter RecipelExtended Memory Editor Easyv ddres Viewer Build Download Data for CE USB Disk Transfer Download Upload simulation n line Simulation ff line simulation i Pass through Pass thr
113. CIGPPWiGI7IE71 LD Edit mode Project Edit Eind Replace Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Program le Dig e E i eA 9158 Tal lZ UG ll le JE Jq H 4 HHT K 1 A 25125 Ate Ue at le 1 Ll E F Fo sF5 F sF6 Fi FS FO sF9 cFa ci sF sF8 aF j aF aF5 coF5 coil FIO aFO _ el x a GIR 211413 U wpe Program Device comment lt c a Parameter SE FLC para mete S Network paR STEP 1 tal Remote pass E Device memory E Device init 2 Click Operational setting to set IP information e MELSOFT series GX Developer CAMELSECIGPPWiOJ71E71 Network parameters Setting the Network parameter View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help gt Sa Distal Bll GIG 14 TZ ae Ble lee lo 213 21 el sef BIB E ET ot a L tE Sicko Ter sE seS sry sha sFo i cof coll FIO ar 2 MELSECNE T Ethernet MELSECNET MINI CC Link Cancel HE Tog 9 Device comment Module 1 191 Parameter fut PLC para mete Network type Ethernet Starting ON gt 0040 PRESETS T Total stations gion No gt 5 Device init K STEP 2 mit On line Operational settings j Initial settings J E D ee 545 Module 1 Module lt Metwork type Ethernet Mone starting 1 0 Ho Network Mo L ro LC L 4 Ts os ls Total stations Group Mo station Mo Mode Operatio
114. COM Communica Le se siii 425 21 3 Operate the PLC Connected with other HMS sss sese 429 Chapter 22 system Reserved W ords BS e des UE 432 P SY Stem talas ANd COn dad 432 DDD SAUCE Data Te aT ds 433 IS A A A 433 22 4 Task Button and Fast Selection WINdOW cccccccccnncnnononooononccnnnncnnnonononnnononnnnnnnnnanonnnnnnos 434 E VE a LOCSIN e ras 434 2 NS E het ate ules E E E E EE A 435 221 Password and Operation Le kesrin E E T 435 O e O a iat O 437 220 Hard Ware oa MIN 437 22 10 The States of Communicating with Remote HMS 438 22 11 The States of Communicating with PLC sese 438 22 12 MEME Connected to SCTV due od a Ud 440 2213 MODBUS Server SUON TNO essa sissies cheats a 44 22 AG COMES OMI 61 e dae usada aed 44 S K T I T eae ener ee i ete O te ete eee ee 443 22 16 PLC amp Remote IME TPs Address SCtin gf de 443 22 Ad a SCL VCE Oe R LT 443 22 BS Ie TE Index PUNCH OM ds 444 22 19 The Address Ranges of Local HMI Memory sss sees 444 DDN ABMS caciat eit A A 444 A O eee E ene Teena a er erence S 445 22 20 J OUCH SCreen X and Ye POS TIO 446 POO IR Nara DIS LOA MO eam ere eee enn T ee mane E AN nce nese eee ce eee N 446 Chapter 22 PLC ConmecnOn Ta L 447 ABUSE eee ee ee 447 Allen Bradley CompaciLosixy FlexLo Xt iid een 450 POPC MAD TAS Y DeL dan 455 il tiene Aad octane dS dua had Eaa teed Ub dated adalah cis 457 Allen Bradley EtherNet LP Compact 0 G1 didas 460 Allen Bradley Ether Net H E HR salidas 463 A BETA bal UF O AE nme
115. D depends on the format of Write address Attribute met Style Write constant value set value lo Increment value JOG Increase value function When the operation is activated the Inc value will be added to the value of the word device on the condition that the result is not larger than the value Upper limit A ticibute Set Style Inc value p Upper limit 10 b Decrement Value JOG Decrease value function When the operation is activated the Dec value will be subtracted from the value of the word device on the condition that the result 1s not less than the value Bottom limit 150 A tribute Set Style Decrement value 0G Dec value 1 Bottom limit 10 c Press and hold increment JOG Press and hold increment function When the touch down is held longer than the time set in JOG delay the value of the word device will be added by the value set in Inc value at the speed set in JOG speed on the condition that the result is not larger than the value in Upper limit Attribute Set Style Press and hold increment OO Inc value 1 Upper limit 10 JOG delav 1 0 second fs e JOG speed 10 5 second S we e Press and hold increment JOG Press and hold decrement function When the touch down 1s held longer than the time set in JOG delay the value of the word
116. DBUS RS422 485 PORT MT8000 Modbus RTU Controller COM1 RS 485 4w RS422 Port MT8000 RS 485 2Wire Modbus RTU 9P D SUB Controller RS485 554 MODBUS RTU zero based addressing MODBUS RTU CONTROLLER http www modbus org HMI Setting PLC type Online Simulator Extend address mode PLC Setting Recommend Modbus RTU YES YES RS232 RS485 9600 Option Even Odd None 7 8 12 Broadcast command Does not apply to this protocol Device address Device Bit Word Format Range Memo Type B B B B 555 Px ma os ta Reser on aus oss pu einer COs os maas 4x single word write NOTE Address type 5x are mapping to Hold Reg The communication protocol of 5x almost same as 4x except 5x making double word swap If 4x have following information adas 1 2 3 Tas foto Data in word oi o2 0x3 ona ons ox Data 0320001 0540003 ox6000s For 5x it become ages 1 2 3 4 s o Data in word 0x2 oxi oxa 03 x6 05 0x10002 0x30004 0x50006 Modbus RTU function code Ox 0x01 Read coil 0x05 write single coil Ix 0x02 Read discrete input N A for write operation 3x 0x04 Read input register N A for write operation Ax 0x03 Read holding register 0x10 write multiple register 5x 0x03 Read holding register 0x10 write multiple register Note reverse word order in double word format 3xbit is equivalent to 3x
117. DE 1 n designate bard code data save address The following display shows the configuration of barcode reader data The data from barcode reader is 9421007480830 The BARCODE 0 and BARCODE 1 n represents number of bytes read from barcode and the data Address BARCODE O BYTES Address BARCODE lan BARCODE At present the data of barcode device corresponding address as below 420 Barcode corresponding Data address 13 bytes decimal BARCODE 0 The real data in the address is 14 bytes 7 words If the data is odd will add a byte 0x00 to make it even BARCODE 1 3439HEX BARCODE 2 3132HEX 421 Chapter 21 Ethernet Communication and Multi HMIs Connection By using the Ethernet network the EB8000 provides following methods for data transmission 1 HMI to HMI communication 2 PC to HMI communication 3 Operating the PLC connected to other HMIs There are two ways of the Ethernet communication one way is to use RJ45 straight through cable with the use of a hub hubs and the other way is to use RJ45 crossover cable In the second way there is no need to use hub s and it is limited to the condition of point to point connection HMI to HMI or PC to HMI The following descriptions will show how to set up and perform the Ethernet connection in each way T a 3 Control center DODOS LIA Ethernet crossover cable OOS LN 422 21 1 HMI to HMI Communication E Ethernet fi
118. DEC source 0 result 4 result is 5678 end macro command ASCH2HEX source start result len Description Transforms a string source into a hexadecimal value saved to a variable result The length of the string is len The first character of the string is source start source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable start must be a constant macro command maint char source 4 short result 3 3 source Q 5 source 1 6 P j source 2 e source 3 8 ASCII2DEC source 0 result 4 result is 0x5678 end macro command 18 5 3 Data Manupulation FILL source start preset count Description Sets the first count elements of an array source to a specified value preset source and start must be a variable and preset can be a constant or variable Example macro command maint char result 4 char preset FILL result 0 0x30 4 result U is 0x30 result 1 is 0x30 result 2 is 0x30 result 3 is 0x30 preset 0x31 FILL result 0 preset 2 result U is 0x31 result 1 is 0x31 end macro command SWAPE SWAPB source result Description Exchanges the high byte and low byte data of a 16 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command maint short source result SWAPB 0x5678 result result is 0x7856 3 4 source 0x123 SWAPB source result result is 0x
119. DIP switch to change modes corresponding functions will be triggered If losing or forgetting the system password users can set DIP Switch 1 to ON and the rest DIPs remain OFF Then reboot HMI HMI will jump to Touch Adjust Touch screen calibration mode After calibration the pop up window appears as the illustration below Users will be inquired 1f they would like to restore the system password to the default 33 Restore to default password Yes No 04 When YES is chosen another pop up dialog appears as below Users will be confirmed again if restoring the system password to the default is correct by inputting yes Then click OK The default password is 111111 However other passwords including download and upload password have to be reset Project will be removed _ Comfirm by typing yes yes Note The project and data in the HMI will all be erased if the reset action is proceeded Dip Switch ON OFF OFF OFF Touch screen Calibrate mode OFF ON OFF OFF Reseve Reserve OFF OFF ON OFF Boot Loader mode OFF OFF OFF ON Reserve Reserve 34 4 2 2 Tool bar When the HMI is booted user can set the system by using the mouse to click tool bar at the bottom of the screen Normally tool bar is hidden automatically Only by touching the target at the corner of the right bottom will the tool bar pops up CPL al Weintek MT8000 Series cone AC
120. E Station Address alon Address W Enable Duplicate Detection HMAK Receive Limit ENU Transmit Limit ACE Timeout 50 20 mz Embedded Responses Enabled Create the Tag RSLogix 5000 TEST 1769 L20 Pro S gt MamProgram Ioj xj File Edit View Search Logic TA Tools Window Help alse aw as lt me ela a nem B ail C DI 4 ld lad arll laua gt a X Favorites AERA TimerCounter K TERE 1 Compare Scope MainProgram Show fehow All l Sort Tag Name 9 E value e Foce Mask Sule E S Power Up Tasks Monitor Tags Motion Groupe eon Tage Trends Went Data Types Export Tags IO Configurat Print 4 Monitor Tags do Ea 453 Le PS UU LE Des me 1 TesTeontole TS Decimal i elect Data Tape FELD TRUNCATE FILTER HIGH Pass FILTER LOW Pass FILTER NOTCH FLIP FLOP D FLIP FLOP JE FUNCTION GENERATOR HL_LIMIT 454 Allen Bradley DF1 Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1000 1100 1200 1500 SLC 5 03 5 04 5 05 http www ab com HMI Setting PLC type ao SCS OS A aae o0 9600 19300 38400 RR None Bodd Noe RR CN O E O soss E O O E HA Station No OT PLC Station No tT PLC Setting Communication mode DF1 Full Duplex protocol 19200 None 8 1 default Error Check CRC Device address E File no fff 3 10 254 Bit data file B3 10 254 Bfn fffddd dd Element no ddd 0 254 Bit no dd
121. EE FB Series 1 ES COM Remote IP 210 608 117 224 Po MITSUBISHI EX 0 Rs COM MITSUBISHI FX gt u FA TEE FE Series emotedP 210 66 117 224 Po FATEE FE Sere 1 Es COM device type 1s he device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the PLC data For example if device type is LW BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method BIN can be ignored If device type is LW BCD it means the register is LW and the encoding method is BCD address offset is the address offset in the PLC For example GetData read_ data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address is 5 If address offset uses the format NTA A A A A N indicates that PLC s station number is N For example GetData read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 2 5 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If GetData uses the default station number defined in the device list as follows it is not necessary to define station number in address_ offset PLC type FATEK FB Series M W 1 10 FATEK_FB so PLC JJF Rs232 yv PLC default station no 2 COM COM1 9600 E 7 1 Settings Use broadcast command The number of registers actually read from depends on both the type of the read data variable and the value of the number of data count 385 type of read_data char 8 bit char 8 bit bool 8 bit bool 8 bit short 16 bi
122. EST Description shape O Frame O Inner Width 82 Height 81 Frame undefined Inner undefined Cancel Click OK and a complete Shape with two states is created See the following picture 331 Library glaa button button Tes System Frame System Button System Lamp O shape O States 2 Frame State O State 11 A Tees States O a EB Mone 14 2 Creating Picture Library Click the Picture Library button on the toolbar and the Picture Library dialogue appears B Call up Picture Library Sal Sh 332 Pir hue Library Library icont Button Demo graphd graph mapi Computer Buttoni ESTE e gt background O PB Red 1 PB Green 2 PB Yellow 3 PB Blue States 2 States 2 States 2 States 2 30054 bytes 30054 bytes 80054 bytes 30054 bytes a State O State 11 4 Lamp Red O 5iLamp Green 6 Lamp Yelow Lamp Blue States 2 States 2 States 2 States 2 30054 bytes 30054 bytes 30254 bytes 30054 bytes BMP BMP BMP BMP Import Picture Modify Picture Delete All States Delete Cur State Insert Before Insert After Library Picture Libraries which have been added into the current project Select the library source of a picture from the list State Select the state that the current graph wants to display If the selected Picture isn t displayed it means that the Picture does not exist or the state o
123. EasyConverter please refer to the manual Appendix EasyConverter C 4 2 Specialized Criteria Sometimes users may need a special handling for the files uploaded from a specific HMI Here is an example 3 dtl EasyConverter c PathName 192 168 1 26 Or users can also specify the HMI with its name 4 dtl EasyConverter c PathName Weintek 01 Or in the case of needing special handling for different Data Sampling history files 651 Specialized Criterion for the Data Sampling object s folder name Voltage D dtl EasyConverter s Voltage lgs PathName Voltage The 5 criterion can be only performed on the history files uploaded from the Data Sampling 66399 objects with the folder name of Voltage The 3 argument indicates this criterion accepts the qualified Data Sampling files from any HMI Users can also change the 3 argument to 192 168 1 26 192 168 1 HMI name etc for narrowing the target HMIs C 4 3 The Format of a Convert Batch File The following table explains all arguments in a criterion l File Type This argument specifies the extension name of the uploaded files this criterion targets e g dtl for Data Sampling history files evt for Event Log history files 2 Command Line The exact command EasyPrinter sends to a console window if the uploaded file is qualified 3 a HMI IP address This argument specifies the HMI th
124. Enable b SOG When the Multi State Switch object 1s activated the value of the write address will be subtracted by 1 In the Value display mode if the resulting value is smaller than the value of Offset and Enable in Cyclic 1s selected the value of the register will change to No of states 1 Offset and shows the state No of states no 1 otherwise the value of the word device will remain in Offset and shows the state 0 167 13 8 Slide Object 13 8 1 Overview The slide object can be used to display the value of word device 13 8 2 Configuration Click the slide object icon on the toolbar and the dialogue box will appear fill in each items and click OK button a new slide object will be created See the picture below sider 168 Hew Slider Object General Cutline Security Shape Description Write address PLC name Device type Address L_ System tag Address format ddddd range 0 10255 16 bit Unsigned w Index register Notification Set ON LS Set OFF PLC name Device type Address Address format ddddd range 0 11999 Index register Cancel Write Select the PLC name device type address of the word device that system set address value to Notification When this function is selected the state of the designated bit device can be set at the same time as the operation is completed
125. H MM SS 2 HH MM 3 DD HH MM HH MM EE C 7 HH MM O DD HE MM c Date Event trigger date Display the date tag with alarm message There are four formats of date tag 1 MM DD YY 2 DD MM YY 3 DD MM YY 4 YY MM DD Date Event tigger date OMMDDYY DOUMMYY CODD MM XY oYYMMDD Set font and color of alarm message in the Font tab See the picture below 265 Hew Alarm Bar Object Alarm Shape Font A thibute Font Comuc Sans Mi Ae Color mmm Sze 2 Italic 266 13 22 Event Display Object 13 22 1 Overview Event display object displays active and finished events The events are registered in event log object The active events are the events which are in trigger condition or have been triggered and unacknowledged The event display object displays those active events in the order of trigger time See the picture below Event display object can also display the time of the events been triggered acknowledged and recovered 01 20 09 01 20 09 01 20 09 01 20 09 01 20 09 d MANO 15 35 22 13 35 22 15 35 20 15 35 19 15 35 18 A SE 31 E 13 22 2 Configuration 15 35 23 Event 1 LB10 ON Event O LBOON _ Miulti text Event 0 LBO ON Event 1 LB10 WA Civant 2 Y Click the Event Display icon on the toolbar the Event Display dialogue box appear set each items in the General tab press OK
126. HMI 1 and HMI 1 connects HMI 2 via COM port so that the HMI 2 can control the PLC by way of HMI 1 An example describes how to use EB8000 to create projects used on HMI 1 and HMI 2 E 1 How to Create a Project of Master HMI Below show the content of HMI 1 s System Parameter Settings Device list General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Device list Mame Location Device type Interface VF FP Local HMI Local HMI Local MToUS6 TM Tap T 22 Disable NIA Local PLE 1 FATEE FB Seres Local FA TER FE Series COMIMGO00 R 7 1 Ras Master slave All Master slawe Server COMmM2015200 E 8 11 R522 1 Due to HMI 1 s COM 1 connects PLC the device list must include Local PLC 1 This example s Local PLC 1 is FATEK FB Series and PLC s communication parameter is 9600 E 7 1 2 Users must add a new device Master Slaver Server for setting COM 2 s communication properties Because HMI 1 s COM 2 1s used to receive commands from HMI 2 Above picture shows the COM 2 s parameters are 115200 E 8 1 and uses RS232 These parameters have 656 not been restricted to be the same as COM 1 but the data bits must set to 8 In general COM 2 is set to use a higher baud rate for more efficient communication E 2 How to Create a Project of Slave HMI Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer erver Device
127. IA Horiz 5 E division s Vert interval second gt Time scale Enable Format HH MM wt Font Albany Color IIS ze Channel Channel y Pen property Color ME Width Time Date HH MM3 HH MM olor I Dale MMDDYY ODDMMYY ODDMM YY YMMDD The color of frame Background The color of background Show scroll To enable disable scroll control on the trend display controls Set the distance and the color of grid Enable disable grid 227 Enable Horiz Set the number of horizontal line Verti interval a Pixel Point distances 2 Pixel O Time When select pixel to set the display interval see note on the above graph and General tab the Verti interval is used to select how many sampling point will be included between two vertical grid line See the picture below Verti interval point s b Time When select Time to set the time range of display data the Verti interval is used to select the time range between two vertical grid lines See the picture below Vert interval second 3 According to these settings the system will calculate the number of vertical grid line automatically Time Scale To enable the time scale on the bottom of trend display Format To select time scale as HH MM or HH MM SS Font To select font style Size To select font size Recommend use font size 8 228 Limit uncheck Dy
128. JPG or GIF Picture name Total states Image size Image format BMP 104 Refer to the illustrations in the Setting up and using Shape Library and Picture Library section for the details about all of the settings in the Picture Library s setting dialog box Click OK and preview the design of the picture after the complication of the settings Preview L UU LZ LG LO se e 9 3 Setting Text Content Go to the New Bit Lamp Object Label tab to set the text content of the object 105 Hew Bit Lamp Object General Shape Label Us label sselo EI 0 LU A ticibute Italic Underline Duplicate these attributes to every state Movement rees Lett w continous Speed A A Content test Tracking Duplicate this label to every state Use label Check Use label and click Label Library button to add and edit the text The EB8000 supports Windows true font Use label library Check Use label library and Label tag dropdown whose resource comes from label library appears Label Library Refer to the illustrations in the Setting up and using Text and Label Library section to view the usage of label library 106 Font Select font style in font list Color Select the font color for the text Size Select the font size for the text The EB8000 supports all the text sizes Align Select the alignment method of the tex
129. L 5 e Output EasyPrinter provides two modes to output hardcopy results Print Out and Save to File a Print Out Select this option to inform EasyPrinter to print out the hardcopy result on specified printers b Save to File 647 Select this option to inform EasyPrinter to convert the hardcopy result into a bitmap file and save it in the specified directory Users can find the bitmap files at Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt yymmdd hhmm bmp For example when a hardcopy request 1s given at 17 35 00 12 Jan 2009 the bitmap file will be named 090112 1735 bmp And if there is another bitmap file generated in the same minute 1t will be named 090112 1735 01 bmp and so on Backup MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings General Output eae Backup files im DAM T3000 When target file has existed O Overwrite it The content will be destroyed Append BLE to the file name Convert Batch File DAM TS000 convertecesy def e Output EasyPrinter stores the backup files to the specified path For Event Log historical data files Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt eventlog gt EL yyyymmdd evt For Data Sampling historical data file Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt 648 datalog gt Folder name of the Data Sampling object gt yyyymmdd dtl For Recipe Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt recipe gt recipe rcp or recipe a rcp e Co
130. Manager The function is for building the download data and the settings shows as below 352 Project Manager elect the folder to save download data Oure Project i Recipe E W PLEASE INPUT RECIPE FILE NAME Recipe 4 RW L PLEASE INPUT RECIPE_A FILE NAME Data log O Select the folder to save download data Insert CF card or USB stick to PC and click Browse to assign the file path or directory name and then click Build to set all contexts of the downloaded data Note Save location should be the name of directory and avoid designating only root directory For example both c and f are illegal names 17 3 Transferring Recipe Data Using the Data Transfer Trigger based object to transfer Recipe Data to the appointed address or saving the data of the designated address in RW and RW A as well Please refer to the Data Transfer Trigger based object section for related information 17 4 Saving Recipe Data Automatically In order to prolong the life of HMI s flash memory the EB8000 will save Recipe Data automatically every minute to avoid losing the data when the HMI shuts down The EB8000 provides user with LB9029 save all recipe data to machine set ON system register bit function 353 to save Recipe Data manually The EB8000 will save Recipe Data when user set ON to LB9029 But when user set ON to LB9028 reset all recipe data set ON th
131. N Syntax ASIN source result Description Calculate the hyperbolic sine of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command main float source result ASIN 0 8660 result result is 60 source 0 5 ASIN source result result is 30 end macro command Name ACOS Syntax ACOS source result Description Calculate the hyperbolic cosine of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command main 369 float source result ACOS 0 8660 result result is 30 source 0 5 ACOS source result result is 60 end macro command ATAN source result Description Calculate the hyperbolic tangent of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command maint float source result ATAN l result result is 45 source 1 732 ATAN source result result is 60 end macro command RAND result Description Calculates a random integer saved into result result must be a variable Example macro command maint short result RAND result result is not a fixed value when executes macro every time end macro command 370 18 5 2 Data Transformation BIN2BCD source result Description Transforms a binary type value source into a BCD type value result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a va
132. P D SUB Female MT8000 COMI RS 485 4w 9P D SUB 8 Communication unit DL205 series D2 DCM and DL405 series D4 DCM RS232 MT8000 RS232 KOYO DirectLogic PLC DL205 405 DCM R5S232 Port 25P D SUB Female 9P D SUB 3 TX 4 TX 7 TX 5_GND 501 LS MASTER K Cnet LS MASTER K series K80S K200S K300S K1000S http www lgis com HMI Setting RS232 RS485 Must match the PLC s port setting 9600 19200 38400 Must match the PLC s port setting Paty bit Sve Oda None Moa PLC port Data Bits n Must match the PLC s port setting Must match the PLC s port setting Does not apply to this protocol HMI Station No PLC Station No PLC Setting l 0 31 Must match the PLC s port setting Device address l Device OP am osse ORe asa O oss Keep Relay 0O COM aw oss Anny Raa Cu sao oss O Ry o av ov Typ K M L F rv aa 0255 TimerPresent Vae w w aa oss CoumerPresent Value w p ua o9 Data Register D 502 d Decimal h Hexadecimal Wiring diagram MT8000 RS232 CPU port Cnet I F 9P D SUB RS232 3 TX 4 1x 7 TX If connect with Cnet module please refer Cnet module s document 503 LS MASTER K300S CPU LS MASTER K series K80S K120S K200S K300S K1000S http www lgis com HMI Setting cope mamas N Does not apply to this protocol PLC Setting Communication 38400 None 8 1 mode Devic
133. P IP port 2004 PLC Setting Communication mode Fenet Potocol Device address Bit Word Device Type Range Memo ddd h 0 127F I O device 2 048 points ddd h 0 255F Internal device 4 096 points dddd h 0 1279F Communication device_20 480 points dddd h 0 2559F Preservation device 4 096 points ddd h 0 255F Special device 4 096 point ddd 0 255 Timer device_256 point 0 255 Counter device 256 point 0 127 99 Relay for step control _Bit dddd h 0 5120F Data register Bit expression D0000 0 0 5119 Data register 5120 words 0 7 0 31 Analog data register _256 words 0 3935 Communication data register 3 936 words ddd 0 127 Index register_128 words ddd 0 255 Timer current value register 256 words C ddd 0 255 Counter current value register 2506 words O I a O O a B Ieg 7 a O be o Q O a B o 508 Wiring diagram Ethernet MT8000 Ethernet Wire color Ethernet Hub or Switch RJ45 RJ45 RX ex wione s e Cs Bos wieme G a j o T eon wmon _ 8 A Os Ln oy bo Six GO Brown Ethernet Direct connect crossover cable MT8000 Wire color TCP Device Ethernet RJ45 RJ45 White Orange 3 RX White Green 4 RD 5 BD4 White Blue 7 BD3 White Brown 8 Brown 509 LIYAN EX series LIYAN PLC Ex Ex1s Ex1n Ex2n series http www liyanplc com HMI Setting PLCtype Mitsubishi FXOn FX2 O a as DataBits 7 sop B
134. Parameter 1 to 0 b Set Command to 1 the system will open the video file and start playing c After the system start operation it will reset the Command to 0 284 During the period between step b and c don t change the content of Command Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 1t may cause unpredictable result 2 Stop playing video a Set Command to 5 the system will stop playing and close the video file b After the system complete a it will reset the Command to 0 During the period between step a and b don t change the content of Command Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 1t may cause unpredictable result 285 13 25 4 Media player setting guide General Hew Media Player Object General Preview Description Control address Enable PLE name Local HMI Device type anen 0 Darn ne Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Index register Status lp oer brs Update video playing time Ext device en USR O USB2 Folder name Athibute Auto repeat Backeround Enable control O Enable address a You can use Control address to control the operation of media player Control b Register a device address for Control address address O Disable There is no manual control of video play operation The system will start to play the first video at designated folder 286 lc when the window
135. Pork COM Sa Processors gt SCSI and RAID controllers 8 sound video and game controllers E E E It can be found that the virtual COM port be changed to COM 9 on Project Manager Virtual COM Port PE lt gt PLE COM F 1 2 How to Use Ethernet Mode After installing virtual serial port driver users should follow four steps to use ethernet mode of pass through Step 1 Set HMI IP connecting PLC For example HMI IP is 192 168 1 206 Step 2 Assign HMI s serial port properties and this port is used to connect PLC For example COM2 RS232 1s used to connect PLC Step 3 Click Apply and these settings will be update 664 PC Application 4 E Weintek Virtual Serial Port COM PLC Y l D B PLE Connection Port HM lt gt PLE HMIIP 192 168 1 206 R8232 Y Step 4 On the PC application the serial port s number must be same as virtual serial port For example using a Mitsubishi application if the virtual serial port is COM 7 please open PC side I F Serial setting COM port to select COM 7 as follows 665 Transfer Setup Y REZA include FX USB AW FEX30 5B ED USE GOT tonspareni mode USB Briltin pon NETMOM HETG CC Limk Ethernet After completing all settings when users execute PC s PLC application the HMI will be switched automatically to pass through mode the communication between HMI and PLC will be suspended
136. Profile Size When a bit lamp is created double click the object Go to the Bit Lamp Object s properties Profile tab to adjust the position and size of the object Bit Lamp Objects Properties General Shape Label Profile S Postion TP O 7 mize wan Height a Position Pin the position and size of the object When checked the position and size of the object will not be able to be changed X and Y mean the X and Y coordinate of the top left hand corner of the object b Size Adjust the width and height of the object 109 9 4 Station Number s Variable EB8000 V1 31 or above provides variable settings in PLC station number As below picture the var2 is one of 16 station number variables Read address PLC name MITSUBISHI FXON EXZ Device type TY v Address Cai gt 1253 The syntax of Station number s variable varN address The range of N is the integer from 0 15 address is PLC s address Examples var5 234 var5 is station number 234 is PLC s address varl15 456 varl5 is station number 456 is PLC s address 16 station numbers are availble varO varl5 The station variables read values LW10000 LW10015 The list below is variable and its corresponding system reserved address LW var0 LW 10000 var LW10001 var2 LW10002 var3 LW10003 var4 LW10004 var LW10005 var6 LW 10006 var LW 10007 vars LW10008 var9 LW 10009 var lU LW10010 Yarl LW10011
137. R LM MODEBUS Server MODBUS Server 2 AS23Z RS485 bd ASLIL RSAB5 Fi oa z S ui om DOUOS 1 N Refer to the above illustration 1t shows MT8000 is set as MODBUS Server The HMI PC or other devices can use MODBUS protocol to read or write the data from MT8000 via Ethernet or RS232 485 interface Please follow the steps as below 19 1 1 Creating a MODBUS Server First of all creating a new device MODBUS Server in the Device table of System Parameter Settings the PLC I F can be set to anyone of RS232 RS485 2W RS485 4W Ethernet 413 System Parameter Settings Device list fazi hid aria ka TRS id A A Re Device Properties Name MODBUS Server HHI PLC Location Local e MODBUS Server Y 1 00 MODBUS_SERVER so Interval of block pack words 5 Ee Max read commmand ze words 120 Max write command size words 120 If PLC I F is set as RS232 or RS485 please fill in COM Port Settings also FLC type MODBUS Server a 1 00 MODBUS SER YER so PLC LF ps3 w Station no COM COM 9600 E 8 1 If PLC I F is set as Ethernet the IP is the same as HMI PLC type W 100 MODBUS_SERVER so 000 PLC LF Station no IP LocalPor S000 HMI Porth PeTHnes For MODBUS Server and HMI use the same port no please change the MODBUS Server port no on Model tab of System Parameter Settings 414 System Parameter Settings
138. RD 500 me 858 54 REI 66 NON AME 99 Enable test HIT 500 me ON LW T7T Disable Disable t4 WORD 500 me lt gt 0700 08 EW h 9000 DB11 3333 Disable testl0 WORD 500 ms 6778 79 LW 9999 DESOBi 777777 OO MH ln gt ls bb Cc LO History files Save to HMI memory Save to CF card Save to USB 1 Save to USB 2 Caution 1 When user defined tag is set as true in the Excel if device type can not match with the user defined tag system will set false value in user defined tag 2 Before importing library label library and sound library please make sure library names exist in the system otherwise those library will not be imported B Export to Excel Click Export excel button to export data in an excel file 83 Alarm Event Log Category All 10 a Ho Category Text Mode Scan time Condition Read address Notification address Buzzer test WORD 500 me z gt 1222 EMO 22 133 Enable test2 BIT 500 me ON LB 9009 initialized as OM 122 Disable Enable test WORD 500 me lt gt 337 89 EWI 2222 RBI5555 Disable BIT 500 me ON RW Bit33333 66666 Disable fest WORD 500 me c 4444 67 EM2 444444 MW TT Enable testi HIT 500 me ON RW A Bit 555555 8 Enable WORD 500 me 858 54 REI 66 NON AME 99 Enable test HIT 500 me ON LW T7T Disable Disable t4 WORD 500 me lt gt 0700 00 EW h 9000 DB11 3333 Disable testl0 WORD 500 ms 6778 79 LW 9999 DESOBi 777777 OO MH ln gt ls bb Cc LO History fil
139. RS 485 4w CPU RS422 Port san 9P D SUB 8P MiniDin Female e233 y NE SPin miniDin Female 522 MITSUBISHI FX232 485BD Mitsubishi FXOn FX2 FX2n COM For Communication Module BD FX2N 485 BD FX2N 232 BD FX1N 485 BD and FX1N 232 BD http www mitsubishi automation com HMI Setting PLC type MITSUBISHI Even Odd None must same as the PLC setting CCT A A CNT Online Simulator TEPE Commo O OO H PLC Setting Must set PLC station when use the BD Module Register D8120 setting set b9 and b8 of BFM 0 as 0 FX parameter Memory capacity PLC name 1 0 assignment PLC system 1 PLC system 2 FX parameter Memory capacity PLC name 1 O assignment PLC system 1 PLC system 2 Operate If the box is not checked the parameters will be cleared Y communication When GX Developer transfer the program to the communication board Operate If the box is not checked the parameters will be cleared setting parameters and D8120 values in the PLC must be cleard upon program transfer ication When GX Developer transfer the program to the communication board on aremeters and 6120 values in the PLC must be cleerd upon program transfer Protocol Dedicated protocol gs Data length HAN type 7bit v Regular RS 232C L Parity Control mode Even y Invalid Protocol Dedicated protocol jE Data length HAN type Thi v RS 485 v Parity Control mode Even Y Invalid Stop bit Stop bit Lbit Y Sum check 1bit
140. Remote IP 192 169 1 2 Port 8000 M TS Ethernet TC II Remote IP 192 168 1 1 For 8000 MTe o0c Device Properties Mame HMI O PLE Location Settings IP 192 168 1 1 Port 8000 Interval of block pack words Step 3 Select correct PLC for PLC name In the General tab on the Set Bit Object s Attributes menu if you intend to control the LB of HMI A you have to select HMI A for PLC name See the picture below 427 Set Bit Objects Properties General security Shape bennn PLC name Remote HMI A Ke Write address Address 8ystemtag 7 User defined tag Index register Write after button is released An b uie aaa SON o Execute macro Cancel Step 4 Making use of HMI s MTP projects on PC and performing the simulator function either online mode or offline mode and then all HMI s data can be controlled by PC It is also available for HMI to control PC s data Just considering the PC another HMI to add it as a new HMI device to the MTP projects of HMI A or HMI B and set the IP address pointing to the PC 428 21 3 Operate the PLC Connected with other HMIs Ethernet Z Mid Desktop 5 WH OR S PLC Device MODOS LIN HMI A Through the Ethernet network PC and HMI can also operate PLC that is connected to other HMI for example suppose that there is a Mitsubishi PLC connecte
141. SCIT To set the characters that are input in the numeric input object and the ASCII input object Digital characters such as 0 1 2 or ASCII characters like a b c etc are available for selection Execute Macro Macro macro 1 OD 1 v 157 Macro commands are executed with this selection Macro commands have to be built before users choose this function Please refer to related chapter on how to edit Macros Screen hard copy Hardcopy current display screen to the printer attached with MT8000 Before using this function please choose printer model in System Parameter Model printer If printer does not support color user can select grayscale to have a better printout effect Black and white 1s for improving text printing quality LS Screen hard copy Printer we Notification Enable Notification Enable When the function is selected the MT8000 will set the state of the designated bit device to ON or OFF after the action is completed 13 5 3 Non ASCII character input Below we illustrate the method to input non ascu character such as Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Japanese Greece and so on Stepl Setting non ascu fonts Go to System parameter Font and add non ascii fonts in the Fonts for non asci strings list For example use AR MinchoL JIS for Japanese AR MingtiM GB for simplified Chinese AR MingtiM KSC for Korean Arial for Greek please
142. Setting 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Data Bits Must same as the PLC setting Stop Bits l Must same as the PLC setting HMI Station No 0 Does not apply to this protocol PLC Station No MO In accordance with PLC setting Online Simulator A Coso IS E E PLC Setting a Device address as 09059 Timer aaa ow ater Reiter aaa ow tem Haas 09959 Spit Reiner 601 MC ddd 0 9999 Input Register E 0 9999 Output Register w a 098 Auxiliary Register Wiring diagram RS232 MT8000 RS232 Toshiba T1 PRG port 9P D SUB 8P mini D 3 X AX P RH ax RX AO E 0 TID 3 GND MT8000 RS232 Toshiba T2 PRG port 9P D SUB 9P D SUB Female ox ema re o pex ks boa wo RS485 MT8000 COMI Toshiba T2 LINK port RS485 15P D SUB Female 9P D SUB 7 SG 602 TOSHIBA TC mini series TOSHIBA MACHINE CO JAPAN Web Site http www toshiba machine co jp HMI Setting coge aran Tan OOOO a CN A ee PC CET A TA CT A NA Device address CEA TT A mo ow TT C e m mo omo ommon a CI CN CI AS 0 fff 603 Wiring diagram RS232 MT8000 HMI TC mini series RS232 9P D SUB 9P D SUB COM1 COM2 COM3 ee ee e TE E C gt 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND 7 RTS 9 CTS 604 TOSHIBA VF S11 Toshiba Invertor Protocol ASCI code HMI Setting ae compan Tena seres trae fom an Ta Tnne T HHT pa HH HTH maea T Eric
143. System Parameters PL name Allen Brandley Dp K A ii Local HMI A llen Brandley DE 9 1 1 Setting the Reading and Writing Address Read address Device type LS oO O M Address 0 J Susie tag k Index INDEXO Index resister 16 bit Unsigned 2 The above picture shows that the following items are contained in reading and writing address settings 97 Device type In selection of device types when the connection PLC device is different there will be different device types for selection Read address PLC name Allen Brandley DF N Device type Address Address Setting the reading and writing address System tag Address tag includes system tag and user defined tag System tag including bit address system tag and word address system tag 1s to reserve the addresses of particular purposes for the system When selecting system tag in addition to that Device type will show the content of system tag Address will indicate the selected system tag Refer to the picture below Write address B9019 System te Index register Write when release this button The following pictures show partial contents of bit address system tag and word address system tag respectively and for further information please refer to the illustrations in the label library section Index register Refer to the illustrations in index register section
144. TU Device 8 end macro command INPORT read _datal start device name read count return value Description Reads data from a COM port or the ethernet These data is stored to read data start read data start read count 1 382 Example device name is the name of a device defined in the device table and the device must be a Free Protocol type device read_count is the required amount of reading and can be a constant or a variable If the function is used successfully to get sufficient data return value is 1 otherwise is U Below 1s an example of executing an action of reading holding registers of a MODBUS device Read Holding Registers macro command maint char command 32 response 32 short address checksum short read no return value read_data 2 FILL command 0 0 32 command initialization FILL response 0 0 32 command 0 0x1 station no command 1 0x3 function code Read Holding Registers address 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 read no 2 read 2 words 4x 1 and 4x 2 HIBYTE read_no command 4 LOBYTE read_no command 5 CRC command 0 checksum 6 LOBYTE checksum commandi ol HIBYTE checksum command 7 send out a Read Holding Registers command OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 read responses for a Read Holding Registers command INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9 return _ value
145. Table of Contents Chapter 1 EasyBuilder 8000 Installation and Startup Guide sese eee eee 11 I Easy Builder S000 Tnstallatio Meno a E 11 1 2 Steps to Install EasyBuilder 8000 vrs did 11 Chapter 2 Project Manager OperanOns noni 16 5 HMLIP Pass T TTT 17 P S Pe ee me a eee a IE oe CE eee ee 18 2 2 1 Step by Step to Download Project Via USB or CF Card sss sese 19 DS A O A stots 20 AAA A A 20 S H O le 21 a O a e 22 2 4 1 On line Simulation Off line Simulation sese eee eee eee 22 A A tases it ane Meas 23 2 LEMEE MOU orree a ecm A 23 202 COM PO MOG cti E ee Pattie nee 24 Chapter 3 Create a EasyBuilder 8000 Project cccccccccncnoconononnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 25 Sl Create ANEW PEO dl dle li a 25 32 ayerand Compile the Project od 28 3 3 Simulate the Project Either On line or Off line sese esse eee eee 29 AAA o tin aetna E 29 E AAA A O A ae 30 A DownloaGgihe Pro sets 30 Chapters Hardwate Ser OS dc 32 ALO ROA SOI ica 32 a USB o a da ak dela 32 D FE EO Rn anagrams A on ESE cee ne 32 compac las ad tail aereiticia 32 S Te CT 6 0 TO 32 Ns TTT 33 cN Sytem ROS TT 33 A Kae Wo ae Re ee eon ee A eRne et tomer or re 35 4 3 HMI D wnload Settings iii ii ini oia 45 Chapter 5 System Para Meter a di at dual dl e dl saat 49 mal AN ons A ee er 50 ll OW TO Controla Local PTAC uta ier eivinlnietreadee tai 50 ILL OW 10 Controla Remo PG acters E E ial atuseesaeeae nes 53 5 1 3 How to Control a Remote
146. There are ON and OFF selection to set the state Enable This 1s to select whether or not to use the function Before writing To set the state of the designated register before write to the word device 169 After writing To set the state of the designated register after write to the word device Hew Slider Object General Outline Security Shape A ttribute Direction Resolution LowsHigh limit Constant O Address Low limit pa High limit Coarse increment Moving piece Attribute Direction The bar on the slide direction 1 e left right up and down 170 Resolution The slider will move in every N lines step where N 1s the resolution For example if N 10 every 10th line will be displayed if N 5 every 5th line will be displayed if N 1 every line will be displayed Low limit amp High limit a Constant The low limit and high limit of the word device is set as constant value 1 e Input low and Input high b Address The low high limit of the word device is controlled by an designated address LowsHigh lmit O Constant Address PLC name Local HMI Device type LW Address 10 Cl System tag Index register 16 bit Unsigne Control address High Limit 16 bit format Address 0 Address 1 32 bit format Address 0 Address 2 Coarse increment If this option 1s selected the word value
147. a The 11 word devices are automatically allotted Normally the format of the above word devices is 16 unsigned integer If a 32 bit word device 1s chosen only 0 15 bits are effective and users should zero the 16 31 bits 315 a Control Time setting address 0 The layout of the Control word 1s shown below Users set the time acquisition request bit ON 03 1 to make the system reads the Action mode Start time and End time and uses them as the new scheduled time 15 0 Bit Reserved 0 fixed Da Bit 00 time acquisition request bit 0 no action 1 perform time read NOTE The system would not read start and end time data unless the time acquisition request bit 1s set ON b Status Time setting address 1 The layout of the Status word 1s shown below When the system competes the read operation 1t will turn the time acquisition complete bit ON 01 Also if the read time data is incorrect the error notification bit will be turned ON 031 15 02 01 00 Bit Reserved 0 fixed ojo Bit 00 time acquisition complete bit 0 null 1 read operation complete Bit 01 error notification bit 0 no error 1 start or end time format is incorrect NOTE After system reads the time data and turns the time acquisition complete bit ON be sure to turn Control time acquisition request bit OFF Once this bit 1s turned OFF the system will set both the Status time acquisition complete bit and error
148. al Security Font Extend Memory and Printer Server which are introduced respectively in this chapter 49 5 1 Device Device parameters determine all of the characteristics of each device controlled by a HMI The device can be a PLC remote HMI or PC When opening a new mtp file a default device Local HMI is shown in the table That is to say the device table must have a Local HMI at least and it is used to identify current HMI The procedure to create a new device 5 1 1 How to Control a Local PLC p ac P ma So called local PLC means a PLC which is connected to a local HMI directly To control a local PLC users need to add this type of device first Click New and the Device Properties dialog appears Correctly filling in all of the properties is required Here is an example of MITSUBISHI FX0n FX2 local PLC 50 Device Properties MITSUBISHI FEOwFE2 O HMI O PLC Location PLC type MITSUBISHI FXON FE2 3 1 00 MITSOBL A1_FX0M so FLC TF R 495 41 PLL default station no COM COMI 0600 E 7 1 Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words Max read comumand size words M x write command size words PLC I F Four PLC interfaces are available RS 232 RS 485 2W RS 485 4W and Ethernet If the interface is RS 232 RS 485 2W or RS 485 4W click Settings and then Com Port Settings dialog appea
149. al of block pack words Max read conunand size words 32 Max write command sige words 32 Device MISUBISHI FX0n FX2 is added to the Device Table after click OK System Parameter Settings Device list Mame Location Device type Interface IF F Local HMI Local MTo121T 600x500 Disable N A Local PLC 1 MITSUBISHI FX FX2 Local MITSUBISHI FAOwEAS COM1150600 E 7 1 Now if users would like to add a new object such as Toggle Switch click the icon on the tool bar 26 F E Sr i E L E ELE g ACFE A new Toggle Switch Object dialog will display as the illustration Correctly set the parameters of the object click OK and place the object to the desired position of the screen New Toggle Switch Object General Security Description Read address PLC name Device type ddes Write address FLC name Device type Address AT bule switch style shape Label MITSUBISHI FHOnWFE Mw Index register Invert signal MITSUBISHI FX FX e Index register Write when button is released eet FF M A project with an object is completed N N EasyBuilder 8000 MTEZ 10 WINDOW O10 EB Fle Edit Wew Option Dew Objects Libbey Tools Window Help MEA Se MAI E FILL o 089 E AE AO pp a a o E gt a D Windows x 4 oo 3 Fast Selection l e Common Window n 5 PLC Response 6 HMI Connection
150. all the event log message when bit is set ON Set ON to acknowledge all unacknowledged LB 9042 W W W events Status ON indicates there are N A N A LB 9043 R unacknowledged events LW 9060 Number of existing event logs The file sizes of all event logs 32 bit LW 9061 R R R Unsigned 434 22 6 Data Logging Remote Address Description HMI Control Set ON to delete the oldest data sampling LB 9025 log The function can only work for data sampling logs on the MT8000 Set ON to delete all the data sampling log LB 9026 The function can only work for data sampling logs on the MT8000 LB 9027 ie all the data sampling log when bit is set ON The number of data sampling logs on the MT8000 The file sizes of all data sampling logs on the MT8000 32 bit Unsigned LW 9063 LW 9064 22 7 Password and Operation Level Address Description LB 9050 Set ON to logout LB 9060 ON when a password error occurs When set ON the MT8000 will copy data LB 9061 stored in LW9500 to LW9535 and use it W as valid password AAA LW 9219 R U user 1 user 2 or user 3 LW 9221 R LW 9222 Level 0 6 of currently entered password R R LW 9500 A new password for user 1 W R W R W LW 9501 LW 9502 A new password for user 2 R W R W R W LW 9503 LW 9504 A new password for user 3 LW 9504 LW 95306 A new password for user 4 R W 435 R W R W ee ee IE LW 9508 A new password for user 5 R W R W LW
151. ame that assigned with the object the system does not take use of this reference name it is for user document only Mode and Offset Word lamp object offers the following three modes of selection a Value Calculate result of word value to subtract offset and displays its corresponding display mode shape 141 Read address PLC name Local HMI ka Address 200 System tag Index register 16 bit Unsigne In the above setting 1f the value of LW200 is 5 the shape of sate 2 is displayed See m LW200 LW200 Offset 3 b LSB display Transfer the word value to binary the lowest bit other than value O designate the the picture below mode current state Please refer to the following table for illustration Decimal System Binary System Mapping State Mapping State 0000 All bits are 0 display the shape of 7 0001 The lowest bit other than 0 1s bit 0 C ee ere 2 0010 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit 1 7 a ee 3 0011 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit 0 A re 4 0100 The lowest bit other than 0 1s bit 2 pe display the shape of state 3 7 0111 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit 0 MO ha el 1000 The lowest bit other than 0 1s bit 3 O APR c Change state The states of the object have nothing to do with the word value The system display by time display different shape of states in according to time frequency mode 142 A tibute ne mo Change
152. ansi rtino Recipe Data 353 17 4 Saving Recipe Data Automatically dada 353 Chapter LS Macro IR Cie FCS id 355 SL Macro Constuction cusenelestec sans e 355 CASA odas 356 121 Constants and Re tidad 356 y ASAS ST 358 A AAA O a nae 360 REMO ii A nea ee 360 18 32 ASSP nmen tale Ment tata e 361 539 Logica Ren e errno E a E E AET E EN 361 IRR Reterative State meii e E 363 US APA CUORE LOCKS ic 365 Als TTT 366 SOL Mathematical UN CONS lt a 366 LAA AAA A cen elas tana a eae 371 S3 Data Manipulador and 374 SS 4ABUTransionmnacON ens ee ee 377 AAA AA O abe duane corecnseosedeunes 379 SG How to Create and Execute a MacOS 390 SO ONO Credite as MIC Oras tins in 390 RAIN AAA A 395 18 7 Some Notes about Using the Macro siria tania 395 8 Use the Free Protocol to Controla Device cod 396 189 Compiler Error MOSSIE nani oia 401 18 T0 Sample Macro Codema aa 408 Chapter 19 How to Set HMI as a MODBUS Servet eee 413 9 1 How to Set HMI as MODBUS Deir viata Aled ieee 413 9 Creatine a MODBUS i ds 413 19 1 2 How to Read From Write to MODBUS Server sss 415 19 2 How to Change the Station Number of a MODBUS Server in Runtime 08 417 Chapter 20 How to Connect a Barcode Device oooooonnccnnncnnnonoooncccnnnnononononoccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnos 418 20 1 How to Connect a Barcode DEVICE ida iia iaa 418 Chapter 21 Ethernet Communication and Multi HMIs Connection sss eee eee 422 2k i HMT TOHM EC OAMI AI 423 21 P
153. antity of Registers Error 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Depending on the protocol the content of a read command as follows The total bytes are 8 command 0 station number BYTE 0 command 1 function code BYTE 1 command 2 high byte of starting address BYTE 2 command 3 low byte of starting address BYTE 3 command 4 high byte of quantity of registers BYTE 4 command 5 low byte of quantity of registers BYTE 5 command 6 low byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 6 397 command 7 high byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 7 So a read request is designed as follows char command 32 short address checksum FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 command 0 0x1 station number command 1 0x3 read holding registers function code is 0x3 address 0 starting address 4x 1 1s 0 HIBY TE address commandi 211 LOBYTE address command 3 read no 2 the total words of reading is 2 words HIBYTE read_no command 4 LOBYTE read_no command 5 CRC command 0 checksum 6 calculate 16 bit CRC LOBYTE checksum commandi ol HIBYTE checksum command 7 Finally use OUPORT to send out this read request to PLC OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 send request After sending out the request use INPORT to get the response from PLC Depending on the protocol the content of the response is as follows the total byte 1s 9 command 0 station number BYTE 0 command 1
154. are able to configure 1997 windows or screens According to function and usage there are 4 types of windows in the EB8000 a Base Window b Common Window c Fast Selection Window d System Message Window 6 1 1 Base Window Base window is the frequently used type of window Except for primary screen it is also used on a Foundation base used as the background for other windows b Keyboard window c Pop up window for function key object d Pop up window for direct and indirect window e Screen saver The illustration below shows the startup screen which uses base window Weintek MT8080 Series Es System Setting 69 6 1 2 Common Window Window 4 is the default of common window Objects on this window will be displayed on all of other windows so that users always place the shared objects on the common window When system is in the operation Change common window mode of the function key can be used to change the source of the common window For example users can change the common window from window 4 to window 20 New Function Key Object General Security Shape Label Activate after button is released O Change full screen window Chenge common window Display popup window Window no 20 Window O20 N 6 1 3 Fast Selection Window Window 3 is defined as the Fast Selection Window This window can coexist with base window Generally speak
155. ata 2 20 Data 3 Data 1 10 Data 6 Clears the previous E Data 7 graph display then uses the current data to display the graph again 13 19 3 4 How to use offset mode If offset to start address is selected the Data storage start address will be calculated from control word address Offset value storage address Offset value storage address is control word address 2 246 In the following example the content of Offset value storage address is m therefore the data block is started from the address control word address m No offset settings Has offset settings Designated Control Designated address oniro address 1 No of Data n 1 2 Data n to be displayed on the graph m n 1 Data n Data n to be displayed on the graph m n 1 Data n NOTE Ifthe control register is 32 bits device only bit 0 15 will be used as control purpose bit 16 31 will be ignored as illustration below 32 bit device 31 16 15 0 ee ICC oa If you do not use offset to start address the system will continuously read Control and No of Data At the time Control is changed to non zero the system will then read the data block If you use offset to start address the system will continuously read Control No of Data and Offset It is recommended to use offset to start address for data block display with multiple channels and t
156. ate the ways of using and setting all kinds of objects For those settings generic for all the objects such as index register label shape and so on please refer to the chapter Object s General Attributes 13 1 Bit Lamp Object 13 1 1 Overview Bit Lamp object displays the ON and OFF states of a bit address If the bit state is OFF the State 0 shape will be displayed If the bit state is ON the State 1 shape will be displayed OFF State ON State 13 1 2 Configuration Click the bit lamp icon on the toolbar and the Bit Lamp Object s Properties dialogue box will appear fill in the content of dialogue box and press OK button a new bit lamp object will be created See the pictures below 137 Hew Hit Lamp Object General Shape Label Read address PLC name Local HMI v Device type Address 0 Systm pa Address format ddddd range O 11999 Index register Invert senal Blinking time 0 5 second 3 wal Mode Altemating image on state 0 ha Description A reference name that assigned with the object the system does not take use of this reference name it is for user document only Read address Select the PLC name device type address of the bit device that controls the bit lamp object Invert signal Display shape with inverse states for example the present state is OFF but it displays the shape of ON state Blinking Set blinking attr
157. ay window 35 WINDOW 33 Set constant 35 to LW100 Set constant 36 to LM I00 Set constant O fo LM I00 Use the set word object SW_1 to set the value of LW100 as 36 and the location of indirect window will display window 36 Set constant 35 to LM I00 Set constant 36 to LWI0O Set constant O to LICO No matter window 35 or 36 is displayed on the indirect window location press SW_2 to set the value of LW100 to 0 will close the popup window The other way to close the popup window from indirect window object is to configure a function key with close window Once you press the function key the popup window will be closed 190 NOTE Do not use this function to open the window when the same window has been opened by function key or direct window 191 13 12 Direct Window Object 13 12 1 Overview Direct window object is to define a popup window location position size a bit device and a predefined valid window number When the content of the bit device is set ON the window will be popup in the predefined location The popup window will be closed when the content of the bit device is reset 0 The system will only take action when the content of bit device is changed OFF gt ON ON gt OFF The difference between the Direct window and the Indirect window is that the direct window object sets the popup window in configuration When system is in operation users can use the state of
158. bel Taz Library Comment Ce gi n Sines to hie ak ates aper e mooo e OE Tetin y OK Font Under the Multi Language configuration users select fonts for different languages Comment The comment for each font Label Tag Library Conment n gi n Sie amies ak sha aper e mooo e OE Contes e Timetew Ronen Th sO Rosin OK 342 15 3 How to Create a Label Library The following illustrations show how to create a Label Library First of all open the Label Library dialogue and click NEW Correctly set the dialogue as shown below and then click OK Label name Pump Alarm No of states i Cancel Label name The name of the label Here it s named as Pump Alarm No of states The number of states possessed by the Label When the process 1s complete a new Label Pump Alarm with 2 states will be added to the Label Library See the picture below 343 Label Tag Library eave Label File Load Label File Export Ca Import CSV C Cancel Last select Pump Alarm click Settings and the Label Tag Content dialog appears for users to set up the corresponding language content Label Tag Content Label Content settings Label name Pump Alam Language Change state No E Cancer 344 15 4 Using Label Library When there are already some defined labels in Label Library users can find out those Labe
159. button and a new Event Display Object will be created See the picture below 26 7 Hew Event Display Object General Event Display Shane Font Description Mode Write address PLC name Local HMI N Device type LW aaee 0 anns Address format ddddd range 0 10255 wt Index register 16 bit Unsigned Select the event source format there are Real time and History for selection a Real time Real time Histo Write address When an event is acknowledged refer to the following illustrations for detail 268 information the data in write value will be exported to the designated register The write value is set in event log object as shown in the picture below Refer to the Event Log chapter for related information Write value for event display Waite value b History In this mode it can display event log from history record The system save the event history in daily basis the event history of each date is saved in a separate file with date tag The History control is used to select one history record file The picture below shows the History control setting which designates a word device for History control History control Address System tag Index register 16 bit Unsigned The system selects history record by an index The index 0 refer to the latest history record normally it is history reco
160. ce before update the ASCII data After writing To set the state of the bit device after update the ASCII data When user input value into Numeric input or ASCII input and then press ENT the system will automatically search next active Numeric or ASCII input object 1 Check Input order ASCII input has a Input order and Group click Enable to active this function In the Input order input the sequence number for each input object and the system will follow this order to the next object 2 Check Group User can define separate the input objects to different group The system will only search the next object in the same group sre o Group 2 Input Ordert _ AA ls Order Input Order BB Input Order2 EE Input Orders CC Input Orde B FF To stop the system searching for the next objects please click Esc button 183 If one of input object has set interlock function this object will be skip in the next input object search O Input order range from 1 to 511 O Group range from 1 to 15 Keyboard There are two ways to display keyboard one 1s to use system parameter General keyboard to include standard keyboard into the project The other is to select external keyboard and use direct window to display customized keyboard The customized keyboard is composed of function key When using the ASCII Input Object you may select the keypad style Then select the window where
161. ct suitable library 326 S MicrolmMgr_0 plb S MT 6000 Demp 320x234 0 plb S MT000_ Demo 640x480 0 plb Z T New Lib Click the button to add a new Shape Library Hew Library Unattach Lib Click the button to delete the Shape Library in Library from the current project FasyBuilder 8000 q Do wou really want to unattach this library Y Delete all States Delete all states of the selected Shape 327 Delete Cur State Delete current state of the selected Shape Rename Rename the selected Shape Old name Hewname Place Export the Shape to be placed in the current window 3 fF 8 J 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 0 21 22 23 24 5 26 2 4 Pattern Library E 0 Untitled ltem no 2 Frame Below is an example of how to create a new Shape Library and add a Shape with two states to it Step Click New Lib and input the name of the new Shape Library 328 Hew Library Library name l x A new Shape Library TEST will be added to the Shape Library Manager dialogue box At this moment there is no Shape in the library ste OOOOH Library me System Frame System Button System Lamp O dE E El States O States O States O States O Mone Pone Mone None Step 2 Add a state to the selected Shape First using the drawing tools to draw a graph in the window and select the grap
162. ct to 1747 AIC PERIPHERAL PORT MT8000 RS485 AB SLC500 DH485 a 9P D SUB RJ8 clip style ports 1 5 COMI COM3 _ RJS connector 1 RX 6 Data 2 RX 9 Data 5 GND 5 GND RS 232 MicroLogix 1000 1100 1200 1500 must set DH485 protocol MT8000 RS232 MicroLogix RS232 9P D SUB mini DIN 8pin AU Dy Ke oe COM2 BEER MA 5 qee RS 232 SLC5 03 04 05 CHO must set DH485 protocol AB CPU CHO RS 232 9P D SUB Male MT8000 RS232 9P D SUB Female RX 6 RX sr 5 ajs ono R j Caution AB DH485 supports MT8000 X series only 459 Allen Bradley EtherNet IP CompactLogix Allen Bradley ControlLogix CompactLogix FelxLogix Ethernet http www ab com HMI Setting PLC type Allen Bradley EtherNet CompactLogix PLC Setting Communication mode Device address Bx BOOL ffddd dd File no ff 3 10 99 Bit data file Element no ddd 0 999 Bit no dd 0 15 File no ff 7 10 99 Integer data file bit level N7 10 99 Nx BOOL ffddd dd Element no ddd 0 999 Bit no dd 0 15 Bx_INT fffddd File no fff 3 10 255 Bit data file word level W Element no ddd 0 255 File no fff 0 255 Integer data file N7 10 99 W Nx INT fffddd Element no ddd 0 255 F8 REAL ddd ddd 0 255 Floating pointdaa fiie a Fx REAL fffddd File no fff 0 255 Floating point data file F8 ddd 0 255 460 Tx PRE fffddd File no fff 4 10 255 Element no ddd 0 255 Tx ACC fff
163. cted from remote HMIn at this time set the state to ON the MT8000 will try to connect to remote HMIn again 22 11 The States of Communicating with PLC Remote Address Description HMI i Control When the state is ON the system will automatically resume connection 1f the PLC T device with COM 1 is disconnected When the state is OFF the disconnection to the PLC device will not be resumed When the state is ON the system will automatically resume connection 1f the PLC olas device with COM 2 is disconnected When the state is OFF the disconnection to the PLC device will not be resumed When the state is ON the system will automatically resume connection if the PLC device with COM 3 1s disconnected LB 9152 When the state is OFF the disconnection to the PLC device will not be resumed LB 9153 When the state is ON the Isra condeno clica will LB 9184 Isra condeno clica resume connection 1f the PLC 438 LB 9200 LB 9455 LB 9500 LB 9755 device with the Ethernet port is disconnected n 0 31 When the state is OFF the disconnection to the PLC device will not be resumed The registers can be used to indicate the states of communication with the PLC device on COM 1 LB9200 is to indicate the states of communication with the PLC on the station no 0 LB9201 is to indicate the states of communication with the PLC on the station no 1 and so on When the state is ON it indicates the communica
164. cts 13 10 1 Overview Both of the ASCII input object and the ASCII display object can display the value of the designated word devices in ASCII format The ASCII input object can also accept the data input from the keypad and change the value of the word devices 13 10 2 Configuration Click the ASCII Input or ASCII Display icon on the toolbar and the New ASCII Input Object or New ASCII Display Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items press OK button a new ASCII Input Object or ASCII Display Object will be created See the pictures below AS lI p ar 25515 SP A CE E ue ERGI The difference between the New ASCII Input Object and New ASCII Display Object dialogue boxes is that the latter has the settings for Notification and keypad input while the former doesn t have The picture below shows the General tab of the New ASCII Input Object 181 New ASCII Input Object General Security Shape Font Denies Use UNICODE Reverse hehlow b Read address a L A PLO name Local HMI N Device type LW M aaee 0 renne Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Index register No of vote Notification Enable O Set ON Set OFF Before writing After writing PLC name Local HMI k Device type LB K Address 0 LR tag Address format ddddd range 0 11999 Index register Input order Enable Input order Ee
165. curve the previous XY curve 1f exists would not be clear The system will reset the control address after operation complete 2 Clear XY trend curve Write 2 to control address the system will clear all the previous XY curves and reset the control address after operation complete 3 Refresh XY trend curve Write 3 to control address the system will clear the previous XY curve and plot the new XY curve and reset the control address after operation complete 253 No of data address This address store the number of XY data Each channel can have up to 1023 XY data Channel Setting the channels detail for graph display Read Address PLC name Select the PLC where the control address coming from PLC address channel O PLE name Local HMI Read address Device type aE _ Index register 16 bit Signed w Address 100 gt low limit 100 1 gt high limit 100 2 Y low lirit 100 3 Y high limit 100 4 A data 0 100 5 Y data 1 Click settings button a pop up window appears as above you can set the device type data format and address the usage of each address 1s listed on the right side low limit Address 100 Setting 100 1 N high limit X low limit and A high limit 100 2 Y low limit see Setting 100 3 v high limit T low limit and Y high limit 100 4 A data 0 xv plot point data 100 5 Y data 1 If you check Separated address for X and Y data the pop up window
166. d 6 Integer Eeypad 7 HEX Keypad 8 Floating AECI Middle ASCII Small Fast selection Define the settings of all attributes for fast selection window which is button designated as window number 3 Attribute Enable or disable fast selection window Select Enable and click Settings to set the attributes of the button including color and text Position Select the location of the fast select button If Left 1s chosen the button will show up at the corner of the left bottom if Right is chosen the button will show up at the corner of the right bottom Screen saver Back light saver If the duration of no touch operation on screen 1s equal to this value back light will be turned off The setting unit 1s minute Back light will be turned on when the screen 1s touched again 61 Option Screen saver If the duration of no touch operation on screen is equal to this value the current screen automatically switches to the assigned Saver window no The setting unit is minute If none value is selected Saver window no function 1s disabled Startup window no Designate the window no after HMI is started up Extra no of events The default number of the event in the system 1s 1000 If users would like to add more records the setting value can be modified up to 10000 Common window Above base window Ww Below base window elow base window Above base window The
167. d Relay bit 100 you just set the address as 1000 Wiring diagram RS232 CPU port MT8000 RS 232 9P D SUB KEY ENCE PLC COMI COM2 COM3 OP 26486 sx kex pr 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND NN 495 Korenix 6550 6520 http www korenix com HMI Setting PLC type Koren1x 6550 6520 o Modbus protocol HT DA AAA H Device address Pa as osas AA amO waT aans w o a aaa SS s ox f aa ass e x f a asss e se aa sss SSS Ce ae aa sss SSS e es aa isss SSS Wiring diagram Ethernet MT8000 Ethernet Wire color Ethernet Hub or RJ45 Switch RJ45 1 Txt __ White Orange 1 8 TX Orange sr wire Bom nS 4 BD4 5 BD4 White Blue 6 RX Green 7 7 BD3 White Brown Ethernet Direct connect crossover cable MTS8000 Ethernet Wire color Modbus TCP Device RJ45 RJ45 2 TX Orange 5 BD4 White Blue 6 RX Green 7 7 BD3 White Brown 497 KOYO DirectLogic KOYO DirectLogic series PLC DLOS DLO6 DL105 DL205 DL305 and DL405 series http www automationdirect com HMI Setting A PLC Setting The PLC must not have a password PLC must be set for Full Duplex operation PLC must be set for No Hardware Handshaking The PLC must be set to use the K Sequence Protocol Set the mode switch to the TERM mode When using the D4 440 CPU you must set the station number to 1 Device address 498 PB Xx oB Y B oB T B
168. d address PLO name Local HMI he Device type LW w mss yemas Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Index register Notification Enable O Set ON Set OFF Before writing After writing PLC name Local HMI Y Device type LB K Address 0 LR tag Address format ddddd range 0 11999 Index register ee order Input order 1 Group Eevbosand Use an extemal keyboard Window no 50 Keypad 1 Integer i Popup position relative to HMI screen Hint If the keyboard i an USB keyboard on indirectdirect window or on the same window please check Use an ertemal keyboard Read Select the PLC name device type address of the word device that system address display its value and write new data to it Notification When this function is selected the state of the designated bit device will be set to ON or OFF after the value of the register is changed successfully Enable Click to enable notification function Before writing To set the state of the designated bit device before update the word device After writing 174 7 To set the state of the designated bit device after update the word device Input Order When user input value into Numeric input or ASCII input and then press ENT the system will automatically search next active Numeric or ASCII input object Input Order a Check Input order Numeric input has a Input o
169. d in HMI and add them to Fonts for no asci1 strings table 65 5 6 Extended Memory Parameters in Extended Memory tab determine the file path of the extended memory system Parameter Settings ES Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server EM File name enlem OCF card OE E i E OUSE 2 EMI File name eml enm O CF card TSB 1 USB 2 bM 7 File ame ern enmi CO CF card S USB 1 OUEZ EM3 File name OCF card USE 1 OUSE 2 EM4 File name CO CF card USR 1 5 UEB 2 EMGS File name O CF card 2 USE 1 COUSE 2 EM File name erosive O CF card USB 1 USB 2 EM File name O CF card USB 1 COUSH 2 EME File name ender O CF card USE 1 COUSE 2 EM File name OCF card D USE 1 OUE Extended Memory is numbered from EM1 to EM9 Method to use in extended memory is similar to that in other devices 1 e Lw or RW address type Size of each extended memory is up to 2G word Device type 66 Data in extended memory is in the form of a file and stores in CF card USB1 or USB2 The file name of EMO EM9 are entitled as em0 emi em9 em1 Users can use RecipeEditor exe to open the file and edit the data in the extended memory External devices such as CF Card and USB memory stick are not affected by power loss Data stored in these devices 1s retained regardless of HMI power conditions If users would like to read out the data from external device when the externa
170. d to HMI B s COM 1 when PC or HMI A wants to read data of the PLC the procedure for setting PC or HMI A s MTP projects is as follows Step 1 Set the IP address of HMI B suppose the IP address of HMI B 1s set for 192 168 1 2 Step 2 Running the EB8000 and select the Device Table tab on the System Parameter Setting menu then add a PLC device defined as Mitsubishi FXOn FX2 in the example below and set the correct communication parameters 429 Device Attributes Name ARA HMI PLC PLC type MITSUBISHI FX0n_FX2 1 00 v PLC default station no Interval of block pack words Max command size bytes Step 3 In the case of using the set bit object to operate the Mitsubishi PLC connected to HMI B just need to select PLC on HMI B for PLC name on the General tab on the Set Bit Object s Attributes menu then 1t 1s able to operate the PLC connected to the remote HMI B on PC through the simulator function 430 Set Bit Objects Properties General Security Ape Desi O O FLC name FLE on HMI R Ke Write address Address 8ystemtag 7 User defined tag Index register Write after button is released An b uie aaa SON o Execute macro 431 Chapter 22 System Reserved Words Bits Some Local Words and Local Bits are reserved for system usage Users should not use there reserved words bits except for the designated purposes The range of reserv
171. data by date the latest file is record 0 In normal condition it is sampling data today the second latest file is record 1 and so on If the value of designated register in History control is n the trend display object will display data record n Here is an example to explain usage of History control In the above picture the designated register is LW200 if the sampling data available in the files are pressure 20061120 dtl pressure 20061123 dtl pressure 20061127 dtl and pressure 20061203 dtl and it is 2006 12 3 today Based on the value of LW200 the sampling data files selected by the trend display object 1s shown as follows 223 Of pressure manna No of channels This is the number of channel displayed on the trend display Each channel Value of LW200 The files of the sampling data from the historical record represents the sampling data from one word device The max channel is up to 20 channels Distance Pixel between data samples Pixel ples Distance between data samples 2 Pixel L 7 Time Distance pixels Select Pixel the Distance can be used to set the distance between two sampling points See the picture below X axis time Time range Time E axis time range C Pixel Time Distance second LS Select Time the Distance 1s used to set the X axis in unit of time elapsed See the picture below 224 20 seconds A o AA O IA Pla
172. ddd File no fff 4 10 255 acc mat Element no ddd 0 255 Cx PRE fffddd File no fff 5 10 255 Element no ddd 0 255 fffddd File no fff 5 10 255 Cx ACC Element no ddd 0 255 Wiring diagram Ethernet Timer Preset Value T4 T10 255 Timer Accumulator Value T4 T10 255 Counter Preset Value C5 C10 255 Counter Accumulator Value C5 C10 255 MT8000 Ethernet Wire color Ethernet Hub or Switch ren RJ45 RJ45 Brown 8 Ethernet Direct connect crossover cable 1 8 RJ 45 Connector MT8000 Ethernet Wire color CPU Ethernet port RJ45 RJ45 White Orange White Green RSLogix 5000 setting Create the Tag 461 RSLogix 5000 TEST 1769 L20 Program Tags MainProgram S ll rro Bair Favorites 4 H E Data Types E 1 0 Configurat ZA consumers P coer Tree T pea select Data Type 462 Allen Bradley EtherNet IP DF1 Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1100 SLC5 05 Ethernet port MicroLogix1000 1200 1500 SLC 5 03 5 04 with 1761 NET ENI HMI Setting Parameters Recommend PLC type Allen Bradley EtherNet IP DF1 Com port Ethernet PLC Setting Port Setting 10 100 Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex Device address Device Bit Word Format Range Memo Type Oe B 00 ddd dd ddd 0 254 dd 0 15 Output O B B3 ddd dd ddd 0 254 dd 0 15 Bit data file B3 File no fff 3 10 254 Bit data file B3 10 254 Bfn fffddd
173. defined in send data start send data start data count 1 data count is the amount of sent data In general send data is an array but if data count is 1 send data can be an array or an ordinary variable Below are two methods to send one word data macro command main short send data 1 2 5 6 send data 2 5 SetData send data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 SetData send data 2 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 end macro command device name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this 387 name has been defined in the device list of system parameters device type is he device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the PLC data For example if device type is LW BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method BIN can be ignored If device_type is LW BCD it means the register is LW and the encoding method is BCD address offset is the address offset in the PLC For example SetData read_ data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address 1s 5 If address offset uses the format NFAAAAA N indicates that PLC s station number is N For example SetData read data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 2 5 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If GetData uses the default station number defined in the device list 1t 19 not necessary to define station number in address offset The number
174. device will be subtracted by the value set in Dec value at the speed set in JOG speed on the condition that the result is not smaller than the value in Bottom limit Attribute set Style Press and hold decrement UUOG 1 Dec value 1 Bottom limit JOG delay 1 0 second a se JOG speed 0 5 second s se f Periodical JOG Periodically increment function A set word object can use the interval set in Break time and the value set in Inc value to automatically increase the value of the word device on the condition that the result is not larger than the value in Upper limit 151 AT bule K Ine value 9 Upper limit 10 Time interval 1 0 second s Y g Automatic JOG Periodically decrement function A set word object can use the interval set in Break time and the value set in Dec value to automatically increase the value of the word device on the condition that the result is not smaller than the value in Bottom limit A tiibute Set Style Automatic JOG down to low limit e Dec value 1 Bottom limit 0 La Sei a n D Time interval 1 0 second s w h Periodical bounce Periodically bouncing function A Set word object will add the value set in Inc value to the value of the word device at the regular intervals set in Break time until the resulting value reaches the value in the Upper limit
175. dex 0 Backup position Backup Position Select the destination where the source files will be copied to a USBI or USB2 The USB disk connected to MT8000 b MT remote printer server To select this users have to enable MT remote printer server from Menu gt Edit gt System Parameters gt Printer Server Range Start from Today or Yesterday Within Select the range of time period for example Select Yesterday in Start and select 2 day s It means to save the files yesterday and the day before yesterday Select All to save all the files available in the system Range S Today O Yesterday Attribute There are two ways to activate Backup function Mode Extemal trigger se Touch trigger Touch the object to activate backup operation 2 9 External trigger Use a bit device to activate backup operation ON OFF when bit device change from ON to OFF OFF ON when bit device change from OFF to ON ON lt OFF when bit device change state Trigger address When use external trigger assign an appropriate bit device as shown below Trigger address PLO name Local HMI Device type LB Address 0 _ System tag Index register 280 13 25 Media Player Object For the first timers using Media Player objects it s necessary to download the project to the HMI via Ethernet EasyBuilder8000 will install Media Play
176. dex register 16 bit Unsigned Mode X axis only No of states Min X Display ratio etate Limit address Limit from register Read Select the PLC name device type address of the word devices that control the address display of object s state and moving distance The table below shows the address to control object s states and moving distance in each different data format Data format address to control Address to control Address to control object state Moving Distance Moving distance on the X axis on the Y axis 6 bit BCD Address 1 Address 2 32 bit BCD Alia Aeri 197 For example if the object s read address is LW100 and the data format is 16 bit Unsigned LW100 is to control the object s state LW101 is to control the object s moving distance on the X axis and LW102 is to control the object s moving distance on the Y axis The picture below shows that the object s read address is LW100 and initial position is 100 50 Supposed you want the object moved to the position 160 180 and be displayed in the shape of State 2 the value of LW100 must be set to 2 LW101 160 100 60 LW102 180 50 130 100 50 L WIDI L W102 x Offset V Offset pree e mee ee ee oH LWIOI L W102 160 180 net position State X Offset Y Offset Attribute To select the object s movement mode and range a X axis only The object is only all
177. digits after decimal point 1 10 bit Tr pen ae Urni S Scaling amp Offset 0 0044 new value value A19 bB value 0 0024 5 0000 Above sampling data of setting can be saved and loaded next time After the scaling Original file After utilizing scaling function file S K 11120081203 dtl EasyConverter AI EasyConverter File Edit View Options Help Ele Edit View Options Help Susa o casa e Creation time Creation time Wed Dec 03 08 47 15 2008 Wed Dec 03 08 47 15 2008 Data Data Time 16 bit Unsigned Time 16 bit Unsigned 08 47 16 5 000 08 47 17 4 268 08 47 18 3 536 08 47 19 2 904 08 47 20 2 072 08 47 21 1 340 08 47 22 0 608 08 47 16 0 000 08 47 17 300 000 08 47 18 600 000 08 47 19 900 000 08 47 20 1200 000 08 47 21 1500 000 08 47 22 627 B 2 3 How to Use Multi File Conversion Step1 Clicking the File Multi File will pop up the setting dialog Step2 Click Add File to add files into List Multi File Convert file list CAEBS000 eng1 34datalog 1 23420081 127 dtl CNEBSOOO eng1 344datalogstrend 20087 1 29 dtl Enable Setting file Combine to a file C Documents and Settngs ugertest xls Step3 After adding files check the Combine to a file to export those files to a single Excel file xls 628 A B E l Creation time al Thu Nov 27 10 51 06 2006 3 Data Time 16 bit Unsign
178. ding the project Upload History Password Password for uploading the historical data Password confirmation Password mm Comfirm Pp MET d History The tab to clear the historical data in the HMI Recipe Event log and Data log 40 e Miscellaneous Use the rolling bottom on the screen to adjust the brightness of the LCD 41 f Upgrade firmware The function for users to upgrade the firmware g CF card Status When new CF card device is detected this function will be enabled h VNC server for X series and i series The function is to monitor and control the remote HMI through Ethernet 1 Enable VNC server and set the password 2 Install Java for Internet Explorer or install VNC viewer For IE enter HMI IP http 192 168 1 28 43 mhe heen a lt EEE 3 VNC viewer for Java Microsoft Internet Explorer TAT 880 3P WAV BREA BSF RRR UE O a Os soe O O LAA v EJE Luis gt FED 2 http 192 168 1 28 ail REAL E TNC Viewer Connection Details El Ea lx Encryption Mot supported About Options OK Cancel VAC Viewer Free Edition 4 1 Copyright C1 2002 2004 Rea ME Ltd see http Jw realenc corn for information on YMC For VNC viewer enter HMI IP address and the password FHC Viewer Connection Details UE isl Cerner 192 168 1 2b Encryption Not support
179. direct Window Object will be created See the pictures below a 5 ES Indirect Window 187 Hew Indirect Window Object Creneral Description Read address Bienen Local HMI ka Device tpe LW K mis O anns Address format ddddd range U 10255 Index register 16 bit Unsigned A tibute so e Read address Select the PLC name device type address of the word device that control the window popup Attribute Style To set the display style of the popup window There are two styles No title bar and With title bar a No title bar The popup window does not have title bar and 1ts position 1s fix as predefined in configuration 188 WINDOW 35 b With title bar The Popup window contains title bar and its position can be dragged at online operation WINDOW 35 13 11 3 Example to use indirect window Here is a simple example to illustrate indirect window object The pictures show how to configure an indirect window and use the word device LW100 to change the popup window Read address Device type LN o Addres wa Cl System tag Index register 16 bit Unsigned v bit Unsigned 16 bit Unsigned v Sel constant 35 ta L W100 Set constant 36 to LICO Set constant O te LU I00 L 34 435 WINDOW_035 436 WINDOW_036 189 Use the set word object SW_0 to set the value of LW100 as 35 and the location of indirect window will displ
180. down to choose the color Pattern Style Click Pattern Style button to select the style of the pattern 100 Pattern Style Duplicate these attributes to every state Duplicate all attributes of the current state to other states 9 2 2 Settings of Picture Library Picture Library Select the picture from the library How to set Shape Library Click Shape Library button the following dialog appears The currently selected shape is marked by a red frame 101 Shape Library Library button arrow 1 arrow arrow buttons System Frame S System Button AEREA Linattach Lib System Lam oe care a int j 0 Untitled 1 Untitled 2 Untitled 3 Untitled states 2 States 2 States 2 States 2 Frame Frame Frame Delete Shape Place EE a Untitled 6 Untitled 7 Untitled E E E States 3 States 3 States 3 States 3 H 90 Frame Frame Frame Frame Display inner Frame State O State 11 O Untitled States 2 Frame The above illustration gives information of one of the Shapes in the Shape Library as follows 0 Untitled The Shape s name and number in the library State no 2 The number of the Shape s states In this case it shows the Shape possesses two states Frame Indicate that the Shape is set with frame only The Shape below shows that the Shape is set with inner and frame 102 1 State no d Inner Fram
181. e If you need to modify the time format please go to Options Time Format to call up the setting dialog After setting click OK And next setting dialog pops up as follow 624 sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Unsigne Click OK File Edit View Options Help Creation time Thu Nov 27 10 51 06 2008 Data Oo Time 16 bit Unsigned 10 51 06 0 a 10 51 07 0 10 51 08 1 10 51 23 0 10 51 24 0 10 51 25 1 10 51 26 WO s1 2 7 2 10 51 28 3 Export to Microsoft Excel 625 1 Creation time Thu Nov 27 10 51 06 2006 Data 3 4 Time 16 bit Unsigned 3 l0 51 06 L 6 10 51 07 7 10 51 08 8 10 51 23 3 10 01 24 19 10 51 72 11 10 51 26 12 10 51 27 PELUSA 14 10 51 29 ir 15 s A a 60 06 Jr Je e So o jo B 2 2 How to Use Scaling Function The scaling is utilized to offset data sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point li 1 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Unsigner No lt No new value value tA xB C users can set a value on A B and C Why do we need the Scaling function For example here is a data of voltage and data format is 16 bit unsigned rang 0 4096 Users want to map those data to volt whose range 1s from 5 to 5 new value valuet 0 x0 0024 5 as follow 626 Sampling Data Information Select number of
182. e macro command main missing C6 illegal expression without matching if Missing expression in if statement C7 illegal expression no then without matching if Missing then in 1f statement C8 illegal expression no end if Missing end 1f C9 illegal end if without matching if Unfinished If statement before End If C10 illegal else The format of if statement is if logic expression then else 1f logic expression then end 1f Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C17 illegal expression no for without matching next for statement error missing for before next C18 illegal variable type not integer or char Should be integer of char variable C19 variable type error Missing assign statement 403 C20 must be keyword to or down Missing keyword to or down C21 illegal expression no next The format of for statement 1s for variable initial value to end value step next variable Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C22 wend statement contains no while While statement error missing while before Wwnd C23 illegal expression without matching wend The format of While statement is while logic expression wend Any format
183. e MT8000 RS232 9P D SUB Female COMI COM2 COM3 RR sex a m RS Logix 5000 setting You can configure a mapping table to allow the controller to accept the PLC messages 451 Timer Accumulator Value T4 T10 255 Counter Preset Value C5 C10 255 Counter Accumulator Value C5 C10 255 ddd 0 255 Floating point data file F8 Integer data file N7 10 255 2 3 5 or SLC 500 Configure Mapping for a PLC 3 PLC 5 or SLC 500 Processor 1 From the Logic menu choose Map PLC Messages 2 Inthe Mapping frame enter the File Number and Tag Name to be mapped 3 Click on OK to configure the mapping e RSLogix 5000 HMI500 1769 L32E File Edit View Search Af Communications Tools a ll Offline Ho Forces al E y B Map PLCALC Messages EXE Contoller HM1500 veiy 2 Controller Tag Controller Fan LO Forcing K Sel Foring E Fower Up Hane 3 5 Tasks Oo orh BA T i Online Edits P1 C2 2 5 SLC Mapping PLC 3 5 SLC Mapping File Number TegMame S E Lu 4 LA Delete Map FLC 2 Mapping Tag Name 452 ControlLogix CompactLogix CPU CHO setting e Controller Properties HMI500 DateTime Advanced SFC Execution File Honvolatile Memory Memory General SerialPort System Protocol User Protocol Major Faults Minor Faults P L s Error Detection rotocal L i EE PU
184. e Note Refer to the illustrations in the Setting up and using Shape Library and Picture Library section for the details about all of the settings in the Shape Library s setting dialog box Click OK and preview the design of the shape after the complication of the settings Preview 0 LU Cd Gad LAO se SC Backgrom E How to set Picture Library Click Picture Library button and picture library dialog appears The currently selected picture is marked by a red frame 103 Picture Library Library E icon O PB Red States 2 30054 bytes L E State O State 11 States 2 30054 bytes PB Green States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 S Lamp Green States 2 30054 bytes 2 PB Yellow States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100100 amp Lamp Yelow States 2 30354 bytes 3 PB Blue States E 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 F Lamp Blue States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 BMP 100x100 BMP 100x101 BMP 100x100 Import Picture Modify Picture Delete All States Delete Cur State Insert Before Insert After O PB Red States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 The above illustration gives information of one of the Picture in the Picture Library as follows O PB Red The name of the Picture The number of the Picture states 30054 The size of the Picture The format of the Picture BMP means bitmap Picture and its format can be
185. e The type of the Address there are bit type and word type available Device type The type of the device t the types available are related to PLC name and Address type Address The content of the address Click the OK when the settings are done and a new tag will be found in the customized library See the picture below Customized O System Mo Tag Mame PLE Mame Device Mode Device Type Address Read yrite U MITSUBISHI FEOn BIT x 0 Read Write l Temperature MITSUBISHI FEOn WORD TV 100 Read Write S Test Tag MITSUBISHI FEOn WORD TV 200 Read Write 349 16 2 Using Address Tag Library After creating the Address Tag Library and setting up the connection PLC devices which are related to the customized Tag in the General tab of the Object Attributes the User defined tag check box can be found as below General Shape Label PLE name MITSUBISHI FXOn K Hode CN Read address Device type CS ST There are some items in the Device type tab for selecting Device type Temperature Temperature Test Tag When the settings are completed the object information window will show the name of the Address Tag used for the object See the picture below NE 0111 9134 libit lansase mode L YS WL U Temperature MITSUBISHI FHOn TY 100 12 WINDOW 01 13 350 Chapter 17 Transferring Recipe Data Recipe Data are stored in flash mem
186. e 173 My AS A 173 13 10 ASCII Input and ASCII Display ObjectS e 181 11 ET ese bein Ale en cute bast eons 181 DS OZ CO AA ewes ian O E REO nade 181 13 11 Rs Tae Window ODE lisas cante dida 187 IER HE A Te aero mentee a a a ne mane Serer rege een enn resT 187 A A EEE 187 BAL Example touse mdirect WINGOW ini in 189 13 12 Direct W mdo w ODE a do 192 I K OC Mao 192 3 22 CONT OUT ALO 192 SUI H T THT 194 13 13 Movino Shape ODE ius dd da dla 196 SAS ROS EN ii ii 196 IS RL TTT 196 LAAM OD tarda 201 AA a E A 201 ES PA Te P E E T E E EE 201 IBAS Bat Graph ODIA AAA AAA ee 206 NS A O O onea O Sae eTo 206 13152 CONSI AO da duda odo 206 310 Meter Display ODIA oi 213 A acta stag st eric tahoe esos E amore aves no aesteaies 213 AOZ e TT Ee 213 TNA Display ODICCr od 221 FL SON SEM 221 157 2 CONSI ACOSTAR es 221 AE A O SENET OTE 230 SAS USO Data Di e a 292 TOVE eT 232 DISZ EL TTT 232 IR TT 238 1319 Data BOCK DIS Olay nido 239 IS R TTT 239 SO ZC ONT SUOMI AA 240 VS EDF MMS OPE e aaa 245 1320 XY Te A hee dua haat 251 IO E A oi 251 A A Eater ne ne re ener 251 13 21 Alarm Bar and Alarm Display Objects oocccccccccncnnnnnononononnnonncncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnos 263 a Mas A on cute obo tr epee 263 212 Cone UP AI OU fora EE di 263 15 22 Event DISPO dle da LLO 267 LAO a cornea mare ne manne Shear tege en ene rea 267 1222 OTN EUR Le 267 1323 Data lransicr lrigect based OD lira 274 EA ado iiansatoc suede E suede 274 5232
187. e 1s the device inserted to the USB interface in the first place 1s numbered 1 next is numbered 2 and the last 1s numbered 3 There s no relation to the interface position Save to USB 2 Save the sampling to USB stick 2 95 Folder name Set the file name of the data sampling Preservation limit decide the days of preservation for sampled data If the preservation time is two days as below USB1 memory stick will keep the data of yesterday and the day before yesterday For example today is July 1 the HMI will keep the data of June 30 and June 20 in the memory but the data of June 28 will be deleted Histon files Save to HWI menec Sme to CF caxd Save to USB 1 Save to USB 2 ples no ue Pie sena hra lirit Daus of preservation days 96 Chapter 9 Object General Properties The contents of object s general properties setting include Selecting the connection PLC device Setting the reading and writing address Using shape library and picture library Setting text content oe a eS Adjusting profile size 9 1 Selecting the Connection PLC Device When using some objects select the connection PLC device is required See the picture below PLC name is to assign the name of the connection PLC device The picture shows that there are two PLC devices available for selection Local HMI and Allen Brandley DF1 These listed available PLC devices are sourced from device table in
188. e EB8000 will clear all Recipe Date as 0 354 Chapter 18 Macro Reference Macros provide the additional functionality your application may need Macros are automated sequences of commands that are executed at run time Macros allow you to perform tasks such as complex scaling operations string handling and user interactions with your projects This chapter describes syntax usage and programming methods of macro commands 18 1 Macro Construction A Macro is made up of statements The statements contain constants variables and operations The statements are put in a specific order to create the desired output A Macro is constructed in the following fashion Global Variable Declaration Optional Sub Function Block Declarations Optional Local Variable Declarations End Sub macro command main Required Local Variable Declarations Statements end macro command Required Macro must have one and only one main function which 1s the execution start point of macro The format 1s macro command Function Name end macro command Variable declarations must at the beginning of a statement within a function Other statements before variable declarations will cause compiler error 355 Local variables are used within the main macro function or in a defined function block Its value remains valid only within the specific block Global variables are declared before any function blocks and is valid for all functions in the macro
189. e HMI by CF card or USB memory stick Build Download Data for CF Card USB Disk 18 Build Download Data for CF Card USB Disk Project Manager select the folder to save download data SOUE Project PLEASE INPUT XOB FILE NAME Recipe R Wi PLEASE INPUT RECIPE FILE NAME Recipe 4 RW L PLEASE INPUT RECIPE_A FILE NAME Data log PLEASE INPUT DATA LOG FILE MAME Insert CF card or USB stick to PC and press Browse to assign the file path or directo Select the folder to save L Ed name and then press Build The whole download data l content of the source files will be downloaded to USB stick or CF card Project Press Browse to assign the desired specific Recipe RW files for downloading Recipe A RW_A The path of download data should be the name of directory and avoid designating only root directory For example either CM or f is illegal name 2 2 1 Step by Step to Download Project Via USB or CF Card Take downloading data to the folder named as 123 K 1123 in USB stick for example When USB stick project or recipe included is inserted to the HMI a pop up Download Upload dialog will appears after few seconds Please select Download and input Download Password 19 Check Download project files and Download historical files on Download Settings dialog and then press OK After that Pick a Directory dialog will appear Please select directory usbdisk d
190. e a checksum 3 9 Puts in the checksum into result result must be a variable data count is the amount of the accumulated elements and can be a constant or a variable Example macro command main char data 5 short checksum ADDSUM data 0 checksum 5 checksum is Oxf end macro command XORSUM source start result data count Description Uses an exclusion method to calculate the checksum from source start to source start data count 1 Puts in the checksum into result result must be a variable data count is the amount of the calculated elements of the array and can be a constant or a variable Example macro command maint char data 5 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 short checksum XORSUM data 0 checksum 5 checksum is 0x1 end macro command Syntax CRC source start result data count Calculates 16 bit CRC of the variables from sourcel start to source start count l C rou dt E l 380 Puts in the 16 bit CRC into result result must be a variable data count is the amount of the calculated elements of the array and can be a constant or a variable Example macro command main char data 5 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 short 16b1t CRC CRC data 0 16bit CRC 5 16bit CRC is Oxbb2a end macro command OUTPORT source start device name data count Description Sends out the specified data from sourcel start to source start count 1 to PLC via a COM port or the ethernet
191. e address l Device Type 504 Ow o au ow Ra Regier d Decimal h Hexadecimal Wiring diagram MT8000 RS232 CPU port RS232 9P D SUB 9P D SUB Female 2 RX 6 RX R RX 505 LS XGB XGT LS XGB XGT Series http www lgis com HMI Setting Parameters Recommend Com port RS232 RS232 RS485 Must match the PLC s port setting Baud rate 115200 9600 115200 Must match the PLC s port setting Device address Device Type Format ddd h 0 127F I O device 2 048 points Bit Word ddd h 0 255F Internal device 4 096 points dddd h 1279F Communication device 20 480 points dddd h 0 2559F Preservation device 4 096 points dad 0 255 Timer device 256 point ddd 0 255 Counter device 256 point ddd dd 0 127 99 Relay for step control it Communication data register 3 936 words aaa oss Tier vts ir r am oss Grier caret aie 256 wah 506 ddd h 0 255F Special device 4 096 point BivWord Device Type PB e OB M OB b B E amp E B E B Tt B e B s5 B pB w 2 d Decimal h Hexadecimal Wiring diagram RS 232 MT8000 RS232 9P D SUB COMI Po Gpin Female a on i o Ml to Fo 01 en 4 pa qf Ca pa OOOO O DO a m d oh 507 6pin female pinout XGB main unit RS232 6pin RS232 port LS XGB XGT TCP IP series LS XGB XGT TCP IP Series http www lgis com HMI Setting Parameters Recommend PLC type XBL EMTA TC
192. e function block must be declared first This 1s in declaration addition to passed parameters In the above example x and y are variables that the function can used Global variables are also available for use in function block return value Used to return a value to the calling statement The value can be a constant or a variable Return also ends function block execution Must be used to end a function block 18 5 Build In Function Block EasyBuilder8000 has some build in functions for retrieving and transferring data to the PLC data management and mathematical functions 18 5 1 Mathematical Functions SORT SQRT source result Description Calculate the square root of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable source must be a nonnegative value Example macro command maint float source result SQRT 15 result source 9 0 SQRT source result result is 3 0 366 end macro command SIN source result Description Calculate the sine of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command maint float source result SIN 90 result result is 1 source 30 SIN source result result is 0 5 end macro command COS source result Description Calculate the cosine of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command main
193. e name constant where define the type of array name 360 Example int B 10 where define a variable B as a one dimensional array of size 10 18 3 2 Assignment Statement Assignment statements use the assignment operator to move data from the expression on the right side pf the operator to the variable on the left side An expression 1s the combination of variables constants and operators to yield a value Variable Expression Example A 2 where a variable A is assigned to 2 18 3 3 Logical Statements Logical statements perform actions depending on the condition of a Boolean expression The syntax is as follows Single Line Format if lt Condition gt then Statements else Statements end if Example if a 2 then b 1 else b 2 end if 361 Block Format If lt Condition gt then Statements else if lt Condition n gt then Statements else Statements end if Example if a 2 then b 1 else if a b 2 else b 3 end if Syntax description Must be used to begin the statement lt Condition gt Required This is the controlling statement It is FALSE when the lt Condition gt evaluates to 0 and TRUE when it evaluates to non zero Must precede the statements to execute 1f the lt Condition gt evaluates to TRUE Statements It is optional in block format but necessary in single line format without else The statement will be executed when the lt Condition gt is TRUE
194. e to the Control address when the user touches an item Selected The system will write value to the Control address when the touch action is released 322 e This option is only available in listbox style Mapping tab Option List Object s Properties f p Mapping Label tate Value Label Setdefault T 0 14 Apr 2009 13 Apr 2009 7 7 12 Apr 2009 3 3 11 Apr 2009 4 4 10 Apr 2009 5 5 09 Apr 2009 6 S 08 Apr 2009 7 7 07 Apr 2009 a a 06 Apr 2009 g q 05 Apr 2009 10 terror Y Notification Y Enable Set ON Set OFF FLC name Local HMI Address U System tag Address format ddddd range 0 11999 Index register Mapping table This table displays all available states 1items and their labels and values To change the number of available states please refer to Option list tab gt Attributes gt No of state 323 e State The system lists all available states Each state represents an item that will be displayed in the list This field is read only Value Here user can assign value for each item basing on the following two criteria a For reading If any change of the content from Control address 1s detected the object compares the content with these values and selects the first matched item If no item 19 matched the status goes to error state and signals the notification bit register af requested For writing The system writes this value to
195. ed 10 51 06 10 51 07 10 51 08 10 51 23 10 51 44 10 10 51 25 11 Creation time Le Frit Noy 25 1 05 09 2006 13 Data 14 Time 16 bit Unsigned 15 1705 09 16 17 05 10 LY 17 05 11 18 11 7 05 12 19 17 05 13 LO 20 QA En Ri DO FP CO ja co co coco co Note If you don t check the box the files will be exported to Excel individually Pile Edt Mew Options Help ela a e C Documents and Settings user 20081127 dt Success C Documents and Settings user 20081128 dtl Success B 3 Enable Setting File A user can load an existent Setting file to apply to a data log file s Step1 Save the setting to test lgs after filling out scaling amp offset 629 sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Unsigned 1 16 bit Unsigned 1 0 0000 1 0000 new value value A x B value 2 0000 Step2 In a new data sampling click Load Setting to load test lgs 630 sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Unsigned Scaling amp Offset N A Save Seine Cerca Step3 Press Export to Microsoft Excel button to examine the data Eie Edt Mew Options Help Creation time Thu Nov 27 10 51 06 2008 Data Time 16 bit Unsigned 10 51 06 0 10 51 07 0 10 51 08 1
196. ed ABOUT Options OK Cancel FHC Authentication No Encryption H a Eg 44 FAC sweat b r en Mi Tatere Explored G O RAG Pm game al SRL 8 eee 169 4 34 LS Wiese r Fres Edin dl 1 Sopa E 0 ae Re See hi taea re Sant com in Truck IE Communication Becomes Easv Note 1 Only allow one user to log in to VNC at one time 2 HMI will reject VNC connection after one hour without operations 4 3 HMI Download Settings A project or data can be downloaded to HMI via CF card or USB stick Insert CF card or USB stick and designate the directory path All contexts under the directory will be downloaded to the HMI When HMI detects new peripheral devices the following screen appears CF card Status 7 Download UD cad _ Restart Project and exit Cancel F Restan after download Upload 45 Several functions can be selected at this time and some of them need password confirmation Please refer to the illustration below Download History Files O Clear History before Download After the password is confirmed directory names of the CF card etc will be displayed PCcard CF Card USB disk USB device Select the download path and click OK for downloading Note Users have to create download data from Build Download Data for CF USB Disk from Project Manager Generally speaking
197. ed Object 1 Local HMI LE200 gt Local HMI LE2101 Mode Bit Time interval 2 0 seconds transfer length 10 biti ee ee 10 A OCS HIVI VAZE ode or ine inte second arne foar lenrs 5 e a Een E A R Ra E Ka E AS Mig O a P E KT 3 Local AMIT LB30 s Local HMITLB60 Mode Bit Time interval 3 0 seconds i transfer length 15 bitis 294 13 27 PLC Control Object 13 27 1 Overview The PLC control object activates a specific operation when the corresponding control device 1s triggered 13 27 2 Configuration Click the PLC Control icon and the PLC Control Object summary appear as shown below 4 PLE Controll 10 PLE Control Object Change window Write data to PLC current base window General PLE control AEB Back light controltwrite back Press the New button and the PLC Control dialogue box appear Set all the attributes of PLC control and press OK button a new PLC control object will be created 295 PLC Control Description Change Window PLE name Local HMI Attribute Type of control Change window Clear data after window changed Turn on back light Trigger address Device upe Ly Index register 16 bit Unsigned Attribute amp Type of control Trigger To set the type of control Click the select button and you can drag down a list of address all available PLC control functions Attribute Type of control A Change window Write
198. ed word bits 1s listed as follows O Local Bits 9000 9999 are reserved o Local Words 9000 9909 are reserved 22 1 System Status and Control Read Remote Address Description amp Macro HMI Write Control LB 900n When the HMI starts up the initial states of et R W R W n 0 9 these bits will be set as ON When the state is ON the return function of LB 9017 PLC Control Change Base Window will R W R W R W LB 9018 Set ON to make mouse cursor invisible LW 9025 CPU loading 0 100 indicator Window number that are currently LW 9050 R R R displayed as base windows on the MT8000 LW 9100 File names of the MTP projects used by the E a R LW 9115 MT8000 LW 9116 Sizes of MTP projects unit byte A E r LW 9117 LW 9118 Sizes of MTP projects unit K byte n R A LW 9119 LW 9120 Version of complier that is used for MTP r h 6 LW 9121 projects Time year of MTP project bein LW 9122 year A g R R R complied Time month of MTP project being LW 9123 R R R complied LW 9124 Time day of MTP project being complied IPO LW 9125 R R R The IP address format is IPO IP1 IP2 432 be disable 2 awas PR awan m h was e o gw0 LW 9129 The IP address of gateway gw 0 gw 1 gw 2 gw 3 wao ed wai ea wo a 22 2 States of Data Input _ Maximum value that is allowed to input to LW 9002 the current data input object LW 9003 The data format 1s 32 bit float Minimum value that is allowed
199. el does not conform to the security level of the object the object will be hidden 10 3 Example of Security The following 1s an example to illustrate the steps of security feature Step1 First of all create a new project Go to System parameter Security add three users and set different passwords and classes System Parameter Settings Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Frinter Server Select operatable classes for each user User 1 Y Enable Pasword 111 MA OB Oc OD OE OF User 2 4 Enable Password 222 M MB Oc Or OE OF User 3 Y Enable Password 252 M Me M OD Oe OF User 1 can operate objects with class A user 2 can operate objects with class A and B and user 3 can operate objects with class A B and C Step2 Set objects in Window_ 10 as below 118 btg Current status 1wa222 LRU SBO na Class A Button sB 4 Class B Button sila Fa Class C Button NE 0 and NE 1 are numeric input objects where address are LW9219 and LW9220 password for inputting user ID and password LW9219 is for entering user ID 1 12 with the length of 1 word in the form of 16 bit Unsigned as below Numernc Display Objects Properties General Numeric Format Shape Font Profile Display Data format 16 bit Unsigned Mask Number of diguts Leftof decimal Pt 4 Rightof decimal Pt 0 E LW9220 is for entering us
200. elow shows the Numeric Format tab included in both of the numeric input object and the numeric display object which is to set the data display format Hew Homeric Input Object General Numeric Format Security shape Font Display Data format 16 bit Unsigned Mask Number of digits Left of decimal Pt 4 a Right of decimal Ft 0 Cams option Do conversion Engineering low 10 Engineering high 50 Limits 6 Direct O Damamic limits Input low o Input high Low limit E OB High init Ral Display Data format To select the data format of the word device designated by the Read address The selection list 1s shown as follows 177 16 bit BCD 32 bit BCO 16 bit Hex 42 bit Hex 32 bit Float Mask When the data is displayed will be used to replace all digitals and the color warning function will be cancelled Number of Left of decimal Pt digits The number of digits before the decimal point Right of decimal Pt The number of digits after the decimal point Scaling Do conversion option The data displayed on the screen is the result of processing the raw data from the word address designated by the Read address When the function is selected it is required to set Engineering low Engineering high and Input low and Input high in the Limitation Supposed that A represents the raw data and B represen
201. else if Optional The else if statement will be executed when the relative lt Condition n gt is TRUE Condition n gt Optional see lt Condition gt Optional The else statement will be executed when lt Condition gt and lt Condition n gt are both FALSE Must be used to end an 1f then statement 362 18 3 4 Reiterative Statements Reiterative statements control loops and repetitive tasks depending on coditiosn There are tw types of reiterative statements 18 3 4 1 for next Statements The for next construction is for stepping through a fixed number of iterations A variable 1s used as a counter to track progress and test for ending conditions Use this for fixed execution counts The syntax is as follows for Counter lt StartValue gt to lt EndValue gt step lt StepValue gt Statements next Counter for Counter lt StartValue gt down lt EndValue gt step lt StepValue gt Statements next Counter Example for a 0 to 10 step 2 b a next a Syntax description Must be used to begin the statement Counter Required This is the controlling statement The result of evaluating the variable is used as a test of comparison lt StartValue gt Required The initial value of Counter to down Required This determines if the lt step gt increments or decrements the lt Counter gt to increments lt Counter gt by lt StepValue gt down decrements lt Coun
202. em will turn off the backlight and reset the Trigger address Any touch on the screen will turn the backlight on e Back light control This operation is the same as Back light control write back except the system would not reset the Trigger address e Sound control Sound Library Beep Activate the Trigger address the system will play the sound You may configure three different way to activate the Trigger address 1 OFF to ON OFF gt 0N 2 ON to OFF ON OFF 3 State change either from ON OFF or OFF gt 0N f Execute macro program Trigger address Device type LB Address System tag _ Index register Trigger mode OFF gt ON Ay Activate the Trigger address the system will execute the Macro You may configure three different way to activate the Trigger address 299 1 OFF to ON OFF gt 0N 2 ON to OFF ON OFF 3 State change either from ON OFF or OFF gt 0N h Screen hardcopy Activate the Trigger address the system will have designated window printed out You may configure three different way to activate the Trigger address 1 OFF to ON OFF gt 0N 2 ON to OFF ON OFF 3 State change either from ON OFF or OFF gt 0N The designated window can be one of following three different types pomwmce window for pant 2 Cunent bese window O Window no fiom wgistex Designate window no Current base window Print t
203. en HMI name by LW2032 L 99039 Prefix IF Ex IF_192 168 1 25 Properties Minimize to syvetem tray Detailed message e Server gt Port number of the server socket Set the Ethernet socket number for HMIs to connect to The range goes from 1 to 65535 and 8005 is the default value e Server gt User name amp Password Set the user name and password to restrict that only the authorized HMIs can send requests to EasyPrinter e Naming Convention for HMI Folder EasyPrinter creates different folders to store files e g hardcopy bitmap files backup files from different HMIs There are two ways to name the folders a Use IP address EasyPrinter names the folder after the IP address of the HMI sending the request 1 e Prefix IP address Please see the following illustration 646 192 168 1 26 Ethemet 192 168 1 27 192 168 1 28 b Use HMI name EasyPrinter names the folder after the name of the HMI sending the request 1 e Prefix HMI name e Properties gt Minimize to system tray Select this option to minimize EasyPrinter to system tray instead of task bar Users can double click the icon 1n system tray to restore the EasyPrinter window e Properties gt Detailed message Select this option to display more detailed messages about events in the message window MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings aa General Output S l Print out to hp LaserJet 3300 PC
204. ene etiam neta ee ne es earn ean ie eae nT ene ane cre eee ene 565 OMRON C COM Seite diles 567 OMRON GVM addon icono ais 569 COMER ON CAP CS E 0 eL ad 571 OMRON ESON nit 574 A A O sae 576 PUETE ONTI eee ne een ee ere ne Tene ey mea ete se T OTR 580 SATIA PEDO PG TOS isha erst spend da o cul e tact 584 SAIA PC D S BUS mods as 586 SEW Eurodrive MOV VERA CG aia A 588 SIEMENS 5572 OO os eres ciel E cia 589 SIEMENS 57200 E Morie tana tscte ans vil ah orale ad 591 SIEMENS S 1D ida 593 SIEMENS 5S7 00 S L TTT 595 SIMAO E S Os tte 597 Telemeca ique Un RE AA A 599 TOSHIBA T Seres as 601 TOSHIBA h iii Series a a AA eae 603 TOSHIBA MES dao 605 A A A 607 VOKO0LA U o 609 Yokogawa AMS Eten nasa 615 Chapter 24M TS000 Supports Piers sar OOTA 617 Apend Ac RECIPS LAME oa 619 O 619 BZ Detin OF RECIPES EA 621 APpe dix Be Easy CONVE E a ida 623 A A deca aeed detail ok aes 623 B RIT aseo adds a 623 BZ LOW 10 EXPO TO OX CCl etilo litio R Sa 623 B 22 Howto Use Scale Func T 626 B 2 3 How to Use MultERile E a a 628 Bo Enable etnia 629 B 3 1 For Combination and Enable Setting FG 632 BA Command LISO da 634 Appendix C Easy A a Bait ads a dds vl hearts 635 CA1 Using Basy Printer as a Printer ee bs 636 C 1 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrIDteT ooooonnnnncnncnonnnccnnnncooononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 636 C 1 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBullder8S000 occccccncccnnnnccnnonnooncnncnncnnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnnnnns 637 C2 Usi
205. enu gt File gt Save As select the correct format and file name to create a recipe or EMI file Export to CSV File After opening a recipe or EMI file select Menu gt File gt Save As and choose file format as CSV Import CSV File In Menu gt File select Import CSV File and choose a CSV file to open After editing users can save it as a recipe or EMI file so that it can be downloaded to MT8000 series 622 Appendix B EasyConverter This application program 1s utilized when the history record of data sampling dtl or event log evt is uploaded to PC which can be transferred to Excel csv B 1 Introduction In Project Manager clicking the EasyConverter will pop up the application program S EasyConverter File Edit View Uptons Help eS E There are four function introductions as follows Export to Excel Scaling function Multi File Conversion Command line B 2 Setting of EasyConverter B 2 1 How to Export to Excel When open the file 1t will pop up setting dialog as follow 623 Choose Your Time Format E Display Millseconds No millisecond information L 7 Separated by a COMMA sign Separated by a DOT sign 05 Parenthesized Ex H MM 55 Don t ask me again There are four options of time format which can be selected No millisecond information HHMM SS Ex MMm 55 If checking Don t ask me again the pop up window will not appear next tim
206. er the drop down list normally displays only the selected item Once the user touches it the system will display a listbox which is similar to the one with Listbox style beneath the object Listbox Drop down list al 13 Apr 2009 12 Apr 2009 11 Apr 2009 10 Apr 2009 w 13 Apr 2009 12 Apr 2009 11 Apr 2009 10 Apr 2009 09 Apr 2009 w 13 29 2 Configuration Click the Option List icona Option List object properties dialogue box appears as follows 321 Description An bule Mode Li Backeround No of state selection v Control addres PLC name Local HMI Device type LW Address U System tag Addres format ddddd range U 10255 Index register 16 bit Unsigned E Write when button is released Option list tab Attributes Mode Select the object style one of Listbox and Drop down list No of state Set the number of states for the object Each state represents an item displayed in the list and a value to be written to the Control address Background Select background color for the object Selection Select background color for the selected highlighted item Control address Select the PLC name Device type Address of the word register device that controls the display of the object and the system writes the value of the state to the word register Write when button Unselected is released The system will write valu
207. er 8000 software package 1 dtl EasyConverter c PathName 2 evt EasyConverter c PathName There are two lines of text in the file Each line has two arguments separated by a comma and forms a criterion of how to deal with a specific type of files e g Data Sampling and Event Log history files The first argument specifies the extension name for the type of the files to be 650 processed and the second one specifies the exact command to execute in console mode Please note PathName is a key word to tell EasyPrinter to replace it with the real name of the backup file in conversion For example if a Data Sampling history file named 20090112 dtl is uploaded and stored EasyPrinter will send out the following command to a console window And then the CSV file named 20090112 csv is created Therefore the criteria of the default Convert Batch File are 1 Convert all Data Sampling history files dtl into CSV files 2 Convert all Event Log history files evt into CSV files Actually the S PathName in the second argument stands for the full path name of the file In the previous case EasyPrinter replaces it with EasyPrinter interprets the Convert Batch File on a line basis 1 e each line forms a criterion Any two arguments should be separated by a comma Every argument should be put in double quotes Do not put any comma inside an argument For further information about how to use
208. er drivers during the download 13 25 1 Overview The Media Player function is not only used to play video files but also to provide uses of additional controls such as seeking zooming volume adjusting and so on With the Media Player users can provide operation and maintenance instructions or standard procedures on video which can help to create an environment that enables any on site operators to perform tasks efficiently from clear comprehensible instructions Note The Media Player function is only available on the MT8000X Series models 13 25 2 Configuration Click Media Player object icon on the toolbar Media Player object dialogue box show up set each item in the General tab press OK button a new Media Player object will be created See the picture below Note The instruction of this section is an example to play a video file located in the example directory Media Player 281 Hew Media Player Object Description Control address Enable PLC name Local HMI Y Device type LW ho h dres 0 Leen tag Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Index register Status 0 3 Update video playing time Ext device 2 USB O UESB2 A ttobute Auto repeat Cancel General a In Control address select Enable and register a word device to control the
209. er password with the length of 2 words in the form of 32 bit Unsigned as below 119 Numeric Input Objects Properties General Numeric Format Security Shape Font Profile Display Data format Mask Number of digits Left of decimal Ft 4 ut Right of decimal Pt U ND_ 0 is numeric display object with address LW9222 classes can be operated for current user to indicate user s state The data is in the form of 16 bit Binary Display Data format 16 bit Binary M Mask SB O SB 2 are Set Bit objects which are set with different classes but selected Make invisible while protected 1 e SB 0 is class A SB 1 is class B SB 2 is class C The setting of SB_ 0 object User restriction Object class Class A w Disable protection permanently after initial activation Display waming message if access denied Make invisible while protected The Set Bit object SB_3 LB9050 user logout is for user logout as below Hew Set Bit Object General Security Shane Label Description PLC name Local HMI k Write address Device type LB 9050 v r logout K v System tag Address format ddddd range 0 11999 120 Step 3 After complete the design and settings of the objects save compile and do the off line simulation for the project The illustration as below is initial screen of off line simulation At this time
210. ernet MT8000 Ethernet Wire color Ethernet Hub or Switch RJ45 RJ45 TX White Orange RJ 45 connector ee 5 BD4 White Blue gt an Ethernet Direct connect crossover cable MT8000 Ethernet Wire color OMRON Ethernet RJ45 RJ45 White Orange 3 RX White Green 1 TX BD4 White Blue 572 gt o o 573 OMRON ESCN OMRON ESCN series Temperature controller with communication option ESEN CN GN series http oerweb omron com HMI Setting ssw ooo Baud rate 9600 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 imisa o NT Dri sii o o om PLC Setting Device address Page40 a operar w xan T w owi o Ow omino W W W W W W W COTO aan CAT mana operan m mesma opao m TT ows m o HH opas O SSC vee naa oo m o ST opao m o OOO Weme opas o O O se opas m o CT Pope m o OO eoep opens m O o ACT Bit Word Wiring diagram MT8000 RS 485 2 Wire OMRON ESCN 9P D SUB COMI COM3 1 RX 6 Data 5 GND 5 GND 5 5 Panasonic FP NAIS Matsushita FP series include FP X FP X FPO FP1 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and FP3 Ethernet support FP X with AFPX COMS http pewa panasonic com HMI Setting Baud rate 9600 9600 19200 38400 57600 Must match the PLC s port setting 115200 Parity bit Even Odd None Must match the PLC s port setting Stop Bits i a HMI Station No 0 255 Does not apply to this
211. es Save to HMI memory Save to CF card Save to USB 1 Save to USB 2 7 2 Create a New Event Log Click New Event Log dialog appears with two tabs General tab 84 Alarm Event Log General Message ul Category Priority level High Address type Word We pcan time SOO ma Delay time when power on 1 second ts wt Read address FLC name Local HMI Device type LW E IA Address System tag Index register 16 bit Unsigned Notification Enable O Set ON Set OFF PLC name Local HMI Device type LB aaee N systems Index register Condition Trigger if value 13 In tolerance lL Out tolerance 2 Category The category of an event Priority level The priority of an event According to the degrees of importance users can choose Low Middle High or Emergency When the number of event log is more than max number available in the system the default is 1000 please refer to General of System Parameters to add additional records less important events lower priority will be deleted and new events will be added in Address type The type of address Bit or Word mode Scan time The time interval an event to be examined System checks if an event is satisfied with the triggered conditions via scan time Delay time when power on The delay time an event to be examined If be set system delays certain
212. esktop Ethernet Ethernet OC OSL VY DOR SLA 0000811 bod WOO od NOO Irie Device lrLe Device 53 So called remote PLC means a PLC connected to a remote HMI To control a remote PLC users need to add this type of device Click New and the following Device Properties dialog appears Correctly fill in all of the properties are required Here take a remote PLC SIEMENS S7 200 as an example Device Properties SIEMENS eau L 7 HMI O PLC FLC type Y 1 90 SIEMENS os 20020 PLE UF RS 495 aW ba COM COM Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words Max read comumand size words M x write comumnand size words Each of parameters is introduced as follows Location Select Remote in this case and set the IP address of the remote HMI which is connected to SIEMENS S7 200 PLC Click Settings to set the IP address of the remote HMI IF Address Settings PLC Type Type of PLC Select SIEMENS S7 200 in this case 54 PLC I F The setting defines which interface the remote PLC uses COM The setting defines which COM port the remote PLC uses PLC default The setting defines which the PLC default station the remote PLC uses station no After all settings are completed a new name Remote PLC device is listed on the table Device list l Location Device type Interface Local Local HMI Local MTS121T 800 x600 Disable
213. ess 1 start address 2 and so on If you select 32 bit data format the address of each data will be start address start address 2 start address 4 and so on Limit Set the minimum and maximum limit of trend curve the trend curve 1s limited by the minimum and maximum limit Data Block Display Objects Properties General Display Area Shape Profile Data samples 5 samples to srol 10 Enable scroll switch Profile color Transparent Frame Backeround v Enab Color Horiz 5 division Verti Channel 9 Channel Pen property Color mmm gt Data Sample Set the data samples samples to scroll frame and color of background 242 Data samples ca samples to scroll Enable scroll swacth Profile color Transparent Frome mee 5 Bsctgromn JE Enable background Disable background 243 Grid Enable Grid Disable Grid Channel Set the color and width of each trend curve Channel Channel O x Pen property Color lr mia 1 y 244 13 19 3 On line operation 13 19 3 1 How to shows a trend curve a Write the number of data to No of data address 1 e word control address 1 Have the content of data block ready for display NOTE data block start from word control address 2 c Write 1 to Control word address the previous trend curve remains and the new conte
214. evice 0 123 and then press OK Project will be automatically updated Note It s necessary to reboot HMI even if historical file 1s downloaded only 2 3 Transfer 2 3 1 Download Download source files to the HMI through Ethernet or USB cable Press the Download button and the dialog displays as below Download Z Firmware lZ Project CibDocurnents and Saftingsluserfi EE Kai s Fiw PLEASE INPUT RECIFE FILE NAME RWA PLEASE INPUT RECIFE 1 FILE NAME 1 Data log PLEASE INPUT DATA LOG FILE MAME LJ Install X series media player drivers Connechon Ethemet HMIIP 192 168 1 112 USB cable i series only C Reboot HMI after download C Reset recipe Reset eventiog O Reset data log l Check Firmware to update all of the Firmware kernel programs of HMI 20 Note It is necessary when the latest S EB8000 version is first time download To assign the desired specific path for file Install X series media player drivers It is necessary when the EB8000 is AE first time download to X series Reboot HMI after download Automatically reboot HMI Check the box to erase the specific files in Reset data log 2 3 2 Upload Upload files from HMI to PC by Ethernet or USB cable and the dialog box shows as below Upload MTBO0D S000 i Series Project CibDocurnents and Settings 230b Pl Rw PLEASE INPUT RECIPE FILE NAME MipwiA PLEASE INPUT RECIPE 1 FILE NAME 1 Connection Ethemet HMIIP 192 168 1 37
215. f 8 9 254 Floating point data file V2 5 0 or 466 Allen Bradley PLC 5 Family PLCs using the DF1 Full Duplex protocol For the PLC 5 10 PLC 5 15 and PLC 5 25 the MT8000 should be connected to O the DFI port on the 1785 KE module for the PLC 5 11 PLC 5 20 PLC 5 30 and PLC 5 40 the MT8000 should be connected to O the Channel 0 Port on the PLC Wiring diagram RS 232 PLCS CPU CHO Easy View MT8000 9P D SUB AB CPU CHO RS 232 COM1 RS232 COM2 RS232 COM3 RS232 25P D SUB TX pox px p 2 Rx e RX BR pm 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND 467 Baumuller Servo http www baumuller com HMI Setting Parameters Recommend Baud rate 9600 19200 Parity bit Even Odd None Data Bits Tor 8 PLC Station No Defaults Baumuller Servo Setting RK 512 Protocol 19200 8 1 EVEN Device address B DBO bit ddd h ddd 0 255 h O f DBO bit DB29 bit Wiring diagram RS 485 4W MT8000 HMI COMI1 Baumuller servo RS 422 9P D SUB RS485 4W 9P D SUB Female Female T o ee 9_TXD 468 469 Copley Controls Digital Servo Driver amp Controllers Xenus Xenus Micro Accelnet Accelnet Micro Stepnet series http www copleycontrols com motion HMI Setting PLC type Copley Controls SCS Compare rs C Badae TA TS TEST IN Parity bit None Even Odd None aa Bs HH HH H C soss HH HH H Sr HH H H S HH H oa PLC Setting ASCH format Device address RAM INT 16 0 FFF For Re
216. f the LB of HMI B 424 Set Bit Objects Properties General Security Shane Desi O O FLC name Remote HMI B k Write address Address Cl ytmtg User defined tag Index register Write after button is released A ttobute Switch style Execute macro 21 2 PC to HMI Communication Ethemet E OC OSL By using the simulator Function of the EB8000 PC can catch HMI s data through the Ethernet network and save the data as files on computer 425 PC can master HMI by operating the system reserved register LB and LW of HMI On the contrary HMI can also directly control PC s operation for example asking PC save data from HMI or PLC The number of HMIs mastered by PC 1s unlimited Suppose that PC is going to communicate with two HMIs HMI A and HMI B gt the procedure for setting PC s MTP projects is as follows Step 1 Set the IP address of the two HMIs Refer to the related chapter for the details Suppose that the IP address of HMI A and HMI B are set for 192 168 1 1 and 192 168 1 2 respectively Step 2 Running the EB8000 and select the Device Table tab on the System Parameter Setting menu then add the IP addresses and Port numbers of HMI A and HMI B 426 System Parameter Settings General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Device let Mame Location Device type Interface IF Local HMI Local 1T81 21T 800 x 600 Disable MW HMI E
217. f the Picture isn t defined Select Lib Click the Select Lib button and the following dialog appears for users to select the file path of the Picture Library to be added By previewing the content of the library on the right hand side of the window users can select suitable library 333 background Fl EBPrjl_0 Flb button Flb flag_AFRICA button 32 flb flag_AMERIC 5 buttond_64 Flb flag ASIA HH 7 button fb flag EUROPE button _32 Flb flag_OCEANI buttonz_64 FIb iset Ip button fib map1 Flb button3_32 Flb MTSODO_Denl yi button3_64 Flb MTB000_Den button fib MTS000_Den button_type10_800 flb MTS000_Den CIP_MISPOL_20080611_1_0 flb EJmTteoo0_Den 73 computer Flb MT3000_Den Y lt MT New Lib Click the button to add a new Picture Library Hew Library Unattach Lib Click the button to delete the Picture Library in Library from the current project EasyBuilder 8000 Do vou really want to unattach this library Y 334 Delete all States Delete all states of the selected Picture Delete Cur State Delete current state of the selected Picture Rename Rename the selected Picture Insert Before Add a new state before the current state Insert After Add a new state after the current state Export Export the selected picture to the
218. for information on if 1t 1s necessary to select index register or not 98 The EB8000 supports the following listed numeric types It is necessary to select the proper numeric type especially when using address tag M bit Tnsened 16 bit BCO 32 bit BCO 16 bit Hex 32 bit Hex 16 bit Binary 32 bit Binary 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Signed 32 bit Float 9 2 Using Shape Library and Picture Library Shape Library and Picture Library are used for an object to enhance its visual effect Go to the New Bit Lamp Object Shape tab to set up Shape Library and Picture Library Hew Bit Lamp Object General hape Label Shape Shape Library Use shape 2 Inner CSCS 2 Frame IN Interior pattern i Pattern Style Duplicate these attributes to every state Picture Us pict Preview Lo State 0 OO O M O Bacheromrd MO 99 9 2 1 Settings of Shape Library Shape Library Select the shape from the library Use Shape Use the shape from shape library 1f checked Inner Select the color of an object s color Click Color dropdown to choose the color Hue 160 Bed D Sat 240 a Green o R Totales Color S olid S Demne Custom Colors gt gt Lum 120 Blue 255 Frame Select the color of the object s Frame Click Color dropdown to choose the color Interior Pattern Select the style of the interior pattern Click Color drop
219. g language HP Color LaserJet 3500 which is support HostBase Printing language Please ensure the HP printer has supported PCL5 before connect with MT8000 series Inkjet Printer HP DeskJet 920C 930C D2360 3 SP M D E F EPSON ESC protocol 9 pin printer RS232 port SIUPO http www siupo com SP M D E F series SP E1610SK paper width 45mm SP E400 4S paper width 57 5mm SP MDEF Recommended SP printer type for customers outside China 618 Appendix A Recipe Editor RecipeEditor is a Win32 application and only can run on MS Windows 2000 XP and Vista It allows users to create view and modify recipe rcp and EMI emi files Additionally it can convert recipe and EMI files to CSV format and vice versa A 1 Introduction In Menu gt File select Open and choose a recipe or EMI file you will see the following dialogue appears Set Data Format Address range unit word select your data format Form To Save Format Delete Format Data format Size Type Description Add Delete Clear All Modify gt Cancel Address range To fill the range of the address users want to examine Address range unit word Form 0 To 100 Add Add a column to the current data format template Delete Delete the selected column 619 Clear All Delete all columns Modify Modify the description and data type for the selected column Save Format Sa
220. g on individual day In Start adjust time as 8 00 00 and select Monday to Friday Setting on individual day start T San Mon Tue Wen Thu Fri Sat 7 In End select Enable termination action and adjust time as 17 00 00 End Enable teominston action 17 308 8 Select General tab set Write start value to 90 and Write end value to 30 it tt ae Wend vale 9 Click OK the settings appear in the Scheduler list Schedule settings guide Action scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Description Scheduler 1 Fower ON startiend action Action mode O Bit ON O Bit OFF Word write Acton address PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register Word write value settines Constant O Address par start vale 00 Cancel Help Select the type of operation performed at designated time 309 Bit ON At start time turn ON the specific bit At end time turn OFF the bit Example Start time 09 00 00 End time 17 00 00 Start time End time ON i i i OFF L 09 00 00 12 00 00 17 00 00 Bit OFF At start time turn OFF the specific bit At end time turn ON the bit Example Start time 09 00 00 End time 17 00 00 Start time End time ON 3 3 3 OFF hb y 09 00 00 12 00 00 17 00 00 Word write At start time the specific Write start value is written to the action address At end time Write end value 1s written to the action address Example Device addre
221. gister is INT16 or U16 ster hh Flash INT 32 RAM INT 32 0 FFF For Register is INT32 or U32 Wiring diagram Xenus Xenus Micro Accelnet MT8000 RS232 A rh 9P D SUB RS 232 RJ11 J7 cable connector COM2 COM3 470 O FFF For Register is INT16 or U16 O FFF For Register is INT32 or U32 Stepnet MT8000 RS232 ani 00 o 9P D SUB J8 cable connector COMI DRX e Rx RX Accelnet Micro MT8000 RS232 Accelnet Micro Panel RS 232 9P D SUB J5 cable connector COM3 DRX e Rx fe RX 471 DELTA DVP DELTA DVP series http www deltadriver com HMI Setting Parameters Option Com port RS232 RS485 Baud rate 9600 19200 Parity bit Even Odd None Data Bits 7 HMI Station No PLC Setting _k _ Device address ias aminas dablewrdcomer w o EE ow apan 472 Wiring diagram 1 RS232 CPU port MT8000 RS232 DELTA DVP CPU E port aoe 8p mini DIN Poe mx 7 1x 5 GND S5 GND 5 GND 3 8 GND 2 RS485 CPU port MT8000 RS232 DELTA DVP RS 485 port Pace Das 473 8 Pin Mini Din Female FATEK FB series FATEK FBs series FB MC series FB MA series need FB DTBR converter http www fatek com HMI Setting AAA AAA as a i HMI Station No PLC Station No 1 0 255 Must match the PLC s port setting PLC Setting Device address Device Type Format Range 474 Wiring diag
222. gix FlexLogix CHO DF1 http www ab com HMI Setting Parameters Recommend PLC type PLC Setting Communication mode DF1 Full Duplex protocol 19200 None 8 1 default Error Check BCC Station Address 1 s Controller Properties HMI500 Date Time Advanced SFC Execution File Nonvolatile Memory Memory General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol Major Faults Minor Faults Mode z Show Onine Values Baud Rate 19200 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits L y Control Line No Handshake r ATS Send Delay fo x20 ms RTS Off Delay fo x20 ms 450 Device address B_BOOL fffddd dd fffddd dd fffddd fffddd N BOOL Bx INT Tx PRE File no ff 3 10 255 Element no ddd 0 255 Bit no dd 0 15 File no ff 7 10 255 Element no ddd 0 255 Bit no dd 0 15 File no fff 3 10 255 Element no ddd 0 255 File no fff 4 10 255 Element no ddd 0 255 Bit data file Integer data file bit level N7 10 255 Bit data file word level Timer Preset Value T4 T10 255 Tx ACC File no fff 4 10 255 Element no ddd 0 255 fffddd fffddd fffddd Fffddd Cx PRE File no fff 5 10 255 Element no ddd 0 255 File no fff 5 10 255 Element no ddd 0 255 Cx ACC F8 REAL File no fff 0 255 Nx INT Element no ddd 0 255 Wiring diagram RS 232 ControlLogix CompactLogix CPU CHO AB CPU CHO RS 232 9P D SUB Mal
223. gnore set 0 e Stop playing and close file Command 5 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 f Start playing at designated target location Command 6 Parameter 1 target location sec Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Parameter target location should less than end time If it is over end time the system play video from last second g Forward Command 7 Parameter 1 target location sec Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 Increase playing time by Parameter 1 seconds If the system is previously playing video it continues to play after the operation If previously paused it keeps paused 2 If the playing time is over end time the system play video from last second h Backward Command 8 Parameter 1 target location The unit 1s sec Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 Decrease playing time by Parameter 1 seconds If the system is previously playing video it continues to play after the operation If previously paused it keeps paused 2 If the playing time is less than start time the system play video from the beginning 289 i Adjust volume Command 9 Parameter 1 volume 0 128 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Default volume is 128 j Set video display size Command 10 Parameter 1 display size 0 16 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 0 Fit video image to object size 2 1 16 Magnification from 25 400 Set 1 for 25 2
224. gory Text Mode Scan tre Condition Read address Notibication addle 3 10 vent 1 BIT 500ms ON LB 50 Disable History files Save to HMI memory Save to CF card Save to USB 1 Save to USB 2 90 Chapter 8 Data Sampling Data Sampling identifies the method of data sampling including sampling time and sampling location In addition EB8000 saves the sample data to the user assigned location and in the form of Storage location filename yyyymmdd dtl where storage location can be HMI CF card USB1 or USB2 filename is defined by user as a meaningful name and yyyymmdd is the built time set by the system automatically EB8000 provides following system registers for data sampling management LB 9025 delete the oldest data sampling file set ON LB 9026 delete all data sampling files set ON LB 9027 refresh data sampling statistic information set ON LW 9063 the number of data sampling files LW 9064 total size of data sampling files 8 1 Data Sampling Management Before using Trend display or History data display to review the content of data sampling the method of data sampling has to be defined Click Data Sampling from toolbar and then Data Sampling Object dialog appears as below 91 Data Sampling Object Read address Sample mode Trigger address Clear address Hold address Auto stop New Add a new data sampling definition Delete a specific data sampling Se
225. gs BC EX Configurator EN Unset file Ethernet operational settings Cex File View Help Communication data code Initial timing Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time 1 r ASCI code rc Always wait for OPEN C Communication possible al STOP time 1 IP address Send frame setting Input format DEC le Etherneti 2 0 IF address C EEESO2 3 TCP Existence contirmation setting f Use the Keep Alive f Use the Ping Cancel NUM CEL 532 7 In Ethernet open settings press End after setting the below parameters z z Procedure exist MC e Disable e No confirm 5001 The first Protocol means using GX Developer to communicate with module The max Fixed buffer communication preocedure is 4 units si EX Configurator EN Unset file Ethernet open settings Mica File Wiew Help Fined Butter Pairi E ict Host station Transmission Protocol Open syste m Fixed buffer communication ancien ee mete Port Hao target dewice IF open confirmation procedure DEC 1 address pere MELSOFT connection E GE 3 5 T Cancel 8 After setting the parameters to PLC restart for using Ethernet communication 533 A FX Configurator EN Unset file Ethernet settings 534 MITSUBISHI Q02H Mitsubishi Q02H CPU port http www mitsubishi automation com HMI Setting cope aapna IT E ann O sane TT maas S o CHH Online Simulator ole rndentcommea
226. h authority to access the Password Restriction object window 7 will pop up according to the security setting message window content Window is set for Free When HMI built in memory USB memory stick or CF card Space Insufficient message runs out of storage space the message window will pop up window automatically Users can use system tag to review the free memory space of HMI CF card and USB device LW 9072 HMI current free space K bytes LW 9074 LW 9076 LW 9078 USB 2 current free space K bytes CF current free space K bytes USB 1 current free space K bytes EB8000 also provides warning message to review the memory space insufficient LB 9035 HMI free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9036 LB 9037 CF free space insufficiency alarm when ON USB 1 free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9038 USB 2 free space insufficiency alarm when ON 72 Note 1 A screen can display max 16 pop up windows simultaneously which include System Message Window Direct window and Indirect window 2 A window only can be display once simultaneously It is illegal by using many direct indirect windows to display the same window in the base window 3 Windows 0 9 are for system use only while windows 10 1999 are for user operation 6 2 Create Delete and Set a Window The picture below shows the window information in the EB8000 The following section introduces how to
227. h to be added to the Shape Library SITES a Click the Save Objects to Shape Library button on the toolbar and the following dialogue appears 329 pave to Shape Library Shape library TEST a Description Frame O inner Width 82 Height 81 Frame undefined Inner undefined E Cancel Shape library Select the Shape Library for the graph to be added to In this example we select TEST library Description The name of the Shape Shape no The number of the Shape Library the shape would like to be added in State Select the state of the Shape which the graph wants to be Here the state is set for 0 The EB8000 provides 256 states for each Shape Frame If Frame 1s selected the graph will become a frame for the Shape Inner If Inner being selected the graph will become an inner for the Shape Width 82 Height 61 Frame undefined inner undefined 330 The picture above shows information of the Shape Neither frame nor inner is defined in the current state state 0 of the Shape After clicking the OK button the graph will be added to the Shape Library In addition it also shows that the Shape No 0 has only one state and the frame has also been defined O shane O States 1 Frame Step 3 Likewise create another state by the same process as in the Step 2 but the new graph has to be defined as state 1 save to Shape Library Shape library T
228. he base window at the time the operation 1s activated Window no from register Print the window designated by a PLC device In the following example if LWO 14 the window 14 will be printed out Gree window for pant O Cunent base window Window no fiom wgister _ Designate window no Device pe LW x Address 0 Systern taz Index gister 16 bit Unsigned a Designate window no Select a base window to be printed out ponce window Tony pant O Cunent bd Ow See tes ne S z Window no 10 WINDOW_O10 E 1 The system performs a background printing process when the printed 300 window 1s not the current base window 2 For a window designed to be printed at background users should put neither direct window nor indirect window in it 301 13 28 Schedule Object 13 28 1 Overview Schedule object is used to turn on off a bit or write a value to a word device at designated time The time schedule setting is very flexible 1t can be on daily basis or weekly basis For more advance application you can use a table a block of word devices to set start and terminate time then update the table at any scheduled time 13 28 2 Configuration Click the Schedule icon on the toolbar and the Scheduler list dialogue box will appear press the New the schedule object dialogue box shall appear as shown below id El FET 4 E Scheduler 302 Scheduler Gene
229. he same device type You can register Control No of Data and Offset in continuous address for each channel The system will read the control words of all the channels in one read command and it shall speed up the response time Please refer to the following picture The control words of channel is located from address 0 the control words of channel 2 is located from address 3 there are continuous address and the system will read all the control words in one read command 247 Address Control No of Data n Channel 1 Offset m Control No of Data n Channel 2 Offset m Channel 1 s data n Channel s data n 13 19 3 5 How to use watch Cursor Line feature Cursor line lt Enable Color EE lt PLC name Local HMI v Device type LW Ww Addres 1 You may use the Watch function to check the value of any point in trend curve When operator touches the data block object 1t will display a Cursor line the system will write the index and value of that data in cursor line to the designated address The user shall register NI objects with the designated address The operator shall be able to observe the numeric value in across with the cursor line In the following example the data block display contains two data blocks The data format of channel 1 is 16 bit BCD and that of channel 2 is 32 bit unsigned The cursor is positioned in data index 3 which is corresponding to the fo
230. he start code in reading the input data from bar code reader All the data include and before start code will be ignored All the data after start code will be saved in designated address For example if the start code is 255 Oxff and original data are Oxff 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 the data saved in designated device address are 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 Terminator Terminator means the end of data when terminator is detected it s mean the end of data stream CR LF Ox0a or OxOd means end of data STX ETX 0x02 or 0x03 means end of data 419 Other User can set the terminator manually None MT8000 will save all data to designated address of barcode device After setting completely a new barcode device will be list in the device tab System Parameter Settings Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Device let Location Device type Interface Local HMI Local M TpUSp LAM Ta Sp T Disable Barcode DC Barcode COMI M600 N 8 1 RO Local HMI The Barcode device has two device types Flag and Barcode FLAG bit FLAG 0 indicates the status of data reading When reading data is complete the FLAG 0 s states will be changed from OFF to ON BARCODE word BARCODE 0 Number of bytes of reading data BARCODE wort BARCO
231. ibute of bit lamp Blinking time Set the frequency of blinking 138 Blinking mode None No blinking Alternating image Alternatively display the shape of state 0 and state 1 when the bit value is OFF on state 0 state 0 Alternating image Alternatively display the shape of state 0 and state 1 when the bit value is ON on state 1 state 1 Blinkmg Display the shape of state 0 in blinking when the bit value is OFF state 0 on state 0 Blinking Display the shape of state 1 in blinking when the bit value is ON state 1 on state 1 139 13 2 Word Lamp Object 13 2 1 Overview A Word Lamp object displays the corresponding shape according to the value in the designated word address up to maximum of 256 states Numeric Display LWO Word Lamp LWO 7 Numeric Display LWO Word Lamp LWO SS Numeric Display LWO Word Lamp LWO 13 2 2 Configuration Click the Word lamp icon on the toolbar and the Word Lamp Object s Properties dialogue box will appear fill in each items and press OK button a new word lamp object will be created See the pictures below 140 Hew Word Lamp Object General Shape Label Description Mode Value Read address PLC name Local HMI N Device type LW w mis anns Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Index register 16 bit Unsigned A thibute Description A reference n
232. igned Pressure 1 16 bit Signed and Temperature 32 bit Float respectively and 4 word length in total In other words EB8000 retrieves the length of 4 words as a record starting from the assign address Please refer to Parts General Settings for more details Data Format 16 bit Unsiened 16 bit Signed 32 bit Float 93 Caution After executing off line simulation if users need to change data format please delete data log file in the C EB8000 datalog and then run off line simulation again PLC name Select the target PLC of data sampling Clear address If the status of the assigned address is ON obtained data will be cleared and the number of data sampling will be set to zero Caution the clear address is used for real time mode of trend display only Hold address If the status of the assigned address is ON sampling will be paused until the status of assigned address returns to OFF Please refer to Parts General Settings for other details Sampling mode EB8000 provides two methods in data sampling Time based and Trigger based If Time based mode is selected EB8000 samples the data in a fixed frequency Users have to set the sampling time interval pamplinz mode Time based C Tisrerhased samplnz tme interral 1 second s w If Trigger based mode is selected users can use a status of specific address to trigger the data sampling
233. imeout sec Ow Tum arowed delay ms Send ACK delay ms 0 Parameter 0 Parameter 2 o 416 Set and click OK a new device gt MODBUS RTU shall be listed in the Device tab System Parameter Settings Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Device list Location Device type Interface Local HMI Local HMI Local MT6056T MTs056T 3 Disable MOLBUS RTU MODBUS R TU COM 1 S600 E 9 1 VF Protoco Wie In the setting page of each object there is an MODBUS RTU in the PLC name selection list you can then select appropriate device type and address Read address PLC name Device type Address format ddddd range 1 65535 The internal memory of MT8000 is mapping to the Modbus address as below reading writing Ox 1x 1 9999 to reading writing LB 0 9998 reading writing 3x 4x 5x 1 9999 to reading writing LW 0 9998 reading writing 3x 4x 5x 10000 75533 to reading writing RW 0 65533 19 2 How to Change the Station Number of a MODBUS Server in Runtime Change the content of relative reserved registers to modify the station number of a MODBUS server HMI LW9541 The station number of a MODBUS server COM 1 LW9542 The station number of a MODBUS server COM 1 LW9543 The station number of a MODBUS server COM 1 LW 9544 The station number of a MODBUS server Ethernet 417 Chapter 20 How to Connect
234. ination action 09 00 17 00 Tuesday You cannot set the Start Time and End Time to the exact same day and time The time scheduler is for one day only so if the End Time is earlier than the Start Time the operation of End Time will be performed on the next day For example Monday Tuesday Start day Monday Start 22 00 00 End 01 00 00 22 00 00 01 00 00 Start Set the start time and day When Setting on individual day is disabled user can designate more than one day End Set the end time and day When Enable termination action is selected the end time can be specified The day settings can only be set when Setting on individual day 1s enabled 314 Time Set when Address is selected If address mode is selected the system retrieves the start end time and day from word devices Therefore users can set and change scheduled time in operation Scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Constant Time setting address PLC name Local HMI N Address 0 Susie tag Index register Control 0 0 Action mode i start time dav O 4 2 Start time minute 0 5 start time second 6 End tome day O 7 End time how 0 8 End time minute End time fsecond 1 Cancel User designates the Time setting address as the top address used to store time settings dat
235. ine Simulation Click Off line Simulation icon to execute the Off line Simulation 9 Z UG From this example we got the Off line simulation screen as below 29 3 3 2 On line Simulation Click On line Simulation icon to do the on line simulation after correct connecting the device eE dW Z L 3 4 Download the Project In the menu select Tool Download or click Download icon from tool bar to load the image file into the HMI Before downloading be sure to check the selections in the dialog correctly Re gam 4m U LanDownload 30 Download reset event log reset data log downloading project downloading CAEBSD0O 0 Oiomware com i downloading CAEBSD0O0 0 DO ron ui downloading CAEBESOOO O Mirar dic tera downloading E Documents and Settineswer mM TP oh downloading C EBS000 0 O ontMTP1 0 t4 downloading C EBS000 0 O fontHMTP1 1 tt scan font finished reboot HMI finished finished Ethernet O USB cable fi series only HMI IP 192 168 1 113 w Faseword 111111 Firmware Necessary if update firmware or execute download firat time Reset recipe Reset event log Rest data log Reboot HMI after download HMI IP Assign the IP address of HMI Firmware It s necessary if update the firmware or download the project at first time If the selection is checked the file will be erased Reset data log Reboot HMI after download If the selection is checked HMI will reboots after do
236. ing Alarm Event Log Category s ae There 1s an Excel icon on the up right corner of the Alarm Event Log dialog for users to edit an Event log An editing design procedure includes Excel Edit Import from Excel and Export to Excel 81 7 1 1 1 Excel Edit Weintek provides a standard Excel template in C EB8000 EventLogExample xls for users to edit alarm event log The template includes some dropdown lists for easily usage B E 1 OlMiddle Word Bit Caution l System tag and User defined tag can not be set as true simultaneously If both of them are set as true the system will view System tag to be true and User defined tag to be false If Device type is set as User defined tag please set the System tag to be false The format of Color is R G B where and the values of R G B are between integer 0 255 3 Click Excel icon to open the EventLogExample xls E GGG Dn rre r A Import to Event Log Click import button to import excel file 82 Alarm Event Log Category All 10 a Ho Category Text Mode Scan time Condition Read address Notification address Buzzer test WORD 500 me z gt 1222 EMO 22 133 Enable test2 BIT 500 me ON LB 9009 initialized as OM 122 Disable Enable test WORD 500 me lt gt 337 89 EWI 2222 RBI5555 Disable BIT 500 me ON RW Bit33333 66666 Disable fest WORD 500 me c 4444 67 EM2 444444 MW TT Enable testi HIT 500 me ON RW A Bit 555555 8 Enable WO
237. ing it is used by the frequently used operation buttons as the picture below 70 When using the Fast Selection Window except to create window 3 first uses need to set each function of Fast Selection The Startup on the picture above is the Fast Selection button which is used to enable disable the Fast Selection Every setting of the Fast Selection button 1s in System Parameter Settings Please refer to the dialog below System Parameter Settings General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Fast selechon button Attibute ade b Position Left h Except switching the attribute of the Fast Selection by Fast Selection button system register also provides the following addresses for uses to designate the values in the address to control Fast Selection and Fast Selection button Please refer to system register for more details 71 LB9013 FS window control Enable ON Disable OFF LB9014 FS button control Enable ON Disable OFF LB9015 FS window button control Enable ON Disable OFF 6 1 4 System Message Window Window 5 Window 6 Window 7 and Window 8 are the defaults of system message windows Window 5 is the PLC When the communication between PLC and HMI Window 6 is the message When connection of remote HMI fails the message window window for HMI will pop up automatically connection Window 7 is set for If the user who doesn t have enoug
238. ing the NITP protocol in a point to point single master single slave format http www ad siemens de simatic controller index 76 htm HMI Setting Recommend Option SIMATIC T1505 RS232 RS232 RS485 4W 19200 19200 Does not apply PLC Setting NIT protocol Device address Bit Word Device Type Forma Bit Word _ OB OB BO 597 Wiring diagram RS 232 MT8000 HMI SIMATIC TI505 9P D SUB 25Pin D SUB 2rx brr bhrk AN sono b op ds oap A on RS 232 MT8000 HMI SIMATIC T1505 9P D SUB 9Pin D SUB COMI RS232 COM2 RS232 COM3 RS232 sx a px 2 RX 6 RX 8 RX _ E im 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND RS485 4W MT8000HMI SIMATIC TI505 9Pin D SUB COM RS 485 4w 9P D SUB O AE gt lt ey E E y n 598 Telemecanique UniTel Way Modicon TSX Micro amp Nano amp Neza series PLC http www modicon com HMI Setting PLC type Telemecanique campo ess sara ICE CT mane o Must same as the PLC setting PLCStation No H Online Simulator A rndentcommna vo fT PLC Setting UniTelWay protocol set PLC as master Device address 599 Wiring diagram TSX37 XX TSX07 XX CPU MT8000 RS 485 TSX series CPU port o a E 9P D SUB SP mini din Female VE e N e ee COMI et Ly ws Vy 1 RX 5 GND 5 GND 600 TOSHIBA T series Toshiba T series S2E http www tic toshiba com HMI
239. ing the object s content For example as below set Index 3 as 0 1 e the value at the LW9203 address is 0 Under this situation the contents of LW100 Index 3 and LW101 Index 3 are the same as those of the LW100 and LW101 Object A LW 100 Index 3 LW 101 Index 3 Object B o Index 3 At this time the setting of Object A s Read address is Read address PLC name Device type LW e Address System tag Index INDEX 3 016 bih e Index register 125 The setting of Object B s Read address is Read address enamel Local HMI h Device type L W 9203 16bith address index 3 Address LW9203 ersten tag Index register The setting of Object C s Read address is Read address PLC name Device type Address _ System tag Index register Now if the user changes Index 3 value to 20 the contents of LW100 Index 3 and LW101 Index 3 will become those of LW120 and LW121 1 e the values in LW100 20 LW120 and LW101 20 LW121 Similarly the index register can also work with LB 1 word 16 bit 1 value change of index register means the change of 16 bits 126 See the example below When Index 5 is set as 0 the contents of Bit Lamp of LBO and LB6 are the same as those of Toggle Switch of LB0 Index 5 and LB6 Index 5 Object A Object C LB 0 Index 5 LBO LB 6 LB 6 Index 5 Object B o
240. is criterion targets b HMI name 4 Condition 1 e If the file type is dtl This argument specifies the folder name of the Data Sampling objects this criterion targets e Others No use No use reserved for further use C 4 4 The Order of Examining Criteria EasyPrinter examines criteria in ascending order every time a file is uploaded Once the file is qualified for a criterion it stops the examination and starts over for next file Therefore users should place the criteria with more specification upward in the Convert Batch File and place the less specific criteria downward Take the 5 criteria mentioned in the previous sections for example the correct order is 652 dtl EasyConverter s Voltage lgs PathName Voltage dtl EasyConverter c PathName Easy View dtl EasyConverter c PathName 192 168 1 26 dtl EasyConverter c PathName evt EasyConverter c PathName 653 Appendix D EasySimulator EasySimulator enables users to perform Online Offline simulation without installing EayBuilder8000 software To achieve that users have to prepare the following files in one folder D 1 Prepare Files driver 23 320x234 bmp l driver gt win32 EX 480x234 bmp 2 320x234 bmp 25 640x480 bmp 3 480x234 bmp Z 800x480 bmp 4 640x480 bmp Se EA 1024x768 bmp 5 800x480 bmp m com exe 6 800x600 bmp tp EasySimulator exe 7 1024x768 bmp E quie
241. its 1 12 TMs match the PLC s port setting HMI Station No 0 0255 Does not apply to this protocol PLC Station No 0 E PLC Setting Device address pS dd 0 255 510 Wiring diagram Ex Ex1s Ex1n Ex2n series RS232 RS232 LIYAN Ex series ATT eee CPU RS232 P ATEN 9P D SUB ot fe SP miniDin Female 1 0 0 COMI COM2 COM3 Us ey gt 3 TX 4 TX 7 TX 4 RXD 8Pin miniDin Female OIC o 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND 511 Master Master Slave Protocol MT500 series HMI Setting Parameters Recommend PLC type Master Master Slave Protocol PLC Station No 0 Parameter 1 MT500 PLC ID Use PLCAddressView exe find PLC ID Bae Far Gr la es com HET Tiere eer 5 0 k Sad ro 115200 Turn around deley ire 2 Duta Bete G Bt k Gard AC delay re 0 Paty fee Pikam e 1 10 Stop bis i pn Paramotor 2 Primate 3 0 tal PLC Setting 512 Syrtem Parameter Setting Local dian a 0 C E rn IP dimn 17 6 J b J dated mack L T 5 E gt Peb oem EP dian O o J o__ nre mead 30 9 PLC IC k F LE IAEA Batted Adbor Tepe 1 Aptos Fee Ha ts A Ere ALM T H HS EEE Ba So A mm if F E LT miin jaim ars o gee L 9 1 H T MI l E ido ater an A a ag L Device address Wea E Bit Word T8000 B MsrB RWBit ddd 0 4095 h 0 f B Ms B dddd 0 9999 513 w mrw w
242. ivate the bit b With a Set Bit or Toggle Switch object 1 On the General tab of the Set Bit or Toggle Switch dialog select the Execute Macro option 2 Select the macro to execute The macro will execute one time when the button is activated c With a Function Key object 1 On the General tab of the Set Bit or Toggle Switch dialog select the Execute Macro option 2 Select the macro to execute The macro will execute one time when the button is activated 18 7 Some Notes about Using the Macro 1 The maximum storage space of local variables in a macro is 4K bytes So the maximum array size of different variable types are as follows char a 4096 bool b 4096 short c 2048 int d 1024 float e 1024 2 A maximum of 256 macros are allowed in an EasyBuilder 8000 project 395 3 A macro may cause the HMI to lock up Possible causes are A macro contains an infinite loop with no PLC communication The size of an array exceeds the storage space in a macro 4 PLC communication time may cause the macro to execute slower than expected 18 8 Use the Free Protocol to Control a Device When EasyBuilder 8000 does not provide an essential driver to communication with a device Users also can make use of OUTPORT and INPORT to control the device The data sent with OUTPORT and INPORT must follow the device s communication protocol The following example explains how to use these two functions to control a MODBUS RTU device
243. l device is removed the content will be viewed as 0 if users would like to write in the data to external device when the external device is removed the PLC no response message will appear The HMI supports hot swapping of CF Card and USB devices There is no need to interrupt operations to change CF Card or USB devices 5 7 Printer Server Parameters in Printer Server tab are to set up a MT remote printer 67 System Parameter Settings Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Output settings Orientation Horizontal Vertical Printer size 2 Original size O Fit to printer margins e D Z pe Conunmicaton settings IP addres oO oO O U Port 8005 User name 111111 pasword 111111 Output settings Orientation Set the orientation of the words or pictures to be printed out Printer size Set the paper size to be original or to fit the printer margin Margin Set the borderline of the paper including top bottom right and left Communication IP address settings Assign the IP address of a remote printer via network Port User name Password Assign the access information Port can be set from 1 to 65535 Max length of user name or password is 12 characters lt Please refer to the appendix Easy Printer for details 68 Chapter 6 Window Operations 6 1 Window Types The basic component of a HMI screen is a Window Users
244. language in use according to the settings The EB8000 supports 8 different languages simultaneously Click the Label Library Manager button on the toolbar and the dialogue appears as below jala g Label Tag Library Language 1 Language 2 Language 3 Language 4 Language 5 Language 6 Language f Language 7 1 E EELS ae eave Label File Load Label File Export CSW Import Cav C Cer State no Indicate the current state each Label has a maximum of 256 states 340 New Create a new Label Settings Modify the content of Label Delete Delete the selected Label Copy Copy the content of the label Paste Paste the content of the label Save Label File Save the label file Load Label File Download the label file Export CSV Export the whole content of the specified Label Library with CSV format to the appointed storage space This function doesn t support Unicode Import CSV Import the existing Label Library with CSV format to the current project MTP This function doesn t support Unicode 9 The two Labels Demo and Test can be seen in the Label Library dialogue where Demo includes 8 languages English traditional Chinese simplified Chinese Japanese Korean French Thai and Russian 15 2 Settings of Label Library s Font 341 Different fonts can be selected for different languages La
245. length of the string result1 is 4 bytes 1 4 DEC2ASCI source result2 0 4 result2 0 is 5 result2 1 is 6 result2 2 is 7 result2 3 is 8 the length of the string result2 is 8 bytes 2 4 end macro command HEX2ASCII source result start len Description Transforms a hexadecimal value source into ASCII string saved to an array result len represents the length of the string and the unit of length depends on result s type 1 e if result s type is char the size 1s byte the length of the string is byte len If result s type is short the size is word the length of the string is word len and so on source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable start must be a constant Example macro command maint short source char result 4 372 source 0x5678 DEC2ASCIH source result 0 4 result 0 is 5 result 1 is 6 result 2 is 7 result 3 is 8 end macro command ASCII2DEC source start result len Description Transforms a string source into a decimal value saved to a variable result The length of the string is len The first character of the string 1s source start source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable start must be a constant macro command maint char source 4 short result source Q 5 source 1 6 source 2 7 IE source 3 8 ASCII2
246. low it describes the address that control shape s state and position in different data format 202 Position Data Format Address to control object s Address to control state object s position For example if the designated register 1s LW100 and the data format is 16 bit Unsigned then LW100 represents object s state LW101 represents position In the picture below LW100 2 LW101 3 so the object s state is 2 and position is 3 pasian F POSI E pasar d position 4 postin J State 2 LW100 2 LW101 3 posite 2 b Time interval attributes If Based upon time interval is chosen the object automatically changes status and display location Time interval attributes is to set the time interval for states and position Time interval attributes Position speed 01 second s image state change Sinha ose Tage update time 0 1 second ts Speed Position changes speed the unit is 0 1 second Supposed that Speed is set to 10 the object will change its position every 1 second 203 Backward If the object has four positions position 0 position 1 position 2 and position 3 and Backward is not selected In this case when the object moves to the last position position 3 next position will be back to the initial position 0 and repeat the action over again The moving path is shown as follows position 0 position 1 position 2 position 3
247. lready set Y Setif itis neededt He setting Alreadyset 3 l Valid module Start 1 0 No during other station access Please input the starting O Mo of the module in HEXC bib form STEP 4 Routing parameters aca image heck L End OUZ H Ethernet 192 16 10 105 Cyrwrte 6 Restart PLC software and select READ FROM PLC click QCPU Qmode and press OK Select PLC series FLO serie Cancel 7 Select Ethernet board in PC Side I F to set Network and Station no the Station no l is PC s station no not Ethernet module s range from 2 64 the Network no can not the same as PC s number PC side I F Ethernet board setting Cancel This is the layout setting layout for the Ethernet board Please execute the following setting Network No Network No of Ethernet unit set in parameter station Mo Station No that does not overlap on the same loop Protocol TCP x 8 Select Ethernet module in PLC Side I F to set QJ71E71 s IP address IP address Network Parameter s IP address 548 PLC side I F detailed setting of Ethernet module GE Fee Q TIEF aa Cancel Metwork No station Ho IP address 192 168 10 105 IP input format DEC v C Host Name o Routing parameter transfer method Automatic response system ba 9 In Other station click Other station Single network setting Check at communication time and Retry times
248. ls in Label tag by selecting Use label library in the object s Label tab Content Use label library Label tag Tracking When the Label is selected Content dialog shows the content of selected label and the settings of the font are also included in the Label Library Attribute Font Color MEM Sie 12 v Italic Underline Duplicate this properties to other states 15 5 Use of Multi Language When users would like to have the object s text with the multi language support except for using the Label Library it needs to use with the system reserved register LW9134 The value range of the LW9134 can be set from 0 to 7 Different value of LW9134 corresponds to different Languages The example below demonstrates how to use the multi language feature First of all create a Text Object and set the content of it as below 345 Content Next create a Numeric Input Object Set 1t s Read address as below you will see the Read address in use is the system reserved register LW9134 Read address PLE name Local HMI N Device type LW 9134 1obith lanevage mode M SI System tag Index register The following illustrations are the results of simulation When the value of LW9134 is changed the content of the Text Object will also be changed automatically English LW9134 language mode 0 is FH SC SIMPLE LW9134 language mode 2 e 0 KOREAN LW9
249. lue of the Upper value and then repeat the action to keep the value in an active state In the example shown below the value of the word device will change periodically in order of 10 9 8 1 0 10 9 8 Athibute Set Style A A ll Low limit High limit 10 BR Dec value Time interval 0 5 second s k Set when window open When the window containing the object is opened the value of Set value will be automatically written into the word device A ttribute ret Dye Set when window opens Set value 5 L Set when window close When the window containing the object is closed the value of Set value will be automatically written into the word device 153 Attribute eet Style Set when window closes met value m Set when backlight on When the backlight is turned from off to on the value of Set value will be automatically written into the word device A tribute Set Style Set when backlight on v met value E n Set when backlight off When the backlight is turned from on to off the value of Set value will be automatically written into the word device A tribute Set Style Set when backlight off e met value E 154 13 5 Function Key Object 13 5 1 Overview Function key object is used to change base window pop up window and close windows It can also be used to design the keypad buttons 13 5 2 Configura
250. m Parameter Settings Security Extended Printer Server Select operatable clases for each user User 1 Enable Password 1111 wla ME Uc LID JE F User 2 2 Enable Password 2222 Ja OB vc vip JE F User 3 Enable Password 3333 Pla B Jc JD WE lt ln User 4 After the password 1s entered the operable objects for the user are decided by security setting For example the security setting of user 1 is as below That s means the user 1s permitted to operate the objects with security level of None and A C E User 1 Enable Password 1111 Ma OB Mc Ob ME OF In addition to inputting the passwords to the system reserved register LW9220 password which is a double words value 32 bits a correct process of password setting requires users to appoint the users by using LW9219 single word value 16 bits where digit 1 12 represents User 1 User 12 respectively 113 If the password is wrong LB 9060 password error state will be set to ON 1f password is correct LB 9060 is set to OFF The passwords of from userl to user 12 can be obtained from system reserved registers LW9500 to LW 9522 24 words in total Users can change passwords even when the HMI is in operation By the system reserved register LB9061 update password set ON when its state is switched from OFF to ON the EB8000 will use the data saved in the system reserved registers from LW9500 t
251. mand mode EasyConverter c s t num setting source destination Indicate the setting file lgs Indicate the source file dtl or evt Indicate the destination file csv or xls Output file type If set the flag output a CSV file or the output file j will be an Excel file s NS Weather involving a setting file or not If set the flag 1t indicates that users utilize a setting file Time format For example t2 indicates Separated by a DOT sign For example EasyConverter exe c s t3 E Work 20080625 lgs E Work 20080625 dtl E Work 634 Appendix C EasyPrinter EasyPrinter is a Win32 application and only can run on MS Windows 2000 XP and Vista It enables MT8000 Series to output screen hardcopies on a remote PC via Ethernet Please see the following illustration Screen Hardcopy Ethernet Print Out MT8000 MT Remote Printer Server Save to File Here are some advantages of using EasyPrinter e EasyPrinter provides two modes of hardcopy output Print Out and Save to File Users can use either way or both ways e Since EasyPrinter is running on the MS Windows system it supports most of the available printers on the market e Multiple MT8000 HMIs can share one physical printer via EasyPrinter Users do not have to prepare printers for each MT8000 HMI Additionally EasyPrinter can also be a backup server Users can use backup objects on MT8000 HMIs t
252. me as that of set bit object Please refer to the chapter of set bit object 164 13 7 Multi Switch Object 13 7 1 Overview Multi State Switch object is a combination of word lamp object and set word object The object can be used not only to display the state of a word device but also to define a touch area when activated the value of the word device can be set 13 7 2 Configuration Click the Multi State Switch icon on the toolbar and the New Multi State Switch Object dialogue box will appear fill in each item then click OK button a new Multi State Switch object will be created See the pictures below R E Multt State Switch Fron 165 Hew Multi State Switch Object General Security Shape Label Description Mode Value Read address PLC name Local HMI K ms 0 Dan n Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Index register 16 bit Unsigned Write address PLC name Local HMI va Mss Uan na Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Index register 16 bit Uns sne w Write when button is released A thibute swith ye Hoots O O rd User defined mapping Mode There are Value and LSB display mode Refer to the Word Lamp Object MA etas e em a Offset It is used in the Value display mode Refer to the Word Lamp Object section of this chapter for related information Read address Select the PLC name device ty
253. mer T ddd 0 9999 Counter C ddd 0 9999 Data Register D 490 Wiring diagram RS232 Micro3C MicroSmart OpenNet Controller CPU Ladder Port MT8000 RS232 CPU port 1 or port2 RS 232 8P mini DIN Male Saler x s GND 5 GND 5 8Pin mini DIN Female Pin 8 RX GND To Port 2 G RS232C Communication Adapter FC4A PC1 MicroSmart m E UN Nu To Loader Port L gt R82320 RS232 M T8000 RS485 Micro3 CPU Port MicroSmart with FC4A PC2 RS485 Communication Adapter MT8000 RS 485 CPU Port RS 485 SP mini DIN Male 8Pin mini DIN Female Pin RS485 Micro3C OpenNet Controller Data Link Terminals MicroSmart with FC4A PC3 RS485 Communication Adapter MT8000 RS 485 Data Link Terminals 9P D SUB Female COMI COM3 5 GND 5 GND KEYENCE KV series KEYENCE KV series KV10 80 http www keyence com HMI Setting Parameters PLC type Com port Baud rate Parity bit Data Bits Stop Bits PLC Station No PLC Setting Must match the PLC s port setting Must match the PLC s port setting Must match the PLC s port setting Communication mode None Device address Bit Word Format ddd h 0 ddd h ddd h ddd h ddd h Device Type S Y G l JE DM Bit O TM Timer Curr Timer Preset Counter Curr BivWord Device Type Format OB RY dumo B Mm ada OB R diw OB R diw B DMBt duw Oow m w Oo
254. munication parameters just change the relative reserved addresses Please refer to the section above or the relevant chapters to understand how to use these addresses and set ON to LB9030 LB9031 and LB9032 the HMI will be forced to accept new settings LB9030 Update COM communication parameters set ON LB9031 Update COM2 communication parameters set ON LB9032 Update COM3 communication parameters set ON 672
255. n Retrieves the high word of a 32 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command main int source result HIWORD 0x12345678 result result is 0x1234 source 0x 12345 HIWORD source result result is 0x0001 376 a end macro command 18 5 4 Bit Transformation GETBIT source result bit pos Description Gets the state of designated bit position of a data source into result result s value will be 0 or 1 source and bit pos can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command main int source result short bit pos GETBIT 9 result 3 result is 1 source 4 bit pos 2 GETBIT source result bit pos result is 1 end macro command SETBITON source result bit pos Description Changes the state of designated bit position of a data source to 1 and pus in changed data into result source and bit pos can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command main int source result short bit_ pos SETBITON 1 result 3 result is 9 source 0 bit pos 2 377 SETBITON source result bit_pos result is 4 end macro command SETBITOFF SETBITOFF source result bit pos Description Changes the state of designated bit position of a data source to 0 and put in changed data into result source and bit pos can be a constant or a variable but resul
256. n Easy Printer as a Backup Server aiii 639 C21 Setup Procedure 11 Easy Printer daa io 639 C 2 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder8S000 oooccccconnnononnnconoccnonononenoncccccnnnnononanono os 641 CS Easy Printer Operation GUISA 643 CA O A A 643 Be O Ae en E Eon a 644 CA CONV Crt TS atc D tre nase do dcheais at atte ded alate aceasta ated haa Uatlna dn bileges ot nal odes A 650 CA Theo Detault Convert Barca Pile sd 650 CAZ Specialized C IET idas 651 CAD The Formato a Convert Baim Plenaria 652 C 4 4 The Order of Exanmiimins Criteria Rd 652 PSTN 1X D TAG ya MULI O baba 654 DEP P T TTT 654 D 2Modity the Contento xob POS de baratas 654 Appendix E Multi HMIs Intercommunication Master Slave Model sese 656 EL Howto Create a Proyector Master HM Lacies E ATAT 656 E 2 How to Greate a Project ot Slave HM H ci a iia 657 Appendix F Pass Through Function sss sss 660 0 HSS p YSS t Mod de e dd ad 660 F 1 1 How to Change the Virtual Serial Port sssseeeseeeeeceeceeseccsccnscnnensacsseesess 662 Fi 2 How to Use Ethernet Mode pies indi iran biie litis 664 2 SOM POr OE tia 667 P22 Settings of COM Pont Mode dee 667 EZ SBO Vote Modas 669 F 3 Using System Reserved Addresses to Enable Pass Through Function ooocccnnncnnnnnn 672 10 Chapter 1 EasyBuilder 8000 Installation and Startup Guide 1 1 EasyBuilder 8000 Installation Software Download EasyBuilder 8000 configuration software from EasyBuilder 8000 CD or
257. nal settings Initial settings Open settings Router relay parameter Station Mo lt gt P information FTP Parameters E mail settings Interrupt settings 3 Select Ethernet 2 0 for communicating with HMI Ethernet operations Communcaton data code r Ital toning Do not wait for OPEN Communications imposible at STOP time C ASCII cod BIAYE WHOL LU ALE EN sl f Communication posible at STOP time y IP address Send frame setting Input format DEC STEP 3 f Ethemet 2 0 ee IPaddress CT 192 168 10105 TEEESO23 tt iw Enable Write at RUN time TOF Existence confirmation seting C Use the Keen hue le Use the Ping Cancel 4 Click Open settings to set the system 546 Operational settings Newark ype Ehenet LE ae TT T 07 Initial settings Open settings Router relay parameter Station Mo lt 31P information FTP Parameters E mail settings Interrupt settings MM Network parameter Ethernet open setting Module Nol oy Fined buffer Pai Exit a Protocol Open system communication anng T ee x S S ior procedure open confirmation ort Ho Fixed buffer CP MELSOFT connection lt CP MELSOFT connection lt CP oo MELSOFT connection lt L CP MELSOFT connection L a o oa CT poo m jo E Press END to finish settings 54 7 Transmission target device IP address Module 2 Transmission target device Port Ho etting A
258. name Local HMI w Address 02 Salem tag Index register 2 6 13 24 Backup 13 24 1 Overview The backup function can store the recipe data RW RW A event log and sampling data to USB device The LB 9039 represents the backup status when backup operation is in progress the status of LB 9039 1s ON 13 24 2 Configuration Click Backup Object icon on the toolbar the Backup Object dialogue box show up See the pictures below 271 Hew Backup Object General Security Shane Label Desi OSOS SIOTICE OEW OEW A Event log Data log Backup postion TSB 1 OUEZ O Remote printer server Note Use L W9032 9039 to change the backup folder name Note Use Remote printer server to store data to a remote PL Enable remote printing im System Parameter Printer Server settings Range Start Today O Yesterday A ttobute Mode Touch trigger Source RW RW_A Event log Data log Select one from the above for the source There may be several data sampling objects registered in the project If you select Data log use Data Sampling object index to select the right one as shown below 278 Backup Objects Properties General Security Shape Label Profile Description Note you can v L W9032 9039 to change the folder name for backupinme SOVICE ORW OEW A O Event log Data log Data Sampling object in
259. namic limits MODY HH hh HH ih HH fi Set each sampling line s format and color and the display data s low limit and high limit Zero gt Span Zero and Span are used to set the low limit and high limit of sampling data So if the low limit is 50 and high limit is 100 for one sampling line then Zero and Span must be set as 50 and 100 so all the sampling data can be displayed in the trend display object The data length of the word device for limits is related to the data format of object In the example belwo the low limit and high limit are sourced from LWO and the following explains the addresses of the low limit and high limit a If the format of data displayed is 32 bitBCD then L WO low limit position 32 bit BCD LWO 2 high limit position 32 bit BCD b If the format of data displayed is 16 bit unsigned then LWO low limit position 16 bit unsigned LW0 1 high limit position 16 bit unsigned c If the format of data displayed is 32 bitfloat then LWO low limit position 32 bit float LWO 2 high limit position 32 bit float 229 Limit check When Dynamic Limits is selected the low limit and high limit are derived from Dynamic the designated word device An extended function is zoom in and zoom out limits function Please refer 17 3 Example PLC name Local HMI K r DR Time Data The time of latest sampling data will be marked
260. nd Execute a Macro 18 6 1 How to Create a Macro Macro programming can be divided into some steps as follows Step 1 Click the Macro Manager icon on the tool bar of EasyBuilder 8000 to open Macro Manager as follows E J Fi CIE 23 4 ean ae oa Macro Manager 390 Macro list Animation Auto change remote 1 win change remote 2 win change remote 3 win OnAutoStart OnChangeBrent OnChangeDubai OnChangeWTI OnIn t OnShowBrent OnShowDubai OnShowWTI OnTime_500ms On Timer On Macro Manager all macros compiled successfully are displayed in Macro list and all macros in developing are display in Macro under development The following is a description of the various buttons New Opens a blank WorkSpace editor for creating a new macro Delete Deletes the selected macro Edit Opens the WorkSpace editor and loads the selected macro Copy Copies the selected macro into the clipboard Paste Pastes the macro in the clipboard into the list and creates a new name for the macro 391 Step 2 Press the New button to open a blank WorkSpace editor Every macro has a unique number defined in Macro ID edit box and macro name must exist otherwise an error will appear while compiling WorkSpace Macro ID 29 Macro name marp Lest macro_command main end mac FO C ommand Step 3 Design your macro If 1t 19 necessary to use build in functi
261. nd display on the schedule list Scheduler 305 Example 2 Set temperature at 90F at 8 00 and set it back to 30F standby mode at 17 00 Monday to Friday S N L E When the designated start time is reached The running mode temperature setting Is wirtten LW100 30 C When the designated The standy mode temperature stop time is reached setting Is written Click New to add a new schedule object Follow the steps to set up the schedule object The LW 100 is used to store set value of temperature 306 Scheduler Description scheduler 1 Power ON startend action Acton mode O Bit OM gt Bit OFF Word write Acton address PLC name Local HMI Address System tag Index register 16 bit Unsigned Word write value settings 2 Constant O Addes Wi mire 90 Cancel General 1 Power ON start end action Power ON startend action 2 Check Word write in Action mode Acton mode Bit ON Bit OFF Word write 3 Set LW100 in Action address 307 Acton address Address System tag Index register 16 bit Unsigned 4 Check Constant and set Write start value to 90 in Word write value settings Word write value settings 2 Constant O Address a tt valus Time Set tab 5 Select Time Set tab check Constant General Time Set Prohibit Constant O Address 6 Unselect Settin
262. ndow change 1s selected the trigger address will be reset to 0 after new window is open b Write data to PLC current base window When the system change the base window the new window number will be written into the Trigger address c General PLC Control This function performs data transfer between PLC and MT8000 when users set appropriate value in trigger address Control code Operation for data transfer trigger address With this function the system uses four continuous word devices please refer to the following explanation Trigger Control code The valid control code is listed in address the above table When a new control code 1s written into the register the system will conduct the data transfer function Trigger Number of words to address transfer Trigger Offset to the start If the value 1s n the start address address 2 address of PLC of PLC register 1s Trigger address register c ae a Trigger The start address of address 3 LW or RW As an example to transfer PLC registers DM100 101 105 to MT8000 RW10 11 15 follow the steps below 1 Set Trigger address to DM10 2 Set DM11 6 no of words to transfer 298 3 Set DM12 86 DM10 4 86 DM100 4 Set DM13 10 RW10 5 Set DM10 1 The system will execute the data transfer operation d Back light control write back Set Trigger address to 1 the syst
263. ndows are displayed in order on the base window X Y Base window can also be used as pop up window Use X and Y to set the location of the popup window in the base window Monopoly If the option is checked when a base window used as a pop up window appears users are not allowed to operate other windows before the base window is closed If a base window is used as a keyboard window Monopoly property is automatically enabled Another way to create a window 1s select Open Window from menu and Open Window dialog appears Please refer to the illustration below Window Help pen Window Cascade Tile 110 WINDOA_O10 75 Open Window Window No Window Name and Window Size are listed on the message table Click New and choose window type from Select Window Style dialog New window can be created after click OK Fast Selection Common Window PLC Response HMI Connection Password Restriction Window O08 WINDOW 010 Window O11 Window O13 Keypad 1 Integer Keypad 2 Integer Keypad 3 Integer Eeypad 4 Integer Eevpad 5 Integer Eevpad 6 Integer Eeypad 7 HEX Eevpad E Floating ASCI Middle ASCI Small ASCIT Upper M ASCIT Lower M ARI Uppers ASCIT Lowers 640 450 300 100 300 100 410 100 640 450 640 450 640 450 640 450 209 200 195 230 200 170 304 213 160 220 241 521 306 223 209 254 570 240 490 00 DTO a40 DTO a40 460 200 480 200 select Windo
264. ngs select Tools FX special function utility FX Configurator EN X MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project LD Read mode MAIN 459 Step Ca fx T Project Edit Find Replace Convert View Online Diagnostics PESSI Window Help Ole f S AAR sll alel alel Check program Pome iP fre eal Merge data H alaala 25 26 0010 tal lol F F8 sF7 sF8 aF5 caF5 p Check parameter Gal FE lO S 2 BG F Z Hor l Transfer ROM Delete unused comments Ara rel Clear all parameters xl IC memory card Unset project f Program 18 Device comment Y S Parameter E Device memory Set TEL data Intelligent function utility Customize keys Change display color Options FX special function utility FALSO Project Execute FX Configurator EN FX3D C Host station 531 5 Select Module 0 in Ethernet Module settings If more than one module please setting modules step by step Bl FX Configurator EN Unset file Ethernet settings File View Help D Hg Ethernet Module settings Module 0 Module Mone Module 0 E mail settings Necessary setting No setting Already set Default Set if t is needed Mo setting f Already set J Check Online Transfer setup PLC remote operation Diagnostics Write Read Verity NUM SCRL 6 In Ethernet operational settings select the related parameters and IP address and then press End to finish the settin
265. notification bit to OFF 316 SN li 6 1 Time acquisition b request pit OFF JI 1 Lo a PLC trig hie ib Re baia yo ci K HMI confirm time HMI confirm time acquistion request bit is acquisition request bjt is Data read i lt 3 Data read gt t HMI read i i 4 y HMI tum ON time ON acquisition completion 5 8 Time acquisition A completion bit OFF 4 q l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l HMI set When an error y 0 occurs HMI tum ON gt Error notification vd N error notification bit 5 8 HMI set communication time lag HMI tum OFF the bit user tum OFF the bit c Mode Time setting address 2 Enable and disable the Termination time action and Setting on individual day 15 02 01 00 _ Bit Reserved 0 fixed 0 Bit 00 Termination time setting 0 disable 1 enable Bit 01 Setting on individual day 0 disable 1 enable 1 If setting on individual day is OFF the system still reads all 11 word devices but ignores the end time data 2 If setting on individual day is ON be sure to enter all start and end time information If 2 or more of the start end day bits are turned ON simultaneously an 317 error occurs d Start End Day Start Day Time setting address 3 End Day Time setting address 7 Designates the day used as a trigger for the start termination action 15 07 06 05
266. nt in data block will be plot on the screen d The system will write 0 to Control word address after the trend curve displayed Word Address Last displayed graph Display 40 30 20 Data 1 The previous graph remains and the current data graph overlays it During the period between c and d do not change the content of Control No of Data and Data it might cause error for trend curve plot 13 19 3 2 How to clear a trend curve a Write 2 to Control word address all the trend curves will be cleared b The system will write 0 to Control word address after the trend curve is cleared 245 Word Address Cl No of Data 40 30 20 0 Data 3 Last displayed graph 40 O Data 6 Clears the previous Data 7 graph display Even if there is data the graph does not display 13 19 3 3 How to clear the previous trend curve and display new one a Write the number of data to No of data address 1 e word control address 1 b Have the content of data block ready for display Note data block start from word control address 2 c Write 3 to Control word address the previous trend curves will be cleared and the new content in data block will be plot on the screen d The system will write 0 to Control word address after the trend curve displayed Word Address Redraw screen No of Data Last displayed graph 40 Data 1 ba D
267. nvert Batch File Select Enable and assign a Convert Batch File for automatically converting uploaded history files to CSV or MS Excel format Please refer to the next section for the details of Convert Batch File e Users can assign HMI names from LW9032 to LW9039 e FasyPrinter names the folder after IP address if HMI name is not set 649 C 4 Convert Batch File EasyPrinter provides a mechanism for converting the uploaded Data Sampling and Event Log history files stored in binary mode to CSV files automatically Users requesting this function have to prepare a Convert Batch File to provide EasyPrinter with the information of how to convert the history files Backup E 3g o S gt i dtl Xx a Ethernet vt 7 MT8000 EasyPrinter CSV Convert Batch File EasyConverter As shown in the above illustration the conversion is actually carried out by EasyConverter EasyPrinter simply follows the criteria in Convert Batch File and activates EasyConverter with proper arguments to achieve the conversion EasyConverter is another Win32 application converting history data into CSV or MS Excel xls files Users can find it in the EasyBuilder 8000 installation directory Users requesting this function must ensure EasyPrinter and EasyConverter are placed in the same directory C 4 1 The Default Convert Batch File The following is the default Convert Batch File included in the EasyBuild
268. o LW9522 to update the password table and create the new passwords Note The user operable class won t be changed due to the change of password When the state of LB9050 user logout is changed from ON to OFF current users will be forced to log out the system At this time only the object defined as None class can be operated LW9222 classes can be operated for current user records the operable class for current users bitO 1 means the operable object for current users is class A bitl 1 means the operable object for current users 1s class B and so on 10 2 Object s Security 114 Hew Function Key Object General Security Shape Label cere l padety contral Min pres time sec D o C Display confimation request Max waiting time sec fio Interlock Use interlock function Hide when disabled Enable when Bit is OM O Enable when Bit is OFF PLE name Local HMI k Address 0 Stem tag Address format ddddd range 0 11999 Index register User restriction Objet clas Disable protection permanently after initial activation Make invisible while protected apni Enable sound Library Sound Index Default Flay Safety control Safety control is mainly used to prevent operator from mis operating an object accidentally There are two methods for protection Min press time sec Only continuous pressing time no less than this value can an object
269. o 0x 1x 1 9999 B IB dddd 0 9998 Mapping to 3x 4x 1 9999 ddddd 0255536 Mapping to 3x 4x 10000 65536 LBO 0x0001 LB1 0x0002 LWO 3x0001 LW1 3x0002 Modbus RTU Server doesn t support function Code 06 to preset single register please use function code 16 0x10 preset multiple register 559 Wiring diagram RS 232 MT8000 RS232 Modbus RTU RS232 9P D SUB 9P D SUB co eee eee eo RS 485 MT8000 RS485 2w Modbus RTU RS 485 9P D SUB 9P D SUB Precaution Setting more than one Modbus server in HMI device list is useless 560 MODBUS TCP IP Modbus RTU TCP IP device http www modbus org HMI Setting Parameters Recommend PLC Setting Device address Ox Ix a gt a 561 Wiring diagram Ethernet MT8000 Ethernet Wire color RJ45 White Orange White Green 4 5 White Blue 7 BD3 White Brown 8 Brown Ethernet Direct connect crossover cable MT8000 Ethernet Wire color RJ45 5 White Blue 7 BD3 White Brown 8 Brown 562 Ethernet Hub or Switch RJ45 Modbus TCP Device RJ45 MODBUS TCP IP zero based Modbus RTU TCP IP device http www modbus org HMI Setting Parameters Recommend HMIStation No o T ees ar at PLC Setting Device address e w aw osas opor O O e n uwa oss eo Ce nw a meas Reiter bidon Ce am ma ossis mapen Wiring diagram Ethernet MT8000 Ethernet Wire color
270. o copy history files such as Data Sampling s and Event Log s histories onto a remote PC via Ethernet Please see the following illustration a da Backup CSV Files Ethernet MT8000 MT Remote N dtl Backup Server evt rep 635 C 1 Using EasyPrinter as a Printer Server Screen f Hardcopy 32 _____ __ Ethernet MT8000 p MT Remote Print Out Printer Server IP 192 168 1 26 Users can make screen hardcopies with a Function Key object The hardcopies will be transferred to the MT Remote Printer Server via Ethernet and then printed out C 1 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter In Menu 3 Options select Settings and the following dialogue box will appear MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings General Server Fort number of the server socket User name Max length 12 characters admin Password Max leneth 12 characters 111111 Hardcopy Backup Namung Convention for AMI Folder when writing files Use IP address Us HMI name assign HMI name by L W9032 L 119039 Prefix IP Ex 1P 192 169 1 251 Properties Minimize to system aY Detailed message 1 In Server assign Port number of the server socket to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 Note These are default values 636 2 In Naming Convention for HMI Folder select Use IP address and assign IP_ as the Prefix 3 Tn
271. o manipulate bits within char short and int variable types The priority of these operators 1s from left to right within the statement animasi ABRO O ORS two values together AS BIO 359 Priority of All Operators The overall priority of all operations from highest to lowest 1s as follows Operations within parenthesis are carried out first Arithmetic operations Shift and Bitwise operations Comparison operations Logic operations Assignment Reserved Keywords The following keywords are reserved for Macro use They cannot be used for variable array or function names gt gt lt lt lt gt and or xor not lt lt gt gt amp exit macro command for to down step next return bool short int char float void if then else break continue set sub end while wend true false SQRT CUBERT LOG LOG10 SIN COS TAN COT SEC CSC ASIN ACOS ATAN BIN2BCD BCD2BIN DEC2ASCII FLOAT2ASCI HEX2ASCH ASCIRDEC ASCIRFLOAT ASCILHEX FILL RAND DELAY SWAPB SWAPW LORY TE HIBYTE LOWORD HIWORD GETBIT SETBITON SETBITOFF INVBIT ADDSUM XORSUM CRC INPORT OUTPORT POW GetError GetData GetDataEx SetData SetDataEx 18 3 Statement 18 3 1 Definition Statement This covers the declaration of variables and arrays The formal construction 1s as follows type name where define the type of name Example int A define a variable A as an integer typ
272. o testing to very its compatibility with Windows AP Tellme why this testing i important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway I After processing is completed the virtual COM port is displayed as follows Virtual COM Port PG lt gt PLE Cabia 661 F 1 1 How to Change the Virtual Serial Port Open System Properties gt Device Manager to check if the virtual serial port is installed successfully Ports COM amp LPT E 9 Communications Port COMI a Communications Port COM Printer Fort LP PR Processors E S SCSI and RAID controllers 0 6 Sound video and game controllers 72 System devices F l lniaeresal Serial Brie conmkeollerc If users want to change the number of virtual serial port please click Weintek Virtual Serial Port to open Port Settings Advanced as follows Sue NEN Hep eee entek Virtual serial Port COM3 Properties de i LETS y Batteries Computer Bits per second Disk drives el Display adapters Floppy disk controllers Y Floppy disk drives Sy IDE ATAJATAPI controllers keyboards Y Mice and other pointing devices Stop bits 1
273. ode YES PLC Setting 9600 Option RS232 RS485 115200 Even Odd None 7 8 12 Broadcast command Does not apply to this protocol Device address Bit Word Device Type Ox Ix 3x 4x 5x 6x B B B B BO Bit Pwo x pw a ow s Range 1 65535 1 65535 100 6553515 100 6553515 100 6553515 1 65535 1 65535 1 65535 1 65535 552 NOTE Address type 5x are mapping to Hold Reg The communication protocol of 5x is almost same as 4x except S5x making double word swap If 4x has following information adas 1 2 aa js joio Fata in word oi 0x2 0x3 ona ons ox C Daa 0320001 0540003 ox6000s For 5x 1t become ads 1 2 3 4 s oe Data in word 0x2 0x1 oxa 03 x6 05 0x10002 0x30004 0x50006 Modbus RTU function code Ox 0x01 Read coil 0x05 write single coil Ix 0x02 Read discrete input N A for write operation 3x 0x04 Read input register N A for write operation Ax 0x03 Read holding register 0x10 write multiple register 5x 0x03 Read holding register 0x10 write multiple register L note reverse word order in double word format 3xbit 19 equivalent to 3x 4xbit is equivalent to 4x 6x 0x03 Read holding register 0x06 write single register note use 6x device 1s limited to device of one word only Wiring diagram MODBUS RS232 PORT MT8000 RS 232 Modbus RTU 9P D SUB Controller RS232 COMI COM2 COM3 Port 553 MO
274. ol a local machine For example SetData bits 0 PLC 1 LB 300 123 100 PLC 1 is connected with the remote HMI so it is can not work 407 18 10 Sample Macro Code 1 for statement and other expressions arithmetic bitwise shift logic and comparison macro command maint int a 10 b 10 1 b 0 400 400 lt lt 2 401 b 1 22 2 30 7 b 2 111 gt gt 2 b 3 403 gt 9 3 gt 9 3 lt 4 3 lt 8 8 b 4 not 8 1 and2 1 or0 1 xor2 b 5 405 and 3 and not 0 bl6J 8 amp 44 4 amp 4 8 4 8 4 b 7 6 54 b 8 0x11 b 9 409 for1 0to 4 step 1 if a 0 400 then GetData a 0 Device 1 4x 0 9 GetData b 0 Device 1 4x 11 10 end If next 1 end macro command 2 while if and break statements macro command main int b 10 1 1 5 while 1 5 20 3 GetData b 1 Device 1 4x 11 1 if b 1 100 then break end if wend 408 end macro command 3 Global variables and function call char g sub int fun int j int k int y SetData j Local HMI LB 14 1 GetData y Local HMI LB 15 1 e return y end Sub macro command main int a b 1 a 2 b 3 1 fun a b SetData 1 Local HMI LB 16 1 end macro command 4 if statement macro command main int k 10 j forj 0 to 10 kj 3 next j if k 0 0 then SetData k 1 Device 1 4x 0 1 end if if k 0
275. on command 5 0 CRC command 0 checksum 6 LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 send request INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 return _value read response end macro command 18 9 Compiler Error Message 1 Error Message Format error cf error description 401 1s the error message number Example error C37 undeclared identifier 1 When there are compile errors the error description can be referenced by the compiler error message number 2 Error Description C1 syntax error identifier There are many possibilities to cause compiler error For example macro command maint char 1 123xyz this is an unsupported variable name end macro command C2 identifier used without having been initialized Macro must define the size of an array during declaration For example macro command maint char 1 int gji 1must be a numeric constant end macro command C3 redefinition error identifier The name of variable and function within its scope must be unique For example macro command maint int g 10 gt g error end macro command C4 function name error identifier Reserved keywords and constant can not be the name of a function For example 402 sub int if error C5 parentheses have not come in pairs Statement missing or For exampl
276. on of several word devices with continuous address for example LW12 LW13 LW14 LW15 and so on Use Data Block Display object to display multiple data blocks in trend curve for example it can display two data blocks LW12 LW15 and RW12 RW15 in trend curve simultaneously It is very useful to observe and compare the difference of trend curves Display Control LW11 30 LW LW13 LW14 LW15 20 10 LW12 LW13 LW14 LW15 Snapshot of Data Block Display 239 13 19 2 Configuration New object Click the Data Block Display icon Data Block Display s properties dialogue box appears as follows Data Block Display Objects Properties General Display Area Shape Profile Description Ho of channel Cursor line Enable Color A PLC name Local HMI Device type Address Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Index register Channel Control addres PLC name Local HMI Device type LW we Control word address Offset to start address e inis T Dat sorge aiee I Address format ddddd range U 10255 Index register 16 bit Unsigned Max 32707 General No of channel Set the no of channel for this object Each channel represents one data block The max no of channel is 12 240 Cursor Line address No of channel 2 K Using the Cursor line function when user touches the Data Block display object it
277. on register changes value The shape or picture jumps to the next position along the path 13 14 2 Configuration Click the Animation icon on the toolbar move the mouse to each moving position and click the left button to define all moving positions one by one When settings of all moving positions are completed click the right button of the mouse a new animation object will be created See the picture below F Lo AH O positien D y pasitian 0 State 0 pasion postion 2 y pasikian 7 pastien E To change the object s attributes you can double click the left button of the mouse on the object and the Animation Object s Properties dialogue box as shown in the picture below will appear 201 Animation Objects Properties General Shape Label Profile Despi O A thibute Toten of siats Foston 2 Controlled by register Based upon time interval Read address PLC name Local HMI e Device type LW N Mies 0 Uan be Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Index register 16 bit Unsigned 9 4 Attribute Total no of To set the number of the states for this number State no Position a Controlled by register When select Controlled by register the designated register controls the object s state and position Read address If select Controlled by register option it is necessary to set the read address In the table be
278. on the toolbar the History Data Display dialogue box show up on the screen Fill in each items and click OK button a new object will be created See the pictures below History Data Display la E T 232 Hew History Data Display Object General Data Format Title Shape Data Sampling Objet index Grid Enable Color i Column interval 5 Z Profile color Transparent Frome M Background Time Time HH MM y Date Date DOMMYY we SEQUENCE 110 O Time ascending Time descending History control Address System tag Address format ddddd range U 10255 Index register Data Select the corresponding Data sampling object where the history data comes from Sampling object index Set grid enable or disable 233 2 2 2 2 2 pus 2 e Gf 2 C9 O00 02 M ho M ho bo T Date Cho Ch 1 3582 21 52 16 09 07 0 3581 21 52 16 09 07 2 35A 52 16 09 07 y 3579 21 52 16 09 07 2 3578 2152 16 09 07 2 3577 21 52 16 09 07 0 357 52 16 09 07 0 3575 21 52 16 09 07 0 3574 21 52 16 09 07 0 A 14 LA N nM i Grid Color Set color of grid Column interval Set space of column Ch 1 Ch 21 56 16 09 07 0 21 56 16 09 07 0 RARR TEP 4 N N TRINN 7 TARRA 4 Profile Set color of frame and background If it is set as transparent the frame and color background will be ignored 3982 22
279. ons like SetData or Getdata press Get Set FN button to open API dialog and select the function and set essential parameters 392 Function rare GetData data 0 Local HMI LW 0 4 Variable 1 Variable type short 16 bit Read address PLC name Address g Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Data count 4 Read data from a device Usage GetData desti PLC name device type address data count Example char byData 10 Step 4 After the completion of a new macro press Compile button to compile the macro 393 macro_command maing short data 4 GetData data 0 Local HMI LW 0 4 end macro_command If there is no error press Exit button and find that a new macro macro test exists in Macro list change remote 1 win change remote 2 win change remote 3 win Macro under development 394 18 6 2 Execute a Macro There are several ways to execute a macro a With a PLC Control object 1 Open the PLC Control object and set the attribute to Execute macro program 2 Select the macro by name Choose a bit and select a trigger condition to trigger the macro The macro will continue to be re triggered as long as the condition is met In order to guarantee that the macro will run only once consider latching the trigger bit and then resetting the trigger condition within the macro 3 Use a Set Bit or Toggle Switch object to act
280. or trigger condition and Out tolerance is used for system s normal condition Condition Condition In toleran Out tolerance From the example the illustration above indicates that if the value of Read address is bigger or equal to 29 30 1 or smaller or equal to 31 30 1 the event will be triggered 29 lt Read address value lt 31 After the event is triggered only when the value of Read address is bigger than 32 30 2 or smaller than 28 30 2 will the system return to the normal condition Read address value lt 28 or Read address value gt 32 Condition Condition Take another example above it indicates that system is triggered when the value of Read address is less then 29 30 1 or greater then 31 30 1 Read address value lt 29 or Read address value gt 31 When the event is triggered system returns to normal condition only when the value of Read address is bigger or equal to 28 30 2 and smaller than 32 30 2 28 lt Read address value lt 32 Message tab 87 Alarm Event Log General Message E Label Library Color MA Write value for Event Display object gar veo Ord Text Enable pound Library Beep Play Text Content The text content showed on alarm bar alarm display and event display Display the content of LW address of being triggered object Format o d initial sign LW s address d
281. or each channel 250 13 20 XY Plot 13 20 1 Overview XY Plot object displays two dimension data Each data contains X and Y values and each curve is composed of a stream of XY data The maximum number of trend curves in a XY plot is 16 channels 13 20 2 Configuration New object Click the XY plot icon ire and XY Plot Object dialog box appears 251 Hew XY Plot Object Design S Control Address PLC name Local HMI yt Control address Address format ddddd range 0 10255 No of data address 0 1 o _ Index register Chan Read address PLC name Local HMI we separated address for X and Y data X axis data LW 100 rrr High 22707 High 32707 Cancel General a Direction There are four selections right left up or down Right Left 252 Control address Right direction Left direction T origin di A origin Up Down Up direction origin X Y ie e Y N ae Down direction b No of channel Set the no of channels of the XY plot Each channel may conduct the draw operation alone PLC name Select the PLC where the control address coming from Device type Select the device type where the control address coming from Control address Control address 1s used to control the display of XY curve for each channel l Plot XY curve Write 1 to control address the system will plot the XY
282. ory When system startup up both the RW and RW A memory will be restored from the recipe data in flash memory the way of reading and writing Recipe Data 1s the same as operating the normal Word Register The size of Recipe Data in both RW and RWI are 64k words User can update Recipe Data by using CF Card USB cable or Ethernet It is possible to upload Recipe Data to the designated address of PC furthermore it can save the PLC s data in recipe memory The following explain all of the ways of operating recipe data 17 1 Updating Recipe Data by Using Ethernet or USB cable Click Download on Project Manager Select RW and RW _ A and designate the directory of the source files After the download operation complete start up the HMI again and the contents of RW and RW_A will be updated When Reset recipe is selected before start download processing the EB8000 will set all the data of RW and RW_A to 0 first 351 Download el Firrreware MIT BO00f8000 Series kad F Project Rw PLEASE INPUT RECIPE FILE NAME Rw amp PLEASE INPUT RECIPE 1 FILE NAME Datalog PLEASE INPUT DATA LOG FILE NAME Install series media plaver drivers Connection Ethernet HMIIP 192 169 1 112 w O USB cable i series only Reboot HMI after download Reset recipe Reset event log Reset data log 17 2 Updating Recipe Data by Using CF Card or USB Stick Click Building Download Data for CF USB Disk on Project
283. other than this format will cause a compile error C24 syntax error break 99 66 break statement can only be used in for while statement C25 syntax error continue continue statement can only be used in for statement or while statement C26 syntax error expression 1s error C27 syntax error The mismatch of an operation object in expression causes a compile error For example macro command maint 404 int a b fora 0to2 b 4 xyz illegal xyz is undefined nexta end macro command C28 must be macro_command There must be macro command C29 must be key word sub The format of function declaration 1s sub data type function name end sub For example sub int pow int exp end sub Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C30 number of parameters is incorrect Mismatch of the number of parameters C31 parameter type is incorrect Mismatch of data type of parameter C32 variable is incorrect The parameters of a function must be equivalent to the arguments passing to a function to avoid compile error C33 function name undeclared function C34 expected constant expression C35 invalid array declaration 405 C36 array index error C37 undeclared identifier i identifier Any variable or function should be declared before use C38 un supported PLC data add
284. ough a 16 2 1 HMI IP Password Project Manager Password RezetDownload 155555 Upload 111111 When operating HMI by Ethernet users need to designate the correct IP address and password in HMI Reset and Download functions share a set of password while Upload function uses another set The password provides protection against unauthorized access to the HMI Be sure to record any password change If resetting password to default the project and data on the HMI will be completely erased Reboot HMI The Reboot HMI feature 1s designed for users to reboot the project 17 A Project M ans ren HMI IP Password Type MT8000 X Benes Settings f RebootHMi Comechon Ethernet HHI IF 1192 163 1 111 Ed tor Recupe Eadended Memory Editor Build Download Data for CF USB Disk connecting HMI and checking password f stop HHI Set the correct IP address when operate HMI via Ethernet HMIIP 192 168 0 103 2 2 Editor EasyBuilder 8000 To launch the EasyBuilder 8000 screen editor Conversion tool for Data Sampling and Event Log EasyPrinter Remote printer server Recipe Extend Memory Provide file format conversion and data editing Editor function for Recipe Extend Memory Review the register range of device types for each EasyAddress Viewer PLC supported Except for Ethernet and USB cable the project and data can be downloaded to th
285. our computer WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any porton of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Cancel 12 3 Designate the folder for EB8000 installation or choose the folder recommended and then click Next i EasyBuilder 8000 2 0 0 Build 2009 02 02 Select Installation Folder The installer will install E asyBuilder 8000 Y2 0 0 Build 2009 02 02 to the following folder To install in this folder click Next To install to a different folder enter it below or click Browse Folder Install EasyBuilder 8000 Y2 0 0 Build 2009 02 02 for yourself or for anyone who uses this computer O Evenone Ge Just me 4 Click Next to confirm the installation iz EasyBuilder 6000 72 00 Build 2009 0202 Confirm Installation The installer is ready to install E asyBuilder 8000 2 0 0 Build 2009 02 02 on your computer Click Hest to start the installation 13 5 Installation processing ie EasyBuilder 8000 2 0 0 Build 2009 07 02 Installing EasyBuilder 8000 Y2 0 0 Build 2009 02 02 EasvBuilder 8000 2 0 0 Build 2009 02 02 ts being Installed Please wait 6 Click Close to complete the installation 7 EasyBuilder 8000 2 0 0 Build 2009 02 02 Installation Complete Easy
286. owed to move along the X axis The moving range 1s defined by Min X and Max X Attribute 198 b Y axis only The object is only allowed to move along the Y axis The moving range is defined by Min Y and Max Y Attribute Mode Herb SSCS No otses c X amp Y axis The object is allowed to move along the X axis and Y axis The moving range in XY direction is defined by Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y respectively Athaibute No of states 8 ow d X axis w scaling The object is for X axis movement with scale Supposed that the value of the designated register is DATA the system use the following formula to calculate the moving distance on the X axis X axis move distance DATA Input low Scaling high Scaling low Input high input low Athibute Mode X axis w scaling A Ho of states aah H aeo abash 0 saad T For example the object is only allowed to move within 0 600 but the range of the register s value is 300 1000 set Input low to 300 and Input high to 1000 and set Scaling low to 0 and Scaling high to 600 and the object will move within 199 Display ratio Limit address the range e Y axis w scaling The object is for Y axis movement with scale and the formula to calculate the moving distance on the Y axis is the same as the one in X axis w scaling f X axis w reverse scaling This function is the same as X axi
287. ox fox pe 2 rx 6 x RK 6 RX 8 RX 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND RS 232 LC11 MT8000 RS232 LC11 Computer 9P D SUB Female Link module RS232 Port ox en pr S w pex e be ow How to get the WideField communication setting If you want get the WideField communication setting select Tool gt Set Environment default is Automatic Using the Automatic Recognition Wide Field software will connect the Current PLC and get the PLC communication setting If you have know the PLC communication configuration you alse can select the Fixed mode It will connect the PLC quickly 610 oe an SE Ee e Zoe Setup Environment x Setup Circuit Display Setup Program Syntax Check Setup Toolbar Setup Folders Setup Communication Communication Media RESE C RIII via Modem P S RS 232 Communication Connection Method Automatic Recognition C Fixed 19200bps Even Parity Communication Timeout Number of Retries COM Port Number Ethernet Communication Destination IP Address CFU Number Connection Timeout OK Cancel Default Help P S Because use Personal computer link when you connecting to PLC it will delay about 20sec for test communication How to Setting YOKOGAWA PLC Communcation configuration YOKOGAWA FA M3 CPU SP55 5N same SP35 5N File gt New Project to create a new project 611 F WideField File Edit Find Wew Online Deb
288. pe address of the word device that controls ad the display of multi state switch Write address Select the PLC name device type address of the word device that system set value to The write address can be the same as or different from the read address 166 Write when button is released Refer to the Set Bit Object section of this chapter for related information Attribute Select the object s operation mode Switch style There are JOG and JOG for selection When the read address is the same as the write address the minimum value of the word value is Offset state 0 and the maximum value is no of state 1 Offset See the picture below Numeric Display LWO Muiti State LWO offset 1 a JOG When the Multi State Switch object is activated the value of the write address will be added by 1 In the Value display mode if the resulting value is equal to or larger than the value of No of States Offset and Enable in Cyclic is selected the value of the write address will return to Offset and show the state 0 otherwise the value of the write address will maintain as No of states 1 Offset and shows the state No of states no 1 NOTE Like the word lamp object the state shown by Multi State Switch object is the value of the word device subtracts Offset Attribute Stwich style JOG State no 5 Cyclic
289. pe is a graph composed of lines rectangles circles and other drawing objects A complete Shape can possess more than one state and each state can include two parts frame and inner See State O State 1 the illustration as below An object can be set to use the Shape s frame inner or both Click Shape Library button on the toolbar and the Shape Library dialogue box appears as below 325 Shape Library Library Frame ar s z arrow abe Select Lib jarrow arrow New Lib a buttonz Linattach Lib buttons button System Frame Jatited 1 Untitled o 2 l Delete All States System Button States 3 States 3 it system Lamp i F Delete Cur State Rename Place state O State 11 I TO 4 Untitled 5 Untitled 6 Untitled 7 Untitled A _ E E p RA Talal EENE E E a Inner Frame Library Selecting the source of a Shape from the Shape Library which has been added into the current project State Selecting the state the current Shape wants to display If the selected Shape isn t displayed it means that the Shape does not exist or the state of the Shape isn t defined Select Lib Click the Select Lib button and the following dialog appears for users to select the file path of the Shape Library to be added By previewing the content of the library on the right hand side of the window users can sele
290. protocol PLC Station No l 0 255 Must match the PLC s port setting FP3 must set 0 PLC Setting Communication 9600 0 8 1 default mode Device address Device Type dddd h 0 9999F Input X dddd h 0 9999F Output Y B x B Y B R dada 0 9999F ImtemalRelay R B L B T B Cc Data Bits Must match the PLC s port setting dddd h 0 9999 Link Relay L 0 9999 Timer T ddd 0 9999 Counter C ddd 0 9999 Timer Counter set value SV 576 0 9999 Timer Counter elapse W EV value EV Cw or aa annan Wiring diagram 2 IA MT8000 R8232 FPO FP2 FP2SH FPM Zool CPU Tool port bed l ee SP mini DIN RS 232 a a i Mini Din 5 Pin 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND Female MT8000 RS232 FPO CPU RS232 3P terminal 9P D SUB COMI COM2 COM3 aa eo ex sex MT8000 RS232 FP1 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH CPU 9P D SUB 9p D SUB Male RS232 COMI COM2 COM3 3 TX 4 TX 7 TX 2 RX 8 RX 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND 577 MT8000 FP1 CPU RS422 port Hirose 8Pin Port COMI RS 485 4w 9P D SUB Fed A Hirose 8Pin Port MT8000 FP3 CPU RS422 port 15P D SUB Female COM1 RS 485 4w 9P D SUB Ethernet connect TCP port 9094 K KAK Ky 55 itiga 7 S d Ethem de y RS232 a A AFPX COM5 EP X 578 Device Properties Local Ethernet ok Cancel 579 Parker Compax3 Parker Compax3 Servo Drive http www parker com HMI Setting RS23
291. r socket a005 User name Max length 12 characters admin Password Max length 12 characters 111111 Backup Naming Convention for AMI Folder when writing files Use IP address Us HMI name asin HMI name by LW9032 LW29039 Prefix IP Ex 1P 192 169 1 251 Properties Minimize to system traw 1 In Server assign Port number of the server socket to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 Note These are default values 2 In Naming Convention for HMI Folder select Use IP address and assign IP as the Prefix 3 Tn Properties select Minimize to system tray Click Backup tab at the left side in the dialogue box as follows MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings General Luput Backup files in DM T8000 Hardcopy When target file has existed 0 Overwrite it The content will be destroyed Convert Batch File Enable DAM TSO00 convence def 4 In Output click the ZS button to browse and select a path for storage of the incoming history files 5 Click OK to apply the settings 640 In Menu gt File select Enable Output to allow EasyPrinter to store any incoming backup request in the location specified in step 4 6 C 2 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder8000 In Menu Edit gt System Parameters click Printer Server tab and select Use MT Remote Printer Server the following dialogue box will appear sys
292. ral Time Set Description scheduler 1 PowerON startend action Acton mode a Bit OM gt Bit OFF Word write Acton address PLC name Local HMI N Device tp Address system tg Index register Cancel Help Example 1 The motor 1s scheduled to be power ON at 8 00 and power off at 17 00 Monday to Friday Here we use LB100 to control the motor Follow the steps to set up the schedule object 303 start running When the designated Power turn on start time is reached stop running Power turn off When the designated stop time is reached Click New to add a new object General Power ON start end action Detail message please refer to below Scheduler settings guide Power ON startend action 1 Check Bit ON in Action mode Action mode e Bit ON Bit OFF Word write 2 Set LB100 in Action address Acton address PLC name Local HMI K Address Erer tg Index register 304 Time Set tab 3 Select Time Set tab check Constant General Time Set Prohibit Constant Address 4 Unselect Setting on individual day In Start adjust time as 8 00 00 and select Monday to Friday Setting on individual day start T San Mon Tue Wen Thu Fri Sat 5 In End select Enable termination action and adjust time as 17 00 00 End Enable teominston action 17 6 Click OK a new schedule object is created a
293. ram 1 RS232 CPU port FB CPU port 15P D SUB Male MT8000 RS232 9P D SUB Male 2 RS485 CPU port FB CPU port 15P D SUB Male MT8000 COMI RS 485 2w 9P D SUB Female COMI COM3 NE 3 RS232 FB DTBR DTBR E FB DTBR DTBR E 15P D SUB Male MT8000 RS232 9P D SUB Male COMI COM2 COM3 5 GND 5 GND 475 4 RS485 FB DTBR DTBR E FB DTBR DTBR E 9P D SUB Male MT8000 RS232 9P D SUB Male COM1 COM2 COM3 3 TX TX Tx 5 RS485 FB DTBR DTBR E FB DTBR DTBR E 3P Terminal Block MT8000 COM RS 485 2w 9P D SUB Female COM1 COM3 RX 2 RX 9 Datat 6 RS232 FBs Port0 TX D ORX FB DTBR DTBR E 4P Mini Din Male MT8000 RS232 9P D SUB Male COM1 COM2 COM3 3 TX a TX pp Tx AA 4P Mini Din Female 476 GE Fanuc SNP X GE Fanuc 90 amp VersaMax series PLC http www ge com HMI Setting Baud rate Must same as the PLC setting Parity bit Odd Even Odd None Must same as the PLC setting Data Bits amp e Must set as 8 to this protocol Stop Bits Must same as the PLC setting HMI Station No NO ee Does not apply to this protocol PLC Station No o 5 Does not apply to this protocol PLC Setting Refer to related PLC manual Device address O a uw mw o f u ow os O m u mow is H IO aa ass H Aa 000 aaae a au O oo amago TO AENA E AO o S E a E DI IN Ca o S R wa 2
294. rate station no and address Use broadcast For example set broadcast value as 255 For device address of 255 20 the 52 command Interval of block pack words Max read command size words Max write command size words After all settings are Device list Mo Local HMI Local PLE 1 HMI will send command to PLC but PLC won t deliver any response to HMI If the interval of read out address between different commands is less than this value these commands can be combined to one But combination function 1s disabled if this value is 0 For example the interval value is set as 5 and users would like to read out 1 word from LW3 and 2 words from LW6 respectively Since the interval of addresses between LW3 and LW6 is less than 5 these two commands can be combined to one The contents of combination command therefore becomes 5 consecutive words from LW3 read out from LW3 LW 7 Note Max combination command must less than Max read command size The Max data size to be read out from device at one time Unit word The Max data size to be wrote in to device at one time Unit word completed a new name Local PLC device is listed on the table Location Device type Interface WF Protoc Local HMI Local MTS121T 500 x600 Disable MITSUBISHI FAQ Local MITSUBIGH F n COMI MQ600 E7 1 Redes 5 1 2 How to Control a Remote PLC D
295. rd copy wale 100 Ww 100 pixels for 1610 type or 220 pixels for 2407 4004 type 1 Storage space available for the project and historical data is 12MB By 59 management adjusting the space of two parts users can reach their memory For T series requirements For example for smaller project it can get bigger only memory space for historical data Minimum Project size is 6MB Maximum Project size is 10 MB default is 8MB Minimum Historical data size is 2MB Maximum Historical data size is 6 MB default is 4MB Users have batter to copy and erase the original historical data in HMI before the storage space is changed Sirs space management History dats space Max XOB file ae 40M i SUM Hot U change omg space please reel H s dats dogs and event logs 5 3 General Parameters in General tab determine all properties related to screen operations 60 System Parameter Settings Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Fast selection button Attribute Enable Fosttion Left GC TS6T saver Back leht saver minute 3 RCIEET SAVET minute 3 aver window no 110 WINDOW O10 i Option ARD window no 10 WINDOW O10 Extra no of events Eeyboarn caret color D Object layout Nature w 50 Eeypad 1 Integer Eeypad 2 Integer Keypad 2 Integer Keypad 4 Integer Keypad 5 Integer Keypa
296. rd today the index 1 refer to the second latest history record and so on The current value in History control register 1s used as the index to select corresponding history record Here 19 an example to explain how to use the History control The history control register is L W100 supposed that the history records saved in system are 269 EL_20061120 evt EL_20061123 evt EL_20061127 evt EL_20061203 evt Where the 2006xxxx 1s the date that system saved history record The following table shows the event display object displays the corresponding historical record in according to the value of LW100 Yamna 2 0 Hew Event Display Object General EventDisplay Shape Font Include categories o thi fsee Alarm Event Log object Acknowledge style Max event no Transparent Frame ME Acknowledge e elect box pS c Format SEQUence 110 mort O Time ascending Time descend ins Time Event tigger time Acknowledge time Retum to noma tune O HH MM SS O DD HE MM Date Event tigger date MMODYY ODDMMYY C DD MM YY YYMMDD Cancel Include Select category of events that belongs to the event display object category of categories an event 1s set in event log For example if the category of an event log display is set to 2 4 1t will display all the active event messages with
297. rder and Group click Enable to active this function In the Input order input the sequence number for each input object and the system will follow this order to the next object b Check Group User can define separate input objects to different group The system will only search the next object in the same group Group 2 Input Order 11 11 Input Order 1 Input Order 2 1 21 Input Order 2 22 Input Order 31 31 Input Order 3 32 Input Order 4 Input Order 4 c In online operation please click ES button to stop the system searhing for the NI object 175 ES button NOTE If one of input object has set interlock function this object will be skip in the next input object search O Input order range from 1 to 511 Group range from 1 to 15 Keyboard There are two ways to display keyboard one is to use system parameter General keyboard to include standard keyboard into the project The another is to select external keyboard and use direct window to display customized keyboard The customized keyboard is composed of function key When using the Numeric Input Object you may select the keypad style Then select the window where the keypad displayed and set the position in the window When the Numeric Input object 1s activated the popup window of keypad will appear automatically Refer to the Designing and Using Keypad chapter for further information 176 The picture b
298. refer illustration below System Parameter Settings Device Model General security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Fonts for no ascu strings AR MinchoL Ma AR MinctiM GB Add AR Mins Est 7 maimed FRE Ble 158 Step2 Design non asci1 input keypad Create window11 for non asci1 input keypad keypad design is shown below G 10 WINDOW 010 E 11 SimpleChinese Keyboard tel pl x BACK CLEAR ESC Those object on the window are function keys with input code in accord with the label For example to input TRT function key create a function key object General ASCII UNICODE 9942 99 mode type in T4J in the column as below illustration a Tk Function Key Object s Properties O E atin ca General Security Shape Label Profile M A Description i _ Activate after button is released IE O Change full screen window O Change common window Display popup window FET Retum to previous window O Close window ASCIVUNICODE mode Enter O Backspace Clear Esc ASCI UNICODE 159 Ar Go to Function key Label and then select Use label type fai in the content and in the Attribute Font select AR MingtiM GB it must be the same as setpl s setting as illustrated below The label of non ascii function key must use the same Font For example in simplified Chinese keypad the fonts
299. ress means the register s address If the register is LW100 the Address is 100 219 Data format High limit s read address Low limit s read address 220 13 17 Trend Display Object 13 17 1 Overview Trend display object can use the curve to represent the data recorded by data sampling object The sampling operation is conducted by data sampling objects The trend display object display the result of sampling The following picture shows an example of trend display object 17 32 41 12 03 06 MARANA DPTO TG T 13 17 2 Configuration Click the Trend Display icon on the toolbar and the Trend Display Object s Properties dialogue box will appear fill in each items press the OK button and a new Trend Display Object will be created See the picture below The following picture shows the General tab in the Trend Display Object s Properties dialogue box 221 Hew Trend Display Object General Trend Shape o Dessa J Data Sampling Object index Trend type No of channels Note if no of channels is changed you must reset HMI s data logs E axis time range C 7 Pixel Time Distance second 3 PLC name Local HMI N Hold control Enable Device type LB Address 0 Dan tng Address format ddddd range 0 11999 Index resister Watch line Enable Device type LW hades syen te Address format ddddd range U
300. ress The parameter of GetData SetData should be legal PLC address C39 idenifier must be integer char or constant The format of array is Declaration array_name constant constant is the size of the array Usage array _name integer character or constant Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C40 execution syntax should not exist before variable declaration or constant definition For example macro command main _ int a b fora 0 To 2 b 4 a inth k illegal definitions must occur before any statements or expressions nexta end macro command C41 float variables cannot be contained in shift calculation C42 function must return a value C43 function should not return a value C44 float variables cannot be contained in calculation C45 PLC address error C46 array size overflow max 4k 406 C47 macro command entry function is not only one C48 macro command entry function must be only one The only one main entrance of macro is macro command function name end macro command C49 an extended addressee s station number must be between 0 and 255 For example SetData bits 0 PLC 1 LB 300 123 100 illegal 300 123 means the station number is 300 but the maximum is 255 C50 an invalid PLC name PLC name is not defined in the device list of system parameters C51 macro command do not control a remote device A macro just can contr
301. ress tag name LB 9000 initialized as ON LB 9001 initialized as ON LB 9002 initialized as ON LB 9003 initialized as ON LE 9004 initialized as ON LB 9005 initialized as ON LB 9006 initialized as ON LB 9007 initialized as ON 9 LE 9008 initialized as ON 10 LB 9009 initialized as ON 1l LB 9010 data download indicator 12 LB 9011 data upload indicator 12 LB 9012 data download upload indicator 14 LB 9013 F window control hide ONWshow OFF 15 LB 9014 FS button controlfhide ON show OFFI Before using the Address Tag Library users need to add the content of the library at first Click the Device Mode T Device Type PLE name Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI 100 Address type Bit Local HMI i Local HHMI Local HMI i Local HHMI Address LB New button and the Address Tag dialogue appears as below 348 Reads Write Read Write Readi rite fs Reads Write Read Write Reads Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read only Read only Read only Reads Write Read Write Address Tag Tag name PLC name MITSUBISHI Fon Address type Device type Address 200 Cancel Tag name The name of the Address Tag PLC name The name of the PLC which is selected from the device list Address typ
302. riable Example macro command maint short source result BIN2BCD 1234 result result is 0x1234 source 5678 BIN2BCD source result result is 0x5678 end macro command BIN2BCD source result Description Transforms a BCD type value source into a binary type value result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command main short source result BCD2BIN 0x1234 result result is 1234 source 0x5678 BCD2BIN source result result 1s 5678 end macro command DEC2ASCIH source result start len Description Transforms a decimal value source into ASCII string saved to an array result len represents the length of the string and the unit of length depends on result s 371 type 1 e if result s type is char the size is byte the length of the string is byte len If result s type is short the size is word the length of the string is word len and so on The first character is put into result start the second character is put into result start 1 and the last character is put into result start len 1 source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable start must be a constant Example macro command maint short source char result1 4 short result2 4 source 5678 DEC2ASCHU source result1 0 4 result1 0 is 5 result1 1 is 6 result1 2 is 7 result1 3 is 8 the
303. ro commands have 146 to be built before configure this function Please refer to related chapter on how to edit Macros Set style Macro Execute macro Macro t iD 1 e Trigger mode OFF gt ON M CIFF i CN gt OFF OFF lt O When Set style is selected as Toggle there are three different modes to trig macro command 1 e OFF gt ON ON gt OFF or ON lt gt OFF 147 13 4 Set Word Object 13 4 1 Overview The Set Word object provides two operation modes the manual operation mode and the automatic operation mode The manual operation mode defines a touch area and users can activate the area to set the value of the word device When users select the automatic operation mode the operation will be automatically activated in pre configured conditions the touch area is no action at any circumstance 13 4 2 Configuration Click the Set Word icon on the toolbar and the New Set Word Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items and press OK button a new Set Word object will be created See the pictures below 9 4 241 w a eel 148 Hew Set Word Object T General Security Shape Label Description Write address PLC name Local HMI Device type LW Address System tag Addie format ddddd range 0 10255 16 bit Unsigned Index register Write after button is released Notification Enable Set ON O Set
304. rs as follows Pass through Ethemet LO COM port HMI IP 192 168 1 37 lt l Get HM Communication Parameters HI work mode Mormal Source COM Port PC gt Hf COM 1 R9232 Baud rate 9600 fi Data bits B Bits Stop bits Destination COM Port HMI gt PLC COM 3 v R5485 2W Baud rate 9600 sp Data bits E Bits Parity Even d Stop bits Start Pass through j Stop Pass through 671 Press Start Pass through and HMI s work mode is switched into Pass through Users can execute on line Simulation Now PC application can control PLC via HMI and HMI is acting as a converter at this moment Note The communication between HMI and PLC will be paused when pass through 1s active If users want to resume communication between HMI and PLC please press Stop Pass through to disable this function F 3 Using System Reserved Addresses to Enable Pass Through Function Other way to enable pass through is to use LW9901 LW9902 to set source COM port and destination COM port directly When the values of LW9901 and LW9902 match conditions as below HMI will start pass through automatically a The values of LW9901 and LW9902 has to be 1 or 2 or 3 1 COM1 2 COM2 3 COM 3 b The values of LW9901 and LW9902 should be not the same Note If users want to stop pass through just change the values of LW9901 and LW9902 to 0 If users need to change the com
305. rs Users need to correctly set the COM port communication parameters COM Port Sethnrs OM co Tironi ic id rate Tom around delay me ts bate TE Send ACK delay me anta E Parameter Sop bat Parameter Z Parameter Z 51 Timeout Window No 5 will pop up and appear the PLC No Response message once the response time from PLC to HMI over timeout setting Turn around delay The delayed interval of two commands 1 e the next command will be delayed as the setting required to be sent out after the previous command is sent If no specific request the default setting is 0 If the interface is Ethernet click Settings and then IP Address Settings appears Users need to correctly set IP address and Port No of the PLC If Address setings IP address 192 Portno 500 Tomeout sec 1 i Tum around delay ima 0 send ACE delay me 0 Parameter 0 Parameter 2 0 Parameter Fo 0 PLC default If the device address of the object doesn t include station no EB8000 will station no use PLC default setting no as PLC station no In addition PLC station no can put in device address directly for example 120 Read address PLE name MITSUBISHI FXOW FRA Device type TY Address 1820 Address format ddd range 0 255 1 means PLC station no and has to be named more than 0 and less than 255 20 means PLC address the sign is to sepa
306. ry Save the event log data to MT8000 memory Save to CF card Save the event log data to CF card Save to USB 1 Save the event log data to USB disk 1 Numbering rule of USB disk 1s the disk inserted to the USB interface in the first place is numbered 1 next is numbered 2 and the last is numbered 3 There s no relation to the interface position Save to USB 2 Save the event log data to USB disk 2 Preservation limit After choosing the device to save the Event log you can see the Preservation limit selection This setting determines the days of the data preserved As below picture the preservation time is two days which means HMI memory will keep the data of yesterday and the day before yesterday The data out of this time range will be deleted automatically to prevent the storage space from using up For example today is 7 1 the HMI will keep 6 30 6 29 data in the memory and 6 28 will be deleted from the memory 80 Alarm Event Log Category pe crema mote 55 rn coin Resta reso aba 1 a aaddec BIT 500 ms GON Disable Disable History files Save to HMI memory L Save to CF card Save to USE 1 Save to USE 2 Preservation limit Daye of preservation dante Users need to set Printer on system parameter model and message will print out when alarm occurs in order Delete a specific event Settings Modify the definition of a specific event 7 1 1 Excel Edit
307. s protocol Online Simulator PLC Setting a Device address l Device Bit Word Range Memo Type 0 377 Input Relay 0 377 Output Relay 07679 Auxiliary Relay 0 4095 State Relay S 0 511 Timer Relay T 0 199 Counter Relay C 526 B X B Y B H B 8000 9999 B 5 B T B l Device Bit Word Format Range Memo Type B DBit dddd dd dddd 0 7999 dd 0 15 Data Register Bit D w o a ow TT Wiring diagram MT8000 Mitsubishi FX series PLC COMI RS 485 4w CPU RS422 Port AN 9P D SUB 8P MiniDin Female E H NS 8Pin miniDin Female 527 MITSUBISHI FX3U ETHERNET MITSUBISHI FX SERIES Module FX3U ENET http www mitsubishi automation com HMI Setting Parameters Recommend PLC type MITSUBISHI FX3u Ethernet Compore Ethemet U default Refer Module Setting TCP IP port 5001 default Refer Module Setting Device address Bit Word Meme D Bit dddd dd 0 799915 Data Register Bit Access D ddd 0 7999 Data Registers W 8000 8511 Special Data Registers ddd Decimal hhh Hexadecimal o00 Octal 528 Wiring diagram Ethernet MT8000 Wire color Ethernet Hub or Ethernet RJ45 Switch RJ45 1 RJ45 Ethernet Direct connect crossover cable MT8000 Wire color Modbus TCP Device Ethernet RJ45 RJ45 Fx3u ENET module setting Before using Ethernet module using GX Developer FX Configurator EN to set the Ethernet module the FX3
308. s w scaling but the moving direction is in reverse g Y axis WI reverse scaling This function is the same as Y axis w scaling but the moving direction is in reverse The size of shape in different states can be set individually as shown in the picture below Ratio 1 Ratio 12 Ratio 14 Ratio 16 State 1 E State 2 State 3 The object s moving range can be set not only by Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y but also by the designated registers Supposed that the object s moving range is set by the value of the designated register Address then the address of Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y are listed in the following table Data format Min X Max X Min Y Max Y Heli PP Fee PA Fe 16 bit Address Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 16 bit Address Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 Signed es Ien A ies 3 32 bit Address Address 2 Address 4 Address 6 32 bit Address Address 2 Address 4 Address 6 Signed ee Ien A A 200 13 14 Animation Object 13 14 1 Overview The Animation object is used to place an object on the screen at a specified location determined by a predefined path and data in the PLC The state and the absolute location of the shape on the screen depend on current reading value of two continuous PLC registers Typically the first register controls the state of the object and the second register controls the position along the predefined path As the PLC positi
309. sed object dialogue box show up set each item in the General tab press OK button a new Trigger Data Transfer object will be created See the picture below 274 Source address Destination address Attribute Hew Data Transfer Trgrer based Object General Security Shape Label Description source address PLC name Local HMI h Device type LW w Address 0 Daun tag Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Index register Destination address PLE name Local HMI K Device type LW e Address C System tag Address format ddddd range U 10255 Index register Mode i Trigeer mode ON OFF Ww Trigger address PLE name Addres pa System tag Address format ddddd range 0 11999 Index register Set source address of data transfer No of words The number of words to be transferred from source to destination Destination address for data transfer Set the trig mode of data transfer 2 5 Mode a Touch trigger mode Press the object to activate data transfer operation b External trigger Register a bit device to trigger the data transfer operation ON gt OFF Bit device change from ON to OFF to activate data transfer operation OFF ON Bit device change from OFF to ON to activate data transfer operation ON gt OFF Bit device change states to activate data transfer operation Trigger address PLC
310. settings will be used when pass through is enabled The Baud rate Data bits Parity and Stop bits of Source COM Port and Destination COM Port have to be the same Source COM Port connects PC so select RS232 mode Destination COM Port connects PLC so settings of the COM port depend on the PLC s requirement 669 For an example the illustration below shows the setting when HMI connects SIEMENS 87 200 The HMI COM 1 RS232 connects PC COM 3 RS485 2W connects PLC The communication parameter of PLC is 9600 E 8 1 Before starting pass through users must use the parameters in MTP project and download the project to HMI Device Properties Name SIEMENS 87 200 OHMI PLE PLC type SIEMENS 57200 K CTF R2 495 219 ka COM COM QpUU R 9 11 Interval of block pack words Max read comunand size words Max write conuneand size words After the project is downloaded to HMI open the same project and change the PLC I F and COM port to COM 1 RS232 PC uses COM 1 to connect HMI as follows 670 Device Properties Location Settings PLC type SIEMENS 7200 ha PLC default station no Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words Max read commend size words 33 Max wiite command sze words 32 After that press Pass through to assign HMI IP address for a example 192 168 1 37 Finally press Get HMI Communication Paramete
311. signed to 15mm in the example 8 In Communication settings fill in the IP address of the printer server and same as step 1 assign the port number to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 In Menu gt Objects gt Buttons select Function Key and assign Screen hardcopy to MT Remote Printer Server Hard copy screen to USB disk or printer a creen hard copy Printer MT Remote Printer Server MT Re emote Printer nerve disk 1 USB dika 2 dik 2 Notification 9 Place the Function Key object in the common window window no 4 and you will be able to make screen hardcopies anytime when needed 10 Compile and download your project to the MT8000 HMI Press the Function Key 638 object set in step 9 to make a screen hardcopy e You can also use a PLC Control object to make screen hardcopies e You cannot print alarm information via EasyPrinter EasyPrinter can only communicate with HMI via Ethernet so this feature is unavailable in MT6000 Series History Files MT8000 or MT Remote Backup Server IP 192 168 1 26 Users can upload historical data such as Data Sampling and Event Log history files onto the MT remote backup server with Backup objects C 2 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter In Menu gt Options select Settings and the following dialogue box will appear 639 MTsxxx Remote Printer Server Settings Hardcopy Port number of the serve
312. son TR Online Simulator cna S ves PLC Setting Device address Wiring diagram Pay Attention Before you connect the VF A11 Make sure you have put two switch on of sw1 SW1 Wiring method selector switch 605 RS 485 MT8000 PLC RS485 Toshiba VF S11 9P D SUB male communication port 606 VIGOR VIGOR M Series http www vigorplc com tw HMI Setting Data Bits Stop Bits HMI Station No PLC Station No PLC Setting Communication mode None Device address Px ow H HH H as ow o Cs u ow o o o Aa os Ceo f au os o Ow au os o Cow a s Co a Oo 607 Wiring diagram RS 485 4wire MT8000 VIGOR M series CONT RS485 4w 6pin terminal 9P D SUB Male RS 232 MT8000 RS232 VIGOR M series COM Port 9P D SUB COMI COM2 COM3 3 x aX Pa m 2 RX 6 RX 8 RX 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND 608 Yokogawa FA M3 FA M3 CPU SP35 5N SP55 5N CPU port F3LC11 Computer Link module http www yokogawa com itc itc index en htm HMI Setting ST HH EH H H ma a E HHH H S HH HT H E H HH H nran PLC Station No PLC Setting Communication mode Use Personal Communication Link Use checksum Use End Character Device address x a onom O u O onono T Aa a as ronca T mm Rama a ow o Ov e o S Ow aa oon 609 Wiring diagram RS 232 CPU port MT8000 RS232 CPU port cable 9P D SUB KM11 RS 232 MT8000 RS232 9P D SUB p
313. splay object To set the color of events in different states a Acknowledge b Return to normal c Select box The system draw a highlight box around the latest acknowledged event Format Sequence no Check to add sequence no with event message 272 Set the order to display alarm message Time ascending Put Latest trigger alarm message in the bottom Time descending Put Latest trigger alarm message in the top Event trigger time Display the trigger time with event message Acknowledge time Display the acknowledge time with event message Return to normal time Display the return to normal time with event message Event trigger date Display the event trigger date with event message trigger date trigger time notification time return to normal time 0 172174006 15 26 21 15 26 31 15 26 36 Event 0 when Li 2 12174006 15 26 48 Event 2 when LE The font tab sets the font size and italic attribute The font of event message is set with the event log object 273 13 23 Data Transfer Trigger based Object 13 23 1 Overview Data Transfer Trigger based object can transfer the value from the source register to the destination register The data transfer operation can be activated by pressing the object or setting a trigger bit Data Transfer Triecer based 13 23 2 Configuration Click Data Transfer Trigger based object icon on the toolbar Data Transfer Trigger ba
314. ss LW100 Start time 09 00 00 End time 12 00 00 Write start value 10 Write end value 0 ee CC E 09 00 00 12 00 00 Specify the address where the scheduler performs actions on 310 Power ON Select the action to perform when power is turned on start end action Enable If the MT8000 power is turned ON within the scheduler range the start action 1s performed If the MT8000 power is turned ON outside of the scheduled range the termination action is performed Inside the scheduled range Start time Power ON End time Start action Termination action Outside the scheduled range Power ON Start time End time Termination action Start action Termination action Disable If power is turned ON but the time is later than the Start Time the action is not automatically performed However the termination action is automatically performed Also if the termination action 1s not set the schedule range 1s unable to recognize and the action 1s not performed Word write value These settings are active only when Action Mode is set to Word Write Settings Write start value When performing start action the system will write this value into action address For Constant Designates the value to be written at start time For Address Designates the address used to store the start time value 311 Write end value When performing end action the system will write this value into action address
315. ssword 333 172220 bit 15 b Current status 0000000000000000 LW9222 Logout 89050 123 Chapter 11 Index Register 11 1 Introduction The EB8000 provides 32 index registers for users to use addresses more flexible Via index register users can update object s read write address without changing content of the object under the machine in operation The addresses of the 32 index registers are as follows INDEX 0 LW9200 16 bit INDEX 15 LW9215 16 bit INDEX 16 LW9230 32 bit INDEX 31 LW9260 32 bit INDEX 0 INDEX 15 are 16 bit registers with the range up to 65536 words INDEX 16 INDEX 31 are 32 bit register with the range up to 4G words 11 2 Example of Index Register Here is an example to describe how to use the index registers The Read address will be LW100 when Index register is not checked Read address PLE name Local HMI K Address O System tag Index register 124 But in the illustration below the Read address becomes LW 100 Index 3 when Index register is checked Index 3 represents the value at INDEX 3 LW9203 16bit in other words if the value at the LW9203 is 5 the Read address in the becomes LW105 i e LW100 5 Read address Acoma Address C System tag Index INDEX 3 16 bith v Index register By using index registers users can change object s reading and writing addresses in operation without chang
316. st coming in afterwards will be rejected and users must either operate Enable Output or delete some tasks to make room for new tasks Menu gt Edi Edit To edit a screen hardcopy task Edit Print Job Orientation Scaling Original O Fit To Margin Users can freely change the properties of Orientation Scaling and Margins here To delete the selected tasks permanently Select All To select all tasks from Job List e The backup task is not editable e Edit is available only when a task is selected e Delete is available when at least one task is selected 644 In Download Progress Window users can select the mode to show download progress by clicking the header of the progress column Please see the following illustration From Progr Percentage Display Data Length Display EasyPrinter can reserve up to 10 000 messages in Message Window If a new message comes 1n the oldest message will be deleted To show or hide toolbars To show or hide the status bar Settings Configuration for EasyPrinter Please refer to the following illustrations General 645 Menu Options Description MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings General mervel Hardcopy Port number of the server socket 115 User name Mex length 12 characters admin Password Max length 12 characters 111111 Backup Naming Convention for HMI Folder when writing files a Use IP address O Us HMI name si
317. system Parameter Settings x Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server HMI station no Port no fused as MODBUS server s port no Timer Clock source Extemal device e PLE name Local HMI w Device type LW we 16 bit Unsigned Ww Address 0 Dnne Index register Printer Type SP M D E F COM COM 3 e Band rate 19200 Data bits Parity None we top bite 1 Bit we Pixels of width panels screen hard copy scale 100 pixels ifor 1610 type or 220 niels for 2407 4004 type adora ge space management History data space d OM Max HOB file size 6 0 Hint If change storage space please reset HMT data logs and event logs 5 HMI model Select current HMI model as illustration below MT6056TMTSOS6T 220 x 234 Ww MITOS TM TAOS T 390 x 234 M TpU 70 T M Tau 70T 480 x 2344 MT6104 TAM Tagu TM T9 U4 T 640 x 480 M Tal 21T 200 600 MT8104X 640 x 460 M Ta UA S H M Ta 215 800 x 600 MTS SUS 1024 700 M TpU7UuwaU701 480 234 M Ta 70H MTOLO 7810041 600 x 460 Users are able to resize pop up windows or objects when configuring the project Resize pop up windowsfobjects E General windows Resize pop up windows Keyboard windows Resize keyboard windows Resize funchon key objects 7 LE B HMI station no Set the no of HMI station If with no particular purpose select default Port no Set the port no for HMI It is used as MODBUS server
318. t short 16 bit int 32 bit int 32 bit float 32 bit float 32 bit data_count actual number of 16 bit register read When a GetData is executed using a 32 bit data type int or float the function will automatically convert the data For example macro command main float f GetData f MODBUS 6x 2 1 f will contain a floating point value end macro command Example macro command main bool a bool b 30 short c short d 50 inte int TI 10 double al 10 get the state of LB2 to the variable GetData a Local HMT LB 2 1 get 30 states of LBO LB29 to the variables b 0 b 29 GetData b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 386 get one word from LW2 to the variable c GetData c Local HMI LW 2 1 get 50 words from LWO LW49 to the variables d 0 d 49 GetData d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 get 2 words from LW6 LW7 to the variable e note that he type of e 1s int GetData e Local HMI LW 6 1 get 20 words 10 integer values from LWO LW19 to f 0 Hng since each integer value occupies 2 words GetData f 0 Local HMI LW 0 10 get 2 words from LW2 LW3 to the variable f GetData f Local HMI LW 2 1 end macro command SetData send datalstart device name device type address offset data count Description or SetData send data device name device type address offset 1 Send data to the PLC Data is
319. t l COM 1 2 COM2 3 COM3 LW9902 Destination COM port 1 COM 1 2 COM2 3 COM3 COM 1 mode settings LW9550 PLC I F 0 RS232 1 RS485 2W 2 RS485 4W LW9551 baud rate 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 LW9552 data bits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits LW9553 parity 0 none L even 2 odd LW9554 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits 668 COM 2 mode settings LW9556 baud rate 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 LW9557 data bits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits LW9558 parity U none even LW9559 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits COM 3 mode setting LW9560 PLC I F 0 RS232 L RS485 2W LW9561 baud rate 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 LW9562 data bits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits LW9563 parity 0 none L even LW9564 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits Click Get HMI Communication Parameters to update HMI current states and communication parameters F 2 2 HMI Work Mode There are three work modes in the pass through function Unknown Before getting the settings of HMI the work mode is displayed Unknown The work mode Normal means that PC can t control PLC via HMI Pass through HMI is working on pass through state at this time the PC application can control PLC via source com port Source COM Port Destination COM Port The communication parameters of source and destination COM port are displayed on these two areas The
320. t b switch float pressure Declaring Arrays Macros support one dimensional arrays zero based index To declare an array of variables specify the type the variable name then the number variables in the array enclosed in brackets Arrays are to 4096 variables in length Macros only support up to 4096 variables per macro Example int al 10 short b 20 switch 30 float pressure 15 357 Minimum of array index is 0 and maximum of array index is array size 1 Example char data 100 array size is 100 where minimum of array index is 0 and maximum of array index is 99 100 1 Variable and Array Initialization There are two ways variables can be initialized 1 By statement using the assignment operator Example int a float b 3 a 10 b O 1 2 During declaration char a 5 b 9 The declaration of arrays is a special case An entire array can be initialized during declaration by enclosing comma separated values inside curly brackets Example float data 4 11 22 33 44 now data 0 is 11 data 1 is 22 18 2 2 Operators Operations are used to designate how data is to be manipulated In each statement the operator on the left 1s set to the conditions on the right 358 con TT T tein T Greater than or equal if A lt 10 then B 5 if A lt gt 10 then B 5 Ror Condon Eehve OR A nor 256 hen B 5 O Shift and bitwise operators are used t
321. t for multiple lines The picture below shows how the text to be aligned when Left in Align is set 111 222222 333333333 The picture below shows how the text to be aligned when Center in Align is set 111 222222 333333333 The picture below shows how the text to be aligned when Right in Align is set 111 222222 333333333 Blink Select the blink feature of the text Choose None to disable the feature or choose blinking period as 1 second or 0 5 seconds 107 Italic Use Italic font Italic Label Underline Use Underline font Underline Label Movement setting Direction Set the direction of the movement of the marquee effect No movement a No movement Two options for the marquee to be displayed Continuous When Continuous isn t be checked the next text appears only after the previous text disappears completely See the picture below When Continuous 1s selected the text will be displayed continuously 108 Speed Set the speed of the text movement Content Set the content of the text If using the Label Library the content will be sourced from the Label Library Duplicate this label to other states This function is used to duplicate the current text content to the other states Tracking When Tracking 1s selected moving the text of one state will also move the text of other states 9 3 1 Adjusting
322. t must be a variable Example macro command main int source result short bit_pos SETBITOFF 9 result 3 result is 1 source 4 bit pos 2 SETBITFF source result bit_pos result is 0 end macro command INVBIT source result bit pos Description Inverts the state of designated bit position of a data source and put in changed data into result source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro command main int source result short bit_pos INVBIT 4 result 1 result 6 source 6 bit pos 1 INVBIT source result bit pos result 4 3 8 end macro command 18 5 5 Communication DELAY ine Description Suspends the execution of the current macro for at least the specified interval time The unit of time is millisecond time can be a constant or a variable Example macro command maint int time 500 DELAY 100 delay 100 ms DELAY time delay 500 ms end macro command DELAY ine Description Suspends the execution of the current macro for at least the specified interval time The unit of time is millisecond time can be a constant or a variable Example macro command maint int time 500 DELAY 100 delay 100 ms DELAY time delay 500 ms end macro command ADDSUM source start result data_count Description Adds up the elements of an array source from source start to source start data count 1 to generat
323. t this R W R W time set the state at ON and the system will try to connect to the PLC device again The number of the driver that is used by LW 930n R R R local PLC device The number of unprocessed commands that LW 935n R R R are gave to the local PLC device 22 12 Client Connected to Server Remote Address Description HMI Control LB 9016 Set ON when client connects to server LW 9006 The number of clients connected to server 440 22 13 MODBUS Server Station no device station no COM 1 if configured as LW 9541 Modbus server device station no COM 2 if configured as LW 9542 R W R Modbus server device station no COM 3 if configured as LW 9543 R W R R W Modbus server device station no Ethernet if configured LW 9544 W R W R W as Modbus server 22 14 COM Communication Remote Address Description HMI i Control Set LB9030 from OFF to ON force the LB 9030 system to use LW9550 LW9554 as new communication parameter of COM1 COM 1 mode T 0 RS232 1 RS232 2W 2 RS232 4W COM I baud rate 0 4800 1 9600 LW 9551 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 COM 1 data bits LW 9552 7 7 bits 8 8 bits COM parity 0 none LW 9553 l even 2 odd 441 LW 9554 LB 9031 LW 9556 LW 9557 LW 9561 COM stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits Set LB9031 from OFF to ON force the system to use LW9556 LW9559 as new communication parameter of COM2 COM 2 baud rate 0 4800 1
324. ta O Y data 1 n u n ae srs n 4 n gt The following setting 1s for 32 bit float data format and dynamic limits Address 100 100 2 100 4 100 6 100 65 100 10 256 E low limit 2 high limit Y lows limit Y high limit A data O Y data 1 n 0 1 n 3 nt 4 5 n 6 T n n 9 n 10 11 There are four different type of selection to designate memory location for high low limits and XY data Please refer to the following settings Data O DataD Min Min Data 1 Data 1 Wax lax Data 2 Data 2 Data U Datal Data 3 Data 3 Data 1 Data Data 2 Data of Y A Y x Data A Min Y Datad A Max x Data 1 Y Min Y Data Y Max x Data XDataO Y Data Y Data Y Data 3 Data 1 Y Data 3 Y Data 1 l A Data Y Data If dynamic limit is checked you may change the high and low limits to realize zoom in and zoom out function Please refer trend display object s dynamic limit In the following example the dynamic limit is selected where XL X low limit XH X high limit YL Y low limit YH Y high limit and XY XY1 XY2 are three XY data Now we change the high limit of X and Y respectively and you may observe the effect of zoom in and zoom out 25 7 1 Change Y high limit to 25 for zoom in effect 2 Change Y high limit to 100 for zoom out effect 258 Display Area Profile color Curve XY Plot Objects Properties Ca General Display Area Shape Profile
325. tem Parameter Settings dt de Extended rez Printer Server vli MT Remote Printer Server Note Use EasyPinter to configure PL for prmting screen hardcopy and storme backup data Output settings Orientation Horizontal C7 Vertical Printer size 9 Original size O Fit to printer margins Margin 15 mm a Communication sethnes IP addres 192 log 1 26 Port 8005 User name admin password 111111 In Communication settings fill the IP address of the printer server and same as 7 step 1 assign port number to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 In Menu 3 Objects select Backup and the following dialogue box will appear 641 New Backup Object a Gao x Desorption DOUCE GEW ORW A Event log O Data log Backup position k OUBl Sp 7 Remote printer server Note Use L W9032 9029 to change the backup folder name Note Use Remote printer server to store data to a remote PL Enable remote printime in svete Pacrameter Printer Server settings Range Stat 8 Today O Yesterday Within All ttribute Mode Touch trigger ka 8 In Source select Event log 9 In Backup position select Remote printer server 10 In Range select Today and AII 11 In Attribute select Touch trigger 12 Place the Backup object in the common window window no 4 and you will be able to make backups anytime when
326. tend address mode PLC Setting Device address Wiring diagram EUOS series MT8000 PLC 485 RS485 port Red Power Blue 9P D SUB 2 o COMI COM3 A RX anna RX Yellow O rs RX Green 5 GND 5 GND 4 GND Black Green Yellow 484 HITACHI H series CPU port Compatible PLCs HITACHI EH 150 Micro EH H20 H40 H64 H200 H250 H252 H300 H302 H700 H702 H1000 H series H1002 H2000 H4010 HITACHI Web site http www hitachi ies co jp english products plc index htm HMI Setting PLC type HITACHI H Series Com port Must match the PLC s port setting Baud rate Must match the PLC s port setting Parity bit Must match the PLC s port setting Data Bits Must match the PLC s port setting Stop Bits Must match the PLC s port setting HMI Station No PLC Station No Does not apply to this protocol PLC Setting Cse CS 485 Device address Device Bit Word Format Range Memo Type e x mo mormor TT e v mo momoo emen Ce r wo momoo A man e k mo momor meiouo e ft ey CN eann Cw e m O o Toana wx w w Wiring diagram WARNING If your communications cable is not wired exactly as shown in our cable assembly instructions damage to the MT8000 or loss of communications can result EH 150 CPU 208A swan Y pr Nominee H mare rats sa T Port settine torele switch oN soo oven on pows o Mode set
327. ter gt by lt StepValue gt lt EndValue gt Required The test point If the lt Counter gt is greater than this value the macro 363 C OoOO OO O OOOO Optional Specifies that a lt StepValue gt other than one is to be used StepValue Optional The increment decrement step of lt Counter gt It can be omitted when the value is 1 If step lt StepValue gt are omitted the step value defaults to 1 Statements Statements to execute when the evaluation is TRUE for next loops may be nested Counter Optional This is used when nesting for next loops 18 3 4 2 while wend Statements The while wend construction is for stepping through an unknown number of iterations A variable is used to test for ending conditions When the condition is TRUE the statements are executed repetitively until the condition becomes FALSE The syntax 1s as follows while lt Condition gt Statements wend Example while a lt 10 a a t 10 wend Syntax description continue Required This is the controlling statement When it is TRUE the loop begins execution When it is FALSE the loop terminates Indicates the end of the while end statements 18 3 4 3 Other Control Commands Used in for next and while wend It skips immediately to the end of the 364 S C continue Used in for next and while wend It ends the current iteration of a loop and starts the next one 18 4 Function Blocks F
328. the next button to continue the setting of the other state 337 Get Graph Graph file State U DAF Yellow 0 State 0 bmp State l Width 100 Height 100 Size 30054bwtes Y Transparent Before choosing transparent color check Transparent box first and then left click on location to be of the graph At this time EB8000 will automatically display RGB value of the transparent color Take above as an example the actual shape shows as below Step 4 Likewise select the source of a picture state 1 and select the correct transparent color for it After the completion of the settings click the Finished button 338 Get Graph Graph file State 1 DAF Yellow 0 State 1 bmp State 1 Width 100 Height 100 Size 30054 bytes Transparent Cancel Below shows the complete picture is created A new picture F Yellow can be found in the Picture Library Manager dialogue box From the information we know the picture is in the format of bitmap and with two states Library Graph name 0 F Yellow Total states d Image size 30054 BMP 339 Chapter 15 Label Library and Using Multi Language Label Library is used in the Multi Language environment Users can design the content of Label Library according to the real demands Select the suitable label from Label Library when text is needed 15 1 Introduction The system in operation will display the corresponding text to the
329. the keypad displayed and set the position in the window When the ASCII Input object is activated the popup window of keypad will appear automatically Refer to the Designing and Using Keypad chapter for further information 184 New ASCII Input Object General Security Shape Font Content Attribute The picture shows the Font tab of the ASCII Input object and the ASCII display object Users can set the font font size and color and aligning mode Athibute Font Comic Sans ME M Color 7 ee 12 9 Align Align There are two aligning modes Left and Right The picture below shows 185 how each mode performs Left alignment ab bde Right alignment ab bde Size Set font size 186 13 11 Indirect Window Object 13 11 1 Overview Indirect window object is to define a popup window location position size and a word device When the content of the word device is written a valid window number the window will be popup in the predefined location The popup window will be closed when the value of the word device is reset 0 The system will only take action when the content of word device is changed 0 valid window number nonzero 0 A gt B valid window number 13 11 2 Configuration Click the indirect window icon on the toolbar and the New Indirect Window Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items click OK button a new In
330. tically activated in pre configured conditions the touch area is no action at any circumstance 13 3 2 Configuration Click the Set Bit icon in the toolbar and the New Set Bit Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items and press OK button a new Set Bit object will be created See the pictures below 144 Hew Set Bit Object General Security Shape Label Description PLE name Local HMI K Write address Device type LB e Mes ran be Address format ddddd range 0 11999 Index register Write after button is released Setsle Toge A Macro v Execute macro Macro TAD 1 AD 1 s Trigger mode ON OFF ORR S0N ON gt OFF CFF e SUN Description A reference name that assigned with the object the system does not take use of his reference name it is for user document only Write address Select the PLC name device type address of the bit device that system set value to Write after If this function is selected the operation is activated at touch up If the function is button is not selected the operation is activated at touch down If the Momentary switch released is selected as the operation mode the Write after button is released function will be ignored Attribute Please refer to the following description for different type of operation mode Set Style 145 Set ON When the operation is activated the bit device will be set to ON
331. time 1 0 condis w Read address Select the PLC name device type address of the word device that controls the word lamp object Attribute The number of the object s states The state number begins from 0 to no of States No of states 1 Supposed that the number of the states is 8 the valid states will be 0 1 2 7 When the word value is more than no of states 1 the system will display the shape of last state 13 2 3 Restrictions In label dialog Language 1 is able to change attribute settings for Language 2 8 only font size can be changed and other settings follows language 1 Word Lamp Obpet s Properties i Word Lemp Objects Properties General Shape Label Profil General Shape Label Profil iUs label U label e Use label library Label tag Label 0 v Use label bban Label tag Label 0 v LabelLibmry Label Library ao Jaja L Hata Font Color EE Color Align Left w Blink None Align Tale C Undertine Duplcaie these attribubes to every state Duplicate these attribute do every bk Mowemmnt Mo MET Dirschi n No movement we Dimchon 143 13 3 Set Bit Object 13 3 1 Overview The Set Bit object provides two operation modes the manual operation mode defines a touch area users can activate the touch area to set the state of the bit device to be ON or OFF When users select the automatic operation mode the operation will be automa
332. ting DIP switch Dedicated port MA 486 Jr baat ON tow poms T ON in ane OFF Low orr 0 OFF Toggle Switc h Low ips acia EH 150 portl RS232 MT8000 RS 232 HITACHI EH 150 9P D SUB port COM2 Spin RJ45 Male o ON ON OFF OFF EH150portl RS485 4wire RS422 EasyView MT8000 HMI Hitachi EH 150 PLC RS485port portl 9PinD SUB FEMALE 8PinRJ45port EH150portl RS485 2wire Easy View MT8000 HMI Hitachi EH 150 port PLC RS485 port 8PinRJ45 port 9PinD SUB FEMALE 487 EH 150 port2 RS232 MT8000 PLC 232 9P D SUB Male EEN E E E DE E ooo MT8000 PLC 232 9P D SUB Male H series CPU RS232 port HITACHI H series CPU RS232 15p D SUB Male MT8000 PLC 232 9P D SUB Male 488 HITACHI EH 150 port2 Spin RJ45 Male 5 SD 6 RD 1 SG 7 DR 8 RS HITACHI EH 150 port2 8pin RJ45 Male Port 2 Spin RJ 45 Female Port 2 8pin RJ 45 Female MICRO EH port RS232 MT8000 RS 232 9P D SUB 489 HITACHI EH 150 portl 8pin RJ45 Male IDEC IDEC Micro3 Micro3C MicroSmart OpenNet Controller series http www idec com HMI Setting HMI Station No Does not apply to this protocol PLC Station No 255 for 1 1 connect 255 or same as the PLC setting Online Simulator Extend address mode YES Dom set the PLC Station No 255 PLC Setting 9600 E 7 1 default Use Computer Link Protocol Device address ddd 0 9999 Ti
333. tion Click the Function Key icon on the toolbar and the Function Key Object s Properties dialogue box will appear fill in each items and press the OK button a new function key object will be created See the pictures below 155 Hew Function Key Object General Security Shape Label Activate after button is released Change fullacreen window O Change common window Display popup window Window no 50 Keypad 1 Integer v Retum to previous window O Close window ASCIVUNICODE mode O Enter Backspace O Clear O Es ASCII 7 UNICODE Hard copy screen to USB disk or printer O Screen hard copy Enable O Set OFF PLC name Local HMI w Device type LB a au system tae Address format ddddd range U 11999 Index register Function Key object provides the following operation modes Active after If this function is selected the operation is activated at touch up If the function is not button is selected the operation is activated at touch down released Change Change base window full screen NOTE Do not use this function to pop up the window which has been opened by Window direct indirect window object Change Change common window refer to the windows chapter for related information Common 156 Winer AN Display Popup Pop up window The pop up window must be on the top of the base window There is Window
334. tion is normal When the state is OFF it indicates the disconnection to the PLC device at this time set the state at ON and the system will try to connect the PLC device again The registers can be used to indicate the states of communication with the PLC device on COM 2 LB9500 is to indicate the states of communication with the PLC on the station no 0 LB9501 is to indicate the states of communication with the PLC on the station no 1 and so on When the state is ON it indicates the communication is normal When the state is OFF it indicates the disconnection to the PLC device at this time set the state at ON and the system will try to connect to the PLC device again 439 The registers can be used to indicate the states of communication with the PLC device on COM 3 LB9800 is to indicate the states of communication with the PLC on the station no 0 LB9801 is to indicate the states of LB 9800 communication with the PLC on the station LB 10055 no 1 and so on R W R W When the state 1s ON it indicates the communication is normal When the state is OFF it indicates the disconnection to the PLC device at this time set the state at ON and the system will try to connect to the PLC device again The registers can be used to indicate the states of communication with the PLC device on the Ethernet port LB 10100 LB 10131 When the state is OFF it indicates the disconnection to the PLC device a
335. to input to LW 9004 the current data input object LW 9005 The data format is 32 bit float Data stream input from the keypad saved in LW 9150 the ASCII format and the length of data is LW 9181 32 words Reserved for the use of the Caps Lock key LW 9540 R R R on the keypad 22 3 Recipe Data Remote Address Description amp HMI i Control ON when recipe data is in download LB 9010 l R R R operation LB 9011 ON when recipe data is in upload operation ON when recipe data is in either ae R LB 9012 or upload operation 433 If it 1s set ON all recipe data will be clear W W W set to 0 The MT8000 will save recipe data RW and RWA on the flash memory every 5 minutes If it is set ON recipe data will be compulsorily saved on the flash memory LB 9029 22 4 Task Button and Fast Selection Window Remote Address Description HMI Control If it is set ON the Fast Selection Window is LB 9013 disable LB 9014 If it is set ON the Task Button is disable W If it is set ON both the Fast Selection Window and Task Button is disable LB 9015 22 5 Event Logging Remote Address Description HMI Control Clear all event logs of the day when bit is set LB 9021 ON W W The oldest event log message will be deleted LB 9022 o W W W when bit is set ON Clear all event logs in the MT8000 when bit LB 9023 W W W is set ON The MT8000 will recalculate the file sizes of LB 9024 o W W W
336. tof decimal PL 5 El Right of decimal Pt Dish heating ano Chanel 4 16 bit Unsigned _ Display Each history data display object can display up to 20 channels You can select the channels which you want to watch on the screen In the example below there are four channels in the data sampling object ch O and ch 3 are selected for display only The data format of each channel is decided by the related data sampling objects 236 Hew History Data Display Object General Data Format Title Use title Title background OK 237 Title Use title To enable or disable title New History Data Display Object General Data Format Title Use title Title background Transparent Title Transparent background To enable or disable transparent Background color Set the background color of title Setting This dialogue window defines the title Ak T O You can use label tag library for title with multi language Go to setting and select one from label library Title Setting 13 18 3 Note If you have run the off line simulation and the sampling data is saved in the record then you want to change the format of sampling data be sure to delete previous data record in C EB8000 datalog to avoid the system misinterpret the old data record 238 13 19 Data Block Display 13 19 1 Overview Data Block is a combinati
337. ts the result data the converting formula 1s as follows B Engineering low A Input low x ratio where the ratio Engineering high Engineering low Input high Input low See the example in the picture below the raw data is 15 after being converted by the above formula as 10 15 0 x 50 10 20 0 40 and the result 40 will be displayed on the numeric input object Scaling option Do conversion Engineering low Engineering high Limits 2 Direct O Dynamit limits To set the source of the range for the input data and to set the warning color effect 178 Direct The low limit and high limit of the input data can be set in Input low and Input high respectively If the input data is out of the defined range the input value will be ignored Dynamic limits Limits O Diet 2 Dymamic limits Device type Device address Index register Low limit E Ra High init Ss S Set the low limit and high limit of the input data to be derived from the designated register The data length of the designated register is the same as the input object itself In the above example the low limit and high limit are derived from LW100 and the following explains the usage of the low limit and high limit from designated address a If the input object data format is 32 bitBCD then LW 100 low limit position 32 bit BCD LW100 2 high limit position 32 bit BCD
338. ttings Modify the definition of a data sampling 8 2 Create a New Data Sampling Click New and the Data Sampling Object setting dialog appears as below Data Sampling Object eum a TT H Time based Tigzer based Clear addes mA V Enable Derce v wes IR semte index vegistex Sampling time interval 1 second s Read addes O L TT 7 o e RS TD gt wre H arena Sasa index register Hist es Save to HMI emaor Save to CF cand V Seve to USB 1 C Save to USB 2 Poles nae Y Preservation limit Days of pueservation 2 days Data Recowd Mex data eoods 1000 C Anto stop r aaas Data length 4 ds 92 Read address Max data records Max data records can be saved to a data sampling definition Example Condition Set Max data records as 10 Set Max data records as 10 with without check auto stop check auto stop Trend display real time The data will keep latest 10 Stop displaying be a nini Data sampling Keep recording and delete Stop recording a Data Format The format of a data sampling A data sampling may include more than one type of records EB8000 is able to retrieve different types of records at the same time After clicking Data Format user use Data Format dialog to define the content of a record Take the following as an example users define three types of data Index 16 bit Uns
339. u ENET module settings as below steps 1 Open GX Developer select Read from PLC in Online list 529 x MELSOFT series GX Developer Project Edit Find Replace View Mais Diagnostics Tools Window Help D ba E aelel Transfer setup Read from PLC Write to PLC Verify with PLC Write to PLC Flash ROM Delete PLC data Change PLC data attributes PLC user data NN Pe Leap Las TN TT AS aF5 aF atel aral abil cF9 Monitor Debug Trace Remote operation Redundant operation Program memory batch transfer Latch data backup operation Safety CPU operation Keyword setup Clear PLC memory Format PLC memory Arrange PLC memory Set time Project Reads data from the PLC T fz 2 Select FXCPU in PLC series Select PLC series 3 Users have to connect PLC via series port for setting IP address at first time 530 Transfer Setup PC side LF TE Cont NRT CC Link ALE board board PLE side LF P FE USB 4 W FE30 USB BD C TSBIGOT transparent mode Other k TSE Builtin port station ETF A COM port com 1 Time out Sec E E ae Transmssion speed 115 2Kbps al Network route C24 CL IR Cont NETAD CC Link Ethemet NET10 H Co existence network route Cad E ie na NR TUD COC Link Ethemet Accessing host station 4 After finishing the PLC setti
340. ug Maintenance Tool Window Help New Project So gla she lee L JL Sp 7 50 mAT d pen Project Hi Pe j a Close Project 181281 02 8119 EG 2 3 Sa Saye Project New Ctrl H Open 5 Close Baye Ctri s Dave S Print Setup Prini Ctrl P pen CADMGS Executable Frogra miD Open OADM Filey Exit RDY RUN ALM ERR step Run ms LE vX Stop Install RON SCE ms Creates a new project 2 click Configuration for setup communication e Project J Executable program Ra alll Component Definition E Configuration E Common Tag Name De LS Block Components J Block List _J Macro List 612 613 Set Use Personal Checksum L End Character 614 Yokogawa FA M3 Ethernet FA M3 CPU SP35 5N SP55 5N with F3LE01 5T F3LE11 0T Ethernet module http www yokogawa com ttc 1tc index en htm HMI Setting Yokogawa FA M3 PLC ope Bim O Compare Emme OOOO EMI Station No O PL Saro No O PLC Setting Communication mode Set IP Address Set all condition setup switch OFF Right side View Example Setting the IP address to 192 166 250 210 Operating Condition Setup Switch IMM Hexa co AB FA D2 decimal I IF Address Setup Switch Decimal 192 168 250 210 Device address a x w Taman e v w ooms w o o s o a os T o w w e w o wa os o w ef ws ft o w v w o H 615
341. unction blocks are useful for reducing repetitive codes must be defined before use and can use any variable and statement type A function block is called by putting its name followed by parameters in parenthesis in the Main Macro Function After the function block 1s executed it returns the value to the Main Function where it is used as an assignment or condition The syntax is as follows sub type lt name gt parameters Local variable declarations Statements return value end sub Example sub int Add int x int y int result result x y return result end sub macro command maint mt a 10 b 20 sum sum Add a b end macro command Syntax description Must be used to begin the function block Required This 1s the data type of value that the function returns parameters Optional The parameters hold values that are passed to the function by the Main Macro The passed parameters must have their type declared in the parameter field and assigned a variable name For example sub int MyFunction int x int y x and y would be integers 365 passed to the function by the Main Macro This function is called by a statement that looks similar to this ret MyFunction 456 pressure Notice that the calling statement can pass hard coded values or variables to the function After this function is executed an integer values is return to 6 gt ret Local variable Variables that are used in th
342. urth data in data block The system writes data index and the content of watched data to the watch address as shown in the following picture 248 Channel 1 Channel 2 Watch 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned address Watch indicator de 50 Index 16 bit BCD 40 32 bit 30 unsigned 20 10 1 Data Index 1s a 16 bit unsigned integer when the designated register of cursor line 1s 32 bit device 1t will be stored in the bit 0 15 2 The watch function can only inspect current value in the data block If there are multiple trend curves of the same channel on the screen the data of previous trend curves 1s not exist only the latest value 1s available for watch 3 If the trend curve is cleared when position the cursor line the 0 will be displayed as shown below Channel 1 Channel Watch 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned address Watch indicator 2 Control Index Ho of Data 16 bit BCD anl 2 32 bit 3 unsigned 1 Data 2 Data 3 10 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 4 If there are only three data in Channel 1 when position the cursor in Data 4 the 0 will be displayed as shown below 249 Channel 1 Channel 2 Watch 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned address Index Watch indicator 50 E 1 NN 16 bit BCD m 2 32 bit 3 unsigned 20 4 10 13 19 3 6 Limitation The maximum number of channels is 12 1 The system can draw up to 32 trend curves 2 The system can draw up to 1024 points f
343. v V Sum check Transmission speed Transmission control procedure 19200 bps Fom v Transmission speed Transmission control procedure 19200 y bps Form v Station number setting F 01 H 0OH OFH Time out judge time ja 1 Xl0ms 1 255 Default Check End Cancel Station number setting E 01 H 0OH OFH Time out judge time a 1 E1lOms 1 255 Default Check End Cancel 523 FX2N 485 BD FX1N 485 BD FX2N 232 BD FX1N 232 BD Device address Device Bit Word Format Range Memo Type Pe x on mew pe fy we ea or aa 0959 pae aa ass Timer Rey Cau 0259 Comes Pav aaa os mame Cov a ow T aaae Co aw oww maan Wiring diagram Communication Module RS232BD MT8000 RS232 9P D SUB oaf ara 20 A EAN Communication Module RS485BD MT8000 COM1 485BD Module RS 485 4w 5P terminal 9P D SUB Male 232BD Module 9P D SUB Female 524 Communication Module RS485BD MT8000 RS 485 2Wire RS485BD Module 9P D SUB 5P terminal IE ee SO 525 MITSUBISHI FX3U Mitsubishi FX3U FX3UC http www mitsubishi automation com HMI Setting Parameters Option Notes Com port RS232 R5485 2w 4w Baud rate 9600 19200 must same as the PLC setting Parity bit Data Bits must same as the PLC setting must same as the PLC setting must same as the PLC setting HMI Station No Does not apply to this protocol PLC Station No Does not apply to thi
344. ve the settings of the current data format template so that users can load it every time when needed without recreating it repeatedly The template data will be stored in data fmt file in the EasyBuilder8000 installation directory Delete Format Delete an existed data format template Select your data Select an existed data format template for examining the recipe or EMI format select your data format Data Type Description PELES 16 bit BCD C 32 bit BCD 16 bit HEX C 32 bit HEX 16 bit Unsigned C 16 bit Signed 32 bit Unsigned C 32 bit Signed Float String WORDf s conce First you can assign a readable name as Description for the column And select the correct data type for the column If String 1s selected as data type you must specify the length of the string in addition 620 A 2 Setting of Recipe Editor How to Add a Recipe EMI File 1 In Menu gt File select New and the following dialogue will appear Sel Data Format Address range unit word Selec your date formeat _ A seve Format Data Type 16 bit BCD C l bt HEX e ea Unsigned Sting WORD a 621 3 After all the settings finish a new document appears as follow 4 Recipe Extended Memory Editor New document File Edit View Window Help D SW hel 4 Hew document Seles 4 Users can view and modify the data in the sheet 5 In M
345. visiting Weintek Labs Inc s website at http www weintek com to obtain all software versions available including Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese French Korean Italian Spanish and English version and latest upgraded files Hardware Requirements Recommended CPU INTEL Pentium II or above Memory 64MB or above Hard Disk 2 5GB or above Disc space available at least 10MB CD ROM 4X or above Display 256 color SVGA with 800 x 600 resolution or greater Keyboard and Mouse Ethernet for project downloading uploading RS 232 COM At least one available RS 232 serial port required for on line simulation Printer Operating System Windows 2000 Windows NT Windows XP Windows Vista 1 2 Steps to Install EasyBuilder 8000 1 Installing EasyBuilder 8000 Put the EasyBuilder Installation CD into the CD drive The autorun should bring up a screen showing an area to click to begin the Easybuilder installation If the Autorun sequence does not start browse the CD find the root directory of Autorun exe manually 11 iowenrex EasyBuilder8000 Install Document Library Drivers F Toject www weintek com 2 Choose Install and click Next to follow the installation instructions 5 EasyBuilder 8000 42 00 Build 2009 07 02 Welcome to the EasyBuilder 8000 Y2 0 0 Build 2009 02 02 Setup Wizard The installer will guide pon through the steps required to install EasyBuilder 800012 0 0 Build 2009 02 02 on p
346. vo fT PLC Setting Device address e mc ou ou 0 2047 Retentive Timer Coil 535 X SS SC os mme Ow m om mnm a owm aa Om oe ee Ca oon ieor vae a oo Reve Tine Coen Vas Ca oms comerme vale Oe uu owm me Ow m o e ne aaae w p w owm verse ddd Decimal hhh Hexadecimal ooo Octal Biv Word B B B B B B Bo Wiring diagram RS 232 MT8000 RS232 Q02 a 9P D SUB CPU port 2 loUols COMI COM2 COM3 Mini DIN 6pin pas 2 RX 6 RX 8 RX 4 TXD 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND MINI DIN 6Pin Female 536 MITSUBISHI Q06H Mitsubishi QO6H CPU port http www mitsubishi automation com HMI Setting cope aapna OOOO OOOO IT E ann O sane TT maas S o CHH Online Simulator ole rndentcommea vo fT PLC Setting Device address e mc ou ou 0 2047 Retentive Timer Coil 537 X SS SC os mme Ow m om mnm a owm aa Om oe ee Ca oon ieor vae a oo Reve Tine Coen Vas Ca oms comerme vale Oe uu owm me Ow m o e ne aaae w p w owm verse ddd Decimal hhh Hexadecimal ooo Octal Biv Word B B B B B B Bo Wiring diagram RS 232 MT8000 RS232 Q06 a 9P D SUB CPU port 2 lo D A E Mini DIN 6pin p Ta 3 Tx 4 Tx 7 Tx 3 rR cae 2 RX 6 RX 8 RX 14 TXD _ El MINI DIN 6Pin Female 538 MITSUBISHI QJ71 Mitsubishi Q series PLC with QJ71C24 communication module
347. w Style Exit 76 6 2 2 Window Settings EB8000 provides two methods to modify window attributes a Right click on the assigned window from window tree and select Settings to change the window properties 11 show Too 12 13 Object 14 Function 15 Security 16 Commun 1m dn lose b Select Open Window from menu and Open Window dialog appears Select Settings to change the window properties 6 2 3 Open Close and Delete a Window To open an existing window except double click the window No from the window tree users can right click the assigned window from the window tree and choose Open to open the window Similarly close or delete an existing window as the procedure above Please note that the window to be deleted has to be in close status 17 Chapter 7 Event Log Event log is used to identify the content of an event and the conditions triggering this event In addition the triggered event also called as alarm and the processing procedure of the event can be saved to the designate areas such as HMI memory or external storage devices in the form of EL _yyyymmdd evt where yyyymmdd indicates the time of the file created set by the system automatically For example a file name of event EL 20061127 evt means the file was created on Nov 27 2006 EB8000 also provides the following system registers to manage the event log LB 9021 reset current event log set ON LB
348. wboard Use an extemal keyboard Window no o Popup position relative to HMI screen Hint If the keyboard is an USB keyboard on indirectidirect window or on the same window please check Use an extemal keyboard Use UNICODE Click Use UNICODE to display data in UNICODE format Otherwise the system displays the character in ASCII format This feature can be used with function key UNICODE Not every Unicode has corresponding font stored in the system The font of UNICODE is only available for those Unicode character that registered function key Reverse In normal condition the ASCII code is displayed in low byte high byte order high low byte The reverse selection make the system display ASCII characters in high byte low byte order Read address Select the PLC name device typel address of the word device that system 182 Notification Input order display its value and write new data to It No of words To set the length of ASCII data in the unit of words Each ASCII character take one byte each word contains two ASCII characters In the example shown below the object will display 3 2 6 characters abbdef When this function 1s selected the state of the designated bit device will be set to ON or OFF after the value of the word devices are changed successfully Enable Make notification selection enable Before writing To set the state of the bit devi
349. will display a cursor line on the data block display object and transfer the position of cursor and the data at the cursor position to the designated registers Please refer 19 3 On line operation for further information Select each channel and set the attributes Control PLC name Select the PLC where the target data block located Device type Select the device type where the target data block located Control word address Control word 1s used to control and clear trend curve display 0 NO0 action default 1 Plot trend curve 2 Clear trend curve 3 Redraw trend curve After executing the operation above the system will reset the control word to ZETO No of data address No of data address is default as Control word address 1 No of data is to store the number of word device in each data block 1 e the number of data to plot in trend curve The maximum value is 1024 Data storage start address If offset to start address is disabled the Data storage start address is default as Control word address 2 Offset value storage address If offset to start address 1s enabled the Data storage start address 1s Offset value storage Control word address the Offset value storage address 1s default as Control word address 2 Format If you select 16 bit data format the address of each data will be start address 241 start addr
350. wnloading is done Click Download button to start downloading the project 31 Chapter 4 Hardware Settings 4 1 I O Ports of HMI a USB Host Support devices with USB interfaces such as mouse keyboard USB stick printer etc b Ethernet Port Connect devices with Ethernet communication interface such as PLC laptop etc support exchanging data via Network c Compact Flash Card Support the download upload of a project including recipe transfer Event Log Data etc d Serial I O Port COM ports RS 232 RS485 2w 4w can be connected to PLC or other peripheral devices Here we view RS 422 as the same as RS 485 4 wire Please refer to the PLC connecting guide appendix in the manual to make sure the correct connection between PLC and HMI Meanwhile please make sure all DIP switches are on OFF down position default value in HMI operations 32 In addition Weintek provides MT8 COM1 Multi Connector cable and MT8 COM3 Multi Connector cable to expand one COM port to multiple independent COM ports so that the efficiency of the operation will be improved 4 2 HMI System Settings Before operating HMI users have to complete the HMI system settings After the setup use EB80000 editing software to develop a personal operation interface The following illustrates each system setting respectively 4 2 1 System Reset Each HMI is equipped with a set of reset button and DIP switch When users use
351. xe 8 com exe xob_pos def 9 gui exe 10 xob_pos def 11 EasySimulator exe Users can find all the above files in EasyBuilder8000 installation directory which means users have to install EasyBuilder8000 software package on a PC and copy the files to the target PC D 2 Modify the Content of xob_pos def Stepl Open xob_pos def using a text editing tool e g Notepad off line 1 on line ci Easysimulator define the directory of com exe and gui exe ci Easysimulator MmT8000_Demo_200x600 xob define the directory of xob Tile 654 0 Perform Offline simulation 1 Perform Online simulation Specify the full path where the files e g com exe gui exe EasySimulator exe etc locate Easy Simulator exe COM Gace Easy Simulator MFC Application MT8056 bmp MT68070 bmp qui exe BZD x 390 bee x 456 Bitmap Image Bitmap Image MT8100 brmp 18104 bmp MT8121 bmp 968 x 7 62 o16 614 1036 FF Bitmap Image Bitmap Image Bitmap Image MT6150 bmp Kob pos def 1207 x 963 Export Definition File Bitmap Image IR WL INTER Communication Becomes Easv nns ardvare Expansio Tourch I Popup Me Glock Ly wWeE NviEw 655 Appendix E Multi HMIs Intercommunication Master Slave Mode Multi HMIs intercommunication means that HMI uses COM port to connect a remote HMI and read write data from to a remote PLC as below CEED COM 2 Above shows the PLC connects

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Jocel JACV-09HRN1/QC2 air conditioner  El dron más pequeño del mundo jamás fabricado  DDH3500 - Ecor Pro  取扱説明書ダウンロード  Wij gaan een 3D-printer bouwen  User Manual  Ayuda Memoria  Arboria Hampton Landscape Screen User's Manual  XZMP3 Man EN  Arnova 7c G3 Operating Instructions  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file